This is a modern-English version of How to Speak and Write Correctly, originally written by Devlin, Joseph.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
HOW TO
SPEAK AND WRITE
CORRECTLY
By
JOSEPH DEVLIN, M.A.
By JOSEPH DEVLIN, M.A.
Edited by
THEODORE WATERS
Edited by
THEO WATERS
THE CHRISTIAN HERALD
BIBLE HOUSE
NEW YORK
THE CHRISTIAN HERALD BIBLE HOUSE NEW YORK
Copyright, 1910, by
THE CHRISTIAN HERALD
NEW YORK
Copyright, 1910, by
THE CHRISTIAN HERALD
NEW YORK
CONTENTS
CHAPTER I
REQUIREMENTS OF SPEECH
Vocabulary. Parts of speech. Requisites
CHAPTER I
REQUIREMENTS OF SPEECH
Vocabulary. Parts of speech. Essentials
CHAPTER II
ESSENTIALS OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR
Divisions of grammar. Definitions. Etymology.
CHAPTER II
ESSENTIALS OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR
Parts of grammar. Definitions. Word origins.
CHAPTER III
THE SENTENCE
Different kinds. Arrangement of words. Paragraph.
CHAPTER III
THE SENTENCE
Various types. Word arrangement. Paragraph.
CHAPTER IV
FIGURATIVE LANGUAGE
Figures of speech. Definitions and examples. Use of figures.
CHAPTER IV
FIGURATIVE LANGUAGE
Figures of speech. Definitions and examples. Use of figures.
CHAPTER V
PUNCTUATION
Principal points. Illustrations. Capital letters.
CHAPTER V
PUNCTUATION
Main points. Examples. Capital letters.
CHAPTER VI
LETTER WRITING
Principles of letter writing. Forms. Notes.
CHAPTER VI
LETTER WRITING
Basics of letter writing. Formats. Notes.
CHAPTER VII
ERRORS
Mistakes. Slips of authors. Examples and corrections.
Errors of redundancy.
CHAPTER VII
ERRORS
Mistakes. Author missteps. Examples and corrections.
Redundancy errors.
CHAPTER VIII
PITFALLS TO AVOID
Common stumbling blocks. Peculiar constructions. Misused forms.
CHAPTER VIII
PITFALLS TO AVOID
Common mistakes. Unusual structures. Incorrectly used forms.
CHAPTER IX
STYLE
Diction. Purity. Propriety. Precision.
CHAPTER IX
STYLE
Word choice. Clarity. Decency. Accuracy.
CHAPTER X
SUGGESTIONS
How to write. What to write. Correct speaking and speakers.
CHAPTER X
SUGGESTIONS
How to write. What to write. Proper speaking and speakers.
CHAPTER XI
SLANG
Origin. American slang. Foreign slang.
CHAPTER XI
SLANG
Origin. American slang. Foreign slang.
CHAPTER XII
WRITING FOR NEWSPAPERS
Qualification. Appropriate subjects. Directions.
CHAPTER XII
WRITING FOR NEWSPAPERS
Qualifications. Suitable topics. Guidelines.
CHAPTER XIII
CHOICE OF WORDS
Small words. Their importance. The Anglo-Saxon element.
CHAPTER XIII
CHOICE OF WORDS
Simple words. Their significance. The Anglo-Saxon influence.
CHAPTER XIV
ENGLISH LANGUAGE
Beginning. Different Sources. The present.
CHAPTER XIV
ENGLISH LANGUAGE
Beginning. Different Sources. The present.
CHAPTER XV
MASTERS AND MASTERPIECES OF LITERATURE
Great authors. Classification. The world's best books.
CHAPTER XV
MASTERS AND MASTERPIECES OF LITERATURE
Great authors. Categories. The best books in the world.
INTRODUCTION
In the preparation of this little work the writer has kept one end in view, viz.: To make it serviceable for those for whom it is intended, that is, for those who have neither the time nor the opportunity, the learning nor the inclination, to peruse elaborate and abstruse treatises on Rhetoric, Grammar, and Composition. To them such works are as gold enclosed in chests of steel and locked beyond power of opening. This book has no pretension about it whatever,—it is neither a Manual of Rhetoric, expatiating on the dogmas of style, nor a Grammar full of arbitrary rules and exceptions. It is merely an effort to help ordinary, everyday people to express themselves in ordinary, everyday language, in a proper manner. Some broad rules are laid down, the observance of which will enable the reader to keep within the pale of propriety in oral and written language. Many idiomatic words and expressions, peculiar to the language, have been given, besides which a number of the common mistakes and pitfalls have been placed before the reader so that he may know and avoid them.
In creating this little book, the author had one main goal: to make it useful for those it's meant for—people who don’t have the time, opportunity, knowledge, or interest to read complicated and obscure texts on Rhetoric, Grammar, and Composition. For them, such works are like gold locked away in impenetrable chests. This book doesn't pretend to be anything it’s not—it’s neither a Manual of Rhetoric that explores the intricacies of style nor a Grammar loaded with arbitrary rules and exceptions. It’s simply an attempt to help everyday people express themselves in straightforward, everyday language in an appropriate way. Some general guidelines are laid out, and following them will help the reader stay within the bounds of proper spoken and written language. Many idiomatic words and expressions unique to the language are included, as well as a number of common mistakes and traps so that the reader can recognize and avoid them.
The writer has to acknowledge his indebtedness to no one in particular, but to all in general who have ever written on the subject.
The writer must recognize that he owes a debt not to any one person in particular, but to everyone in general who has ever written on the topic.
The little book goes forth—a finger-post on the road of language pointing in the right direction. It is hoped that they who go according to its index will arrive at the goal of correct speaking and writing.
The little book sets out—a guide on the path of language pointing the way forward. It's hoped that those who follow its guidance will reach the destination of proper speaking and writing.
CHAPTER I
REQUIREMENTS OF SPEECH
Vocabulary—Parts of Speech—Requisites
It is very easy to learn how to speak and write correctly, as for all purposes of ordinary conversation and communication, only about 2,000 different words are required. The mastery of just twenty hundred words, the knowing where to place them, will make us not masters of the English language, but masters of correct speaking and writing. Small number, you will say, compared with what is in the dictionary! But nobody ever uses all the words in the dictionary or could use them did he live to be the age of Methuselah, and there is no necessity for using them.
It's really easy to learn how to speak and write correctly because for everyday conversations and communication, you only need around 2,000 different words. Mastering just those two thousand words and knowing how to use them will make us not experts in the English language, but skilled at speaking and writing correctly. You might think that’s a small number compared to what’s in the dictionary! But no one actually uses all the words in the dictionary, even if they lived to be as old as Methuselah, and there's no need to use them all.
There are upwards of 200,000 words in the recent editions of the large dictionaries, but the one-hundredth part of this number will suffice for all your wants. Of course you may think not, and you may not be content to call things by their common names; you may be ambitious to show superiority over others and display your learning or, rather, your pedantry and lack of learning. For instance, you may not want to call a spade a spade. You may prefer to call it a spatulous device for abrading the surface of the soil. Better, however, to stick to the old familiar, simple name that your grandfather called it. It has stood the test of time, and old friends are always good friends.
There are over 200,000 words in the latest editions of large dictionaries, but just one-hundredth of that number will meet all your needs. Of course, you might disagree, and you may not be satisfied with calling things by their everyday names; you might feel the need to show off and demonstrate your knowledge or, rather, your pretentiousness and lack of true understanding. For example, you might not want to just call a spade a spade. You might prefer to call it a "spatulous device for abrading the surface of the soil." However, it’s better to stick with the old, familiar, simple name that your grandfather used. It has stood the test of time, and old friends are always good friends.
To use a big word or a foreign word when a small one and a familiar one will answer the same purpose, is a sign of ignorance. Great scholars and writers and polite speakers use simple words.
Using a complex or foreign word when a simpler, familiar one would do the job just as well is a sign of ignorance. Great scholars, writers, and polite speakers choose simple words.
To go back to the number necessary for all purposes of conversation correspondence and writing, 2,000, we find that a great many people who pass in society as being polished, refined and educated use less, for they know less. The greatest scholar alive hasn't more than four thousand different words at his command, and he never has occasion to use half the number.
To return to the number needed for all aspects of conversation, correspondence, and writing—2,000—we see that many people who seem polished, refined, and educated actually use fewer, because they know less. The greatest scholar alive doesn’t have more than four thousand different words at his disposal, and he rarely needs to use half of them.
In the works of Shakespeare, the most wonderful genius the world has ever known, there is the enormous number of 15,000 different words, but almost 10,000 of them are obsolete or meaningless today.
In Shakespeare's works, the greatest genius the world has ever known, there are a staggering 15,000 different words, but nearly 10,000 of them are outdated or meaningless today.
Every person of intelligence should be able to use his mother tongue correctly. It only requires a little pains, a little care, a little study to enable one to do so, and the recompense is great.
Every intelligent person should be able to use their native language correctly. It just takes a bit of effort, some care, and a little studying to achieve this, and the reward is substantial.
Consider the contrast between the well-bred, polite man who knows how to choose and use his words correctly and the underbred, vulgar boor, whose language grates upon the ear and jars the sensitiveness of the finer feelings. The blunders of the latter, his infringement of all the canons of grammar, his absurdities and monstrosities of language, make his very presence a pain, and one is glad to escape from his company.
Think about the difference between a well-mannered, polite guy who knows how to choose and use his words properly and a rude, uncouth person whose speech is uncomfortable to listen to and clashes with more refined sensibilities. The mistakes of the latter, his disregard for grammar rules, and his ridiculous and awkward way of speaking make being around him unpleasant, and you feel relieved to get away from him.
The proper grammatical formation of the English language, so that one may acquit himself as a correct conversationalist in the best society or be able to write and express his thoughts and ideas upon paper in the right manner, may be acquired in a few lessons.
The correct use of English grammar, so that someone can speak properly in high society or effectively write down their thoughts and ideas, can be learned in just a few lessons.
It is the purpose of this book, as briefly and concisely as possible, to direct the reader along a straight course, pointing out the mistakes he must avoid and giving him such assistance as will enable him to reach the goal of a correct knowledge of the English language. It is not a Grammar in any sense, but a guide, a silent signal-post pointing the way in the right direction.
The goal of this book is to clearly and directly guide the reader on a straightforward path, highlighting the mistakes to avoid and providing the support needed to achieve a solid understanding of the English language. It’s not a grammar book in the traditional sense, but more of a guide—a quiet signpost indicating the correct direction.
THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE IN A NUTSHELL
All the words in the English language are divided into nine great classes. These classes are called the Parts of Speech. They are Article, Noun, Adjective, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction and Interjection. Of these, the Noun is the most important, as all the others are more or less dependent upon it. A Noun signifies the name of any person, place or thing, in fact, anything of which we can have either thought or idea. There are two kinds of Nouns, Proper and Common. Common Nouns are names which belong in common to a race or class, as man, city. Proper Nouns distinguish individual members of a race or class as John, Philadelphia. In the former case man is a name which belongs in common to the whole race of mankind, and city is also a name which is common to all large centres of population, but John signifies a particular individual of the race, while Philadelphia denotes a particular one from among the cities of the world.
All the words in the English language are divided into nine main categories. These categories are called the Parts of Speech. They are Article, Noun, Adjective, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction, and Interjection. Among these, the Noun is the most important, as all the others depend on it in some way. A Noun represents the name of any person, place, or thing, essentially anything we can think about or conceptualize. There are two types of Nouns: Proper and Common. Common Nouns are names that apply to a group or class, like man or city. Proper Nouns identify specific members of a group or class, such as John or Philadelphia. In the first case, man is a name that applies to all of humanity, and city is a name that is used for all large population centers, while John refers to a specific person and Philadelphia refers to a specific city among the many in the world.
Nouns are varied by Person, Number, Gender, and Case. Person is that relation existing between the speaker, those addressed and the subject under consideration, whether by discourse or correspondence. The Persons are First, Second and Third and they represent respectively the speaker, the person addressed and the person or thing mentioned or under consideration.
Nouns vary by person, number, gender, and case. Person refers to the relationship between the speaker, the person being addressed, and the subject being discussed, whether in conversation or writing. The persons are First, Second, and Third, representing respectively the speaker, the person being addressed, and the person or thing being mentioned or considered.
Number is the distinction of one from more than one. There are two numbers, singular and plural; the singular denotes one, the plural two or more. The plural is generally formed from the singular by the addition of s or es.
Number refers to the distinction between one and more than one. There are two types of numbers: singular and plural; the singular indicates one, while the plural indicates two or more. The plural is usually created from the singular by adding s or es.
Gender has the same relation to nouns that sex has to individuals, but while there are only two sexes, there are four genders, viz., masculine, feminine, neuter and common. The masculine gender denotes all those of the male kind, the feminine gender all those of the female kind, the neuter gender denotes inanimate things or whatever is without life, and common gender is applied to animate beings, the sex of which for the time being is indeterminable, such as fish, mouse, bird, etc. Sometimes things which are without life as we conceive it and which, properly speaking, belong to the neuter gender, are, by a figure of speech called Personification, changed into either the masculine or feminine gender, as, for instance, we say of the sun, He is rising; of the moon, She is setting.
Gender relates to nouns in the same way that sex relates to individuals. However, while there are only two sexes, there are four genders: masculine, feminine, neuter, and common. The masculine gender refers to all male beings, the feminine gender refers to all female beings, the neuter gender represents inanimate objects or anything lifeless, and the common gender is used for living beings whose sex is uncertain at the moment, like fish, mice, birds, etc. Sometimes, inanimate objects that we typically consider neuter can be personified and referred to as either masculine or feminine. For example, we say of the sun, He is rising; and of the moon, She is setting.
Case is the relation one noun bears to another or to a verb or to a preposition. There are three cases, the Nominative, the Possessive and the Objective. The nominative is the subject of which we are speaking or the agent which directs the action of the verb; the possessive case denotes possession, while the objective indicates the person or thing which is affected by the action of the verb.
Case refers to the relationship one noun has with another noun, a verb, or a preposition. There are three cases: the Nominative, the Possessive, and the Objective. The nominative case is the subject we’re discussing or the agent that performs the action of the verb; the possessive case shows ownership, and the objective case indicates the person or thing that is affected by the action of the verb.
An Article is a word placed before a noun to show whether the latter is used in a particular or general sense. There are but two articles, a or an and the.
An Article is a word that comes before a noun to indicate whether the noun is being used in a specific or general way. There are only two articles, a or an and the.
An Adjective is a word which qualifies a noun, that is, which shows some distinguishing mark or characteristic belonging to the noun.
An Adjective is a word that describes a noun, meaning it indicates some specific feature or characteristic of the noun.
DEFINITIONS
A Pronoun is a word used for or instead of a noun to keep us from repeating the same noun too often. Pronouns, like nouns, have case, number, gender and person. There are three kinds of pronouns, personal, relative and adjective.
A Pronoun is a word used to replace a noun so that we don’t have to repeat the same noun too many times. Pronouns, like nouns, have case, number, gender, and person. There are three types of pronouns: personal, relative, and adjective.
A verb is a word which signifies action or the doing of something. A verb is inflected by tense and mood and by number and person, though the latter two belong strictly to the subject of the verb.
A verb is a word that indicates action or the act of doing something. A verb changes form based on tense and mood, as well as number and person, although the last two specifically relate to the subject of the verb.
An adverb is a word which modifies a verb, an adjective and sometimes another adverb.
An adverb is a word that changes a verb, an adjective, or sometimes another adverb.
A preposition serves to connect words and to show the relation between the objects which the words express.
A preposition connects words and shows the relationship between the objects that the words represent.
A conjunction is a word which joins words, phrases, clauses and sentences together.
A conjunction is a word that connects words, phrases, clauses, and sentences.
An interjection is a word which expresses surprise or some sudden emotion of the mind.
An interjection is a word that shows surprise or some quick emotion.
THREE ESSENTIALS
The three essentials of the English language are: Purity, Perspicuity and Precision.
The three essentials of the English language are: Purity, Clarity, and Precision.
By Purity is signified the use of good English. It precludes the use of all slang words, vulgar phrases, obsolete terms, foreign idioms, ambiguous expressions or any ungrammatical language whatsoever. Neither does it sanction the use of any newly coined word until such word is adopted by the best writers and speakers.
By Purity is meant the use of proper English. It excludes all slang, vulgar phrases, outdated terms, foreign idioms, unclear expressions, or any form of ungrammatical language. It also doesn't allow the use of any newly created words until they are accepted by the best writers and speakers.
Perspicuity demands the clearest expression of thought conveyed in unequivocal language, so that there may be no misunderstanding whatever of the thought or idea the speaker or writer wishes to convey. All ambiguous words, words of double meaning and words that might possibly be construed in a sense different from that intended, are strictly forbidden. Perspicuity requires a style at once clear and comprehensive and entirely free from pomp and pedantry and affectation or any straining after effect.
Clarity demands the clearest expression of thought conveyed in straightforward language, so there is no misunderstanding of the idea the speaker or writer wants to express. All ambiguous words, words with double meanings, and words that could be interpreted differently than intended are strictly prohibited. Clarity requires a style that is both clear and comprehensive, completely free from pompousness, pretentiousness, and any attempts to create an effect.
Precision requires concise and exact expression, free from redundancy and tautology, a style terse and clear and simple enough to enable the hearer or reader to comprehend immediately the meaning of the speaker or writer. It forbids, on the one hand, all long and involved sentences, and, on the other, those that are too short and abrupt. Its object is to strike the golden mean in such a way as to rivet the attention of the hearer or reader on the words uttered or written.
Precision requires clear and exact communication, free from unnecessary words and repetition, with a style that is straightforward and easy to understand so that the listener or reader can grasp the speaker's or writer's meaning right away. It avoids, on one hand, long and complicated sentences, and, on the other, ones that are too short and blunt. Its goal is to find a balance that captures the listener's or reader's attention on the words being spoken or written.
CHAPTER II
ESSENTIALS OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR
Divisions of Grammar—Definitions—Etymology.
In order to speak and write the English language correctly, it is imperative that the fundamental principles of the Grammar be mastered, for no matter how much we may read of the best authors, no matter how much we may associate with and imitate the best speakers, if we do not know the underlying principles of the correct formation of sentences and the relation of words to one another, we will be to a great extent like the parrot, that merely repeats what it hears without understanding the import of what is said. Of course the parrot, being a creature without reason, cannot comprehend; it can simply repeat what is said to it, and as it utters phrases and sentences of profanity with as much facility as those of virtue, so by like analogy, when we do not understand the grammar of the language, we may be making egregious blunders while thinking we are speaking with the utmost accuracy.
To speak and write in English correctly, it’s essential to master the basic principles of grammar. No matter how much we read from great authors or how much we associate with and imitate skilled speakers, if we don't understand the basic rules for forming sentences and how words relate to each other, we’ll largely be like a parrot that just repeats what it hears without grasping its meaning. Of course, a parrot, being an unthinking creature, can’t comprehend; it simply mimics what it hears. Just as a parrot can repeat profane phrases as easily as virtuous ones, similarly, if we don’t understand grammar, we might make serious mistakes while believing we’re speaking perfectly.
DIVISIONS OF GRAMMAR
There are four great divisions of Grammar, viz.:
There are four main branches of Grammar, namely:
Orthography, Etymology, Syntax, and Prosody.
Orthography, Etymology, Syntax, and Prosody.
Orthography treats of letters and the mode of combining them into words.
Orthography deals with letters and how to combine them into words.
Etymology treats of the various classes of words and the changes they undergo.
Etymology explores the different types of words and the changes they go through.
Syntax treats of the connection and arrangement of words in sentences.
Syntax deals with how words are connected and arranged in sentences.
Prosody treats of the manner of speaking and reading and the different kinds of verse.
Prosody explores how we speak and read, along with the various types of poetry.
The three first mentioned concern us most.
The first three mentioned are the ones that concern us the most.
LETTERS
A letter is a mark or character used to represent an articulate sound. Letters are divided into vowels and consonants. A vowel is a letter which makes a distinct sound by itself. Consonants cannot be sounded without the aid of vowels. The vowels are a, e, i, o, u, and sometimes w and y when they do not begin a word or syllable.
A letter is a symbol or character used to represent a sound that we can articulate. Letters are classified as vowels and consonants. A vowel is a letter that produces a distinct sound on its own. Consonants need vowels to be pronounced. The vowels are a, e, i, o, u, and sometimes w and y when they aren't at the start of a word or syllable.
SYLLABLES AND WORDS
A syllable is a distinct sound produced by a single effort of [Transcriber's note: 1-2 words illegible] shall, pig, dog. In every syllable there must be at least one vowel.
A syllable is a distinct sound made in a single effort, like "shall," "pig," or "dog." Every syllable must contain at least one vowel.
A word consists of one syllable or a combination of syllables.
A word is made up of one syllable or a mix of syllables.
Many rules are given for the dividing of words into syllables, but the best is to follow as closely as possible the divisions made by the organs of speech in properly pronouncing them.
Many rules exist for dividing words into syllables, but the best approach is to closely follow the divisions made by the speech organs when pronouncing them correctly.
THE PARTS OF SPEECH
ARTICLE
An Article is a word placed before a noun to show whether the noun is used in a particular or general sense.
An Article is a word that comes before a noun to indicate whether the noun is being used in a specific or general way.
There are two articles, a or an and the. A or an is called the indefinite article because it does not point put any particular person or thing but indicates the noun in its widest sense; thus, a man means any man whatsoever of the species or race.
There are two articles, a or an and the. A or an is called the indefinite article because it doesn't refer to any specific person or thing but indicates the noun in its broadest sense; thus, a man means any man at all of the species or race.
The is called the definite article because it points out some particular person or thing; thus, the man means some particular individual.
The is called the definite article because it identifies a specific person or thing; so, the man refers to a particular individual.
NOUN
A noun is the name of any person, place or thing as John, London, book. Nouns are proper and common.
A noun is the name of any person, place, or thing like John, London, book. Nouns are categorized as proper and common.
Proper nouns are names applied to particular persons or places.
Proper nouns are names given to specific people or places.
Common nouns are names applied to a whole kind or species.
Common nouns are names given to an entire type or category.
Nouns are inflected by number, gender and case.
Nouns change based on number, gender, and case.
Number is that inflection of the noun by which we indicate whether it represents one or more than one.
Number refers to the form of a noun that shows whether it represents one or more than one.
Gender is that inflection by which we signify whether the noun is the name of a male, a female, of an inanimate object or something which has no distinction of sex.
Gender is the way we indicate whether a noun refers to a male, a female, an inanimate object, or something that doesn't have a gender.
Case is that inflection of the noun which denotes the state of the person, place or thing represented, as the subject of an affirmation or question, the owner or possessor of something mentioned, or the object of an action or of a relation.
Case refers to the form of a noun that indicates the status of the person, place, or thing it represents, such as whether it's the subject of a statement or question, the owner of something, or the object of an action or relationship.
Thus in the example, "John tore the leaves of Sarah's book," the distinction between book which represents only one object and leaves which represent two or more objects of the same kind is called Number; the distinction of sex between John, a male, and Sarah, a female, and book and leaves, things which are inanimate and neither male nor female, is called Gender; and the distinction of state between John, the person who tore the book, and the subject of the affirmation, Mary, the owner of the book, leaves the objects torn, and book the object related to leaves, as the whole of which they were a part, is called Case.
In the example, "John tore the pages of Sarah's book," the difference between book, which refers to a single item, and pages, which refers to two or more items of the same type, is called Number; the difference in gender between John, a male, and Sarah, a female, as well as book and pages, which are inanimate and not classified as male or female, is called Gender; and the difference in role between John, the person who tore the book, and Mary, the owner of the book, pages as the items that were torn, and book as the item they were part of, is called Case.
ADJECTIVE
An adjective is a word which qualifies a noun, that is, shows or points out some distinguishing mark or feature of the noun; as, A black dog.
An adjective is a word that describes a noun, meaning it indicates some distinguishing trait or characteristic of the noun; for example, A black dog.
Adjectives have three forms called degrees of comparison, the positive, the comparative and the superlative.
Adjectives have three forms known as degrees of comparison: the positive, the comparative, and the superlative.
The positive is the simple form of the adjective without expressing increase or diminution of the original quality: nice.
The positive is the basic form of the adjective that doesn’t indicate a greater or lesser degree of the original quality: nice.
The comparative is that form of the adjective which expresses increase or diminution of the quality: nicer.
The comparative is the form of the adjective that shows an increase or decrease in quality: nicer.
The superlative is that form which expresses the greatest increase or diminution of the quality: nicest.
The superlative is the form that shows the highest degree of a quality: nicest.
or
or
An adjective is in the positive form when it does not express comparison; as, "A rich man."
An adjective is in the positive form when it doesn’t indicate comparison; for example, "A rich man."
An adjective is in the comparative form when it expresses comparison between two or between one and a number taken collectively, as, "John is richer than James"; "he is richer than all the men in Boston."
An adjective is in the comparative form when it compares two things or one thing to a group, as in, "John is richer than James"; "he is richer than all the men in Boston."
An adjective is in the superlative form when it expresses a comparison between one and a number of individuals taken separately; as, "John is the richest man in Boston."
An adjective is in the superlative form when it shows a comparison between one person and several others considered individually; for example, "John is the richest man in Boston."
Adjectives expressive of properties or circumstances which cannot be increased have only the positive form; as, A circular road; the chief end; an extreme measure.
Adjectives that describe qualities or situations that can’t be increased only have the positive form; for example, a circular road; the chief end; an extreme measure.
Adjectives are compared in two ways, either by adding er to the positive to form the comparative and est to the positive to form the superlative, or by prefixing more to the positive for the comparative and most to the positive for the superlative; as, handsome, handsomer, handsomest or handsome, more handsome, most handsome.
Adjectives can be compared in two ways: by adding er to the positive form to create the comparative and est to the positive form to create the superlative, or by using more for the comparative and most for the superlative; for example, handsome, handsomer, handsomest or handsome, more handsome, most handsome.
Adjectives of two or more syllables are generally compared by prefixing more and most.
Adjectives with two or more syllables are usually compared by adding "more" and "most."
Many adjectives are irregular in comparison; as, Bad, worse, worst; Good, better, best.
Many adjectives have irregular forms when comparing, like bad, worse, worst; good, better, best.
PRONOUN
A pronoun is a word used in place of a noun; as, "John gave his pen to James and he lent it to Jane to write her copy with it." Without the pronouns we would have to write this sentence,—"John gave John's pen to James and James lent the pen to Jane to write Jane's copy with the pen."
A pronoun is a word that replaces a noun; for example, "John gave his pen to James and he lent it to Jane to write her copy with it." Without pronouns, we would have to write this sentence as, "John gave John's pen to James and James lent the pen to Jane to write Jane's copy with the pen."
There are three kinds of pronouns—Personal, Relative and Adjective Pronouns.
There are three types of pronouns—Personal, Relative, and Adjective Pronouns.
Personal Pronouns are so called because they are used instead of the names of persons, places and things. The Personal Pronouns are I, Thou, He, She, and It, with their plurals, We, Ye or You and They.
Personal Pronouns are called that because they replace the names of people, places, and things. The Personal Pronouns are I, You, He, She, and It, along with their plurals, We, You, and They.
I is the pronoun of the first person because it represents the person speaking.
I is the first-person pronoun because it refers to the person speaking.
Thou is the pronoun of the second person because it represents the person spoken to.
You is the pronoun of the second person because it represents the person being spoken to.
He, She, It are the pronouns of the third person because they represent the persons or things of whom we are speaking.
He, She, It are the third-person pronouns because they refer to the people or things we are talking about.
Like nouns, the Personal Pronouns have number, gender and case. The gender of the first and second person is obvious, as they represent the person or persons speaking and those who are addressed. The personal pronouns are thus declined:
Like nouns, personal pronouns have number, gender, and case. The gender of the first and second person is clear, as they represent the person or people speaking and those being addressed. The personal pronouns are therefore declined:
First Person.
M. or F.
First Person.
Male or Female.
Sing. | Plural. | |
---|---|---|
N. | I | We |
P. | Mine | Ours |
O. | Me | Us |
Second Person.
M. or F.
Second Person.
Male or Female.
Sing. | Plural. | |
---|---|---|
N. | Thou | You |
P. | Thine | Yours |
O. | Thee | You |
Third Person.
M.
Third Person. M.
Sing. | Plural. | |
---|---|---|
N. | He | They |
P. | His | Theirs |
O. | Him | Them |
Third Person.
F.
Third Person.
F.
Sing. | Plural. | |
---|---|---|
N. | She | They |
P. | Hers | Theirs |
O. | Her | Them |
Third Person.
Neuter.
Third Person.
Neutral.
Sing. | Plural. | |
---|---|---|
N. | It | They |
P. | Its | Theirs |
O. | It | Them |
N. B.—In colloquial language and ordinary writing Thou, Thine and Thee are seldom used, except by the Society of Friends. The Plural form You is used for both the nominative and objective singular in the second person and Yours is generally used in the possessive in place of Thine.
N. B.—In everyday language and regular writing, you rarely see Thou, Thine, and Thee, except among the Quakers. The plural form You is used as both the nominative and objective singular in the second person, and Yours is typically used in the possessive instead of Thine.
The Relative Pronouns are so called because they relate to some word or phrase going before; as, "The boy who told the truth;" "He has done well, which gives me great pleasure."
The Relative Pronouns are named that way because they refer back to a word or phrase mentioned earlier, like, "The boy who told the truth;" "He has done well, which makes me very happy."
Here who and which are not only used in place of other words, but who refers immediately to boy, and which to the circumstance of his having done well.
Here who and which are not only used as substitutes for other words, but who directly refers to the boy, and which refers to the fact that he has done well.
The word or clause to which a relative pronoun refers is called the Antecedent.
The word or phrase that a relative pronoun refers to is called the Antecedent.
The Relative Pronouns are who, which, that and what.
The relative pronouns are who, which, that, and what.
Who is applied to persons only; as, "The man who was here."
Who is used only for people; for example, "The man who was here."
Which is applied to the lower animals and things without life; as, "The horse which I sold." "The hat which I bought."
Which is used for animals and inanimate objects; for example, "The horse which I sold." "The hat which I bought."
That is applied to both persons and things; as, "The friend that helps." "The bird that sings." "The knife that cuts."
That is used for both people and objects; for example, "The friend that helps." "The bird that sings." "The knife that cuts."
What is a compound relative, including both the antecedent and the relative and is equivalent to that which; as, "I did what he desired," i. e. "I did that which he desired."
What is a compound relative, including both the antecedent and the relative and is equivalent to that which; as, "I did what he wanted," i.e. "I did that which he wanted."
Relative pronouns have the singular and plural alike.
Relative pronouns can be singular or plural.
Who is either masculine or feminine; which and that are masculine, feminine or neuter; what as a relative pronoun is always neuter.
Who can be either masculine or feminine; which and that can be masculine, feminine, or neuter; what as a relative pronoun is always neuter.
That and what are not inflected.
That and what are not inflected.
Who and which are thus declined:
Who and which are declined:
Sing. and Plural | Sing. and Plural | |||
---|---|---|---|---|
N. | Who | N. | Which | |
P. | Whose | P. | Whose | |
O. | Whom | O. | Which |
Who, which and what when used to ask questions are called Interrogative Pronouns.
Who, which, and what used to ask questions are called Interrogative Pronouns.
Adjective Pronouns partake of the nature of adjectives and pronouns and are subdivided as follows:
Adjective Pronouns share characteristics of both adjectives and pronouns and are divided into the following categories:
Demonstrative Adjective Pronouns which directly point out the person or object. They are this, that with their plurals these, those, and yon, same and selfsame.
Demonstrative Adjective Pronouns are used to directly indicate a person or object. They include this, that, along with their plurals these, those, and yon, same, and selfsame.
Distributive Adjective Pronouns used distributively. They are each, every, either, neither.
Distributive Adjective Pronouns are each, every, either, neither.
Indefinite Adjective Pronouns used more or less indefinitely. They are any, all, few, some, several, one, other, another, none.
Indefinite Adjective Pronouns used more or less indefinitely. They are any, all, few, some, several, one, other, another, none.
Possessive Adjective Pronouns denoting possession. They are my, thy, his, her, its, our, your, their.
Possessive Adjective Pronouns showing ownership. They are my, your, his, her, its, our, your, their.
N. B.—(The possessive adjective pronouns differ from the possessive case of the personal pronouns in that the latter can stand alone while the former cannot. "Who owns that book?" "It is mine." You cannot say "it is my,"—the word book must be repeated.)
N. B.—(The possessive adjective pronouns are different from the possessive case of personal pronouns because the latter can stand alone while the former cannot. "Who owns that book?" "It is mine." You can't say "it is my,"—you have to repeat the word book.)
THE VERB
A verb is a word which implies action or the doing of something, or it may be defined as a word which affirms, commands or asks a question.
A verb is a word that indicates action or describes what someone is doing, or it can be defined as a word that makes a statement, gives a command, or asks a question.
Thus, the words John the table, contain no assertion, but when the word strikes is introduced, something is affirmed, hence the word strikes is a verb and gives completeness and meaning to the group.
Thus, the words John the table don't make any assertion, but when the word strikes is added, something is confirmed. Therefore, the word strikes is a verb that adds completeness and meaning to the group.
The simple form of the verb without inflection is called the root of the verb; e. g. love is the root of the verb,—"To Love."
The basic form of the verb without any changes is called the root of the verb; e.g. love is the root of the verb—"To Love."
Verbs are regular or irregular, transitive or intransitive.
Verbs are regular or irregular, transitive or intransitive.
A verb is said to be regular when it forms the past tense by adding ed to the present or d if the verb ends in e. When its past tense does not end in ed it is said to be irregular.
A verb is considered regular when it forms the past tense by adding ed to the present form or d if the verb ends in e. If its past tense doesn’t end in ed, it is referred to as irregular.
A transitive verb is one the action of which passes over to or affects some object; as "I struck the table." Here the action of striking affected the object table, hence struck is a transitive verb.
A transitive verb is one where the action affects something else; for example, "I hit the table." In this case, the action of hitting affects the object table, so hit is a transitive verb.
An intransitive verb is one in which the action remains with the subject; as "I walk," "I sit," "I run."
An intransitive verb is one where the action stays with the subject; like "I walk," "I sit," "I run."
Many intransitive verbs, however, can be used transitively; thus, "I walk the horse;" walk is here transitive.
Many intransitive verbs, however, can be used transitively; for example, "I walk the horse;" walk is transitive here.
Verbs are inflected by number, person, tense and mood.
Verbs change based on number, person, tense, and mood.
Number and person as applied to the verb really belong to the subject; they are used with the verb to denote whether the assertion is made regarding one or more than one and whether it is made in reference to the person speaking, the person spoken to or the person or thing spoken about.
Number and person as related to the verb actually refer to the subject; they are used with the verb to indicate whether the statement is about one or more and whether it pertains to the speaker, the listener, or the person or thing being talked about.
TENSE
In their tenses verbs follow the divisions of time. They have present tense, past tense and future tense with their variations to express the exact time of action as to an event happening, having happened or yet to happen.
In their tenses, verbs align with the divisions of time. They include present tense, past tense, and future tense, each with variations to indicate the precise timing of an action—whether it's happening now, has already happened, or is going to happen.
MOOD
There are four simple moods,—the Infinitive, the Indicative, the Imperative and the Subjunctive.
There are four simple moods: the Infinitive, the Indicative, the Imperative, and the Subjunctive.
The Mood of a verb denotes the mode or manner in which it is used. Thus if it is used in its widest sense without reference to person or number, time or place, it is in the Infinitive Mood; as "To run." Here we are not told who does the running, when it is done, where it is done or anything about it.
The mood of a verb describes how it's used. If it's used in its broadest sense without any reference to person, number, time, or place, it's in the infinitive mood, like "to run." In this case, we're not given any information about who is running, when it happens, where it takes place, or any other details.
When a verb is used to indicate or declare or ask a simple question or make any direct statement, it is in the Indicative Mood. "The boy loves his book." Here a direct statement is made concerning the boy. "Have you a pin?" Here a simple question is asked which calls for an answer.
When a verb is used to indicate, declare, ask a simple question, or make any direct statement, it is in the Indicative Mood. "The boy loves his book." Here, a direct statement is made about the boy. "Do you have a pin?" Here, a simple question is asked that requires an answer.
When the verb is used to express a command or entreaty it is in the Imperative Mood as, "Go away." "Give me a penny."
When the verb is used to express a command or request, it is in the Imperative Mood, as in "Go away." "Give me a penny."
When the verb is used to express doubt, supposition or uncertainty or when some future action depends upon a contingency, it is in the subjunctive mood; as, "If I come, he shall remain."
When the verb is used to express doubt, assumption, or uncertainty, or when a future action depends on a condition, it is in the subjunctive mood; for example, "If I come, he will stay."
Many grammarians include a fifth mood called the potential to express power, possibility, liberty, necessity, will or duty. It is formed by means of the auxiliaries may, can, ought and must, but in all cases it can be resolved into the indicative or subjunctive. Thus, in "I may write if I choose," "may write" is by some classified as in the potential mood, but in reality the phrase I may write is an indicative one while the second clause, if I choose, is the expression of a condition upon which, not my liberty to write, depends, but my actual writing.
Many grammarians include a fifth mood called the potential to express power, possibility, freedom, necessity, will, or duty. It's formed using the auxiliaries may, can, ought, and must, but in all cases, it can be broken down into the indicative or subjunctive. For example, in "I may write if I choose," "may write" is classified by some as being in the potential mood, but actually, the phrase I may write is indicative, while the second clause, if I choose, expresses a condition that affects my actual writing, not my freedom to write.
Verbs have two participles, the present or imperfect, sometimes called the active ending in ing and the past or perfect, often called the passive, ending in ed or d.
Verbs have two participles: the present or imperfect, sometimes called the active form ending in ing, and the past or perfect, often referred to as the passive, ending in ed or d.
The infinitive expresses the sense of the verb in a substantive form, the participles in an adjective form; as "To rise early is healthful." "An early rising man." "The newly risen sun."
The infinitive conveys the meaning of the verb in a noun form, while participles take on an adjective form, as in "Waking up early is healthy." "An early riser." "The newly risen sun."
The participle in ing is frequently used as a substantive and consequently is equivalent to an infinitive; thus, "To rise early is healthful" and "Rising early is healthful" are the same.
The -ing form is often used as a noun, so it works like an infinitive; for example, "To rise early is healthy" and "Rising early is healthy" mean the same thing.
The principal parts of a verb are the Present Indicative, Past Indicative and Past Participle; as:
The main parts of a verb are the Present Indicative, Past Indicative, and Past Participle; for example:
Love | Loved | Loved |
Sometimes one or more of these parts are wanting, and then the verb is said to be defective.
Sometimes one or more of these parts are missing, and then the verb is considered defective.
Present | Past | Passive Participle |
---|---|---|
Can | Could | (Wanting) |
May | Might | " |
Shall | Should | " |
Will | Would | " |
Ought | Ought | " |
Verbs may also be divided into principal and auxiliary. A principal verb is that without which a sentence or clause can contain no assertion or affirmation. An auxiliary is a verb joined to the root or participles of a principal verb to express time and manner with greater precision than can be done by the tenses and moods in their simple form. Thus, the sentence, "I am writing an exercise; when I shall have finished it I shall read it to the class." has no meaning without the principal verbs writing, finished read; but the meaning is rendered more definite, especially with regard to time, by the auxiliary verbs am, have, shall.
Verbs can also be categorized as principal and auxiliary. A principal verb is one that is essential for a sentence or clause to make any assertion or statement. An auxiliary verb is used with the root or participles of a principal verb to convey time and manner more precisely than the simple forms of tenses and moods. For example, in the sentence, "I am writing an exercise; when I have finished it, I will read it to the class," it would lack meaning without the principal verbs writing, finished, and read; however, the meaning becomes clearer, especially regarding time, because of the auxiliary verbs am, have, will.
There are nine auxiliary or helping verbs, viz., Be, have, do, shall, will, may, can, ought, and must. They are called helping verbs, because it is by their aid the compound tenses are formed.
There are nine auxiliary or helping verbs: be, have, do, shall, will, may, can, ought, and must. They're called helping verbs because they help form compound tenses.
TO BE
The verb To Be is the most important of the auxiliary verbs. It has eleven parts, viz., am, art, is, are, was, wast, were, wert; be, being and been.
The verb To Be is the most essential auxiliary verb. It has eleven forms: am, are, is, were, was, wast, wert, be, being, and been.
VOICE
The active voice is that form of the verb which shows the Subject not being acted upon but acting; as, "The cat catches mice." "Charity covers a multitude of sins."
The active voice is the verb form that shows the Subject is doing the action, not receiving it; for example, "The cat catches mice." "Charity covers a multitude of sins."
The passive voice: When the action signified by a transitive verb is thrown back upon the agent, that is to say, when the subject of the verb denotes the recipient of the action, the verb is said to be in the passive voice. "John was loved by his neighbors." Here John the subject is also the object affected by the loving, the action of the verb is thrown back on him, hence the compound verb was loved is said to be in the passive voice. The passive voice is formed by putting the perfect participle of any transitive verb with any of the eleven parts of the verb To Be.
The passive voice: When the action indicated by a transitive verb is directed back at the subject, meaning that the subject of the verb is also the receiver of the action, the verb is in the passive voice. "John was loved by his neighbors." In this sentence, John is both the subject and the object affected by the action of loving, so the action of the verb is reflected back onto him; therefore, the compound verb was loved is considered to be in the passive voice. The passive voice is created by using the perfect participle of any transitive verb along with any form of the verb To Be.
CONJUGATION
The conjugation of a verb is its orderly arrangement in voices, moods, tenses, persons and numbers.
The conjugation of a verb is its systematic organization in terms of voices, moods, tenses, persons, and numbers.
Here is the complete conjugation of the verb "Love"—Active Voice.
Here is the complete conjugation of the verb "Love"—Active Voice.
PRINCIPAL PARTS
Present | Past | Past Participle |
---|---|---|
Love | Loved | Loved |
Infinitive Mood
To Love |
Indicative Mood
PRESENT TENSE
PRESENT TENSE
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
1st person | I love | We love |
2nd person | You love | You love |
3rd person | He loves | They love |
PAST TENSE
WAS
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
1st person | I loved | We loved |
2nd person | You loved | You loved |
3rd person | He loved | They loved |
FUTURE TENSE
FUTURE TENSE
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
1st person | I shall love | They will love |
2nd person | You will love | You will love |
3rd person | He will love | We shall love |
[Transcriber's note: 1st person plural and 3rd person plural reversed in original]
[Transcriber's note: 1st person plural and 3rd person plural reversed in original]
PRESENT PERFECT TENSE
PRESENT PERFECT TENSE
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
1st person | I have loved | We have loved |
2nd person | You have loved | You have loved |
3rd person | He has loved | They have loved |
PAST PERFECT TENSE
PAST PERFECT TENSE
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
1st person | I had loved | We had loved |
2nd person | You had loved | You had loved |
3rd person | He had loved | They had loved |
FUTURE PERFECT TENSE
FUTURE PERFECT TENSE
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
1st person | I shall have loved | We shall have loved |
2nd person | You will have loved | You will have loved |
3rd person | He will have loved | They will have loved |
Imperative Mood
(PRESENT TENSE ONLY)
Understood! Please provide the text you would like modernized.
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
2nd person | Love (you) | Love (you) |
Subjunctive Mood
PRESENT TENSE
PRESENT TENSE
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
1st person | If I love | If we love |
2nd person | If you love | If you love |
3rd person | If he love | If they love |
PAST TENSE
PAST TENSE
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
1st person | If I loved | If we loved |
2nd person | If you loved | If you loved |
3rd person | If he loved | If they loved |
PRESENT PERFECT TENSE
PRESENT PERFECT TENSE
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
1st person | If I have loved | If we have loved |
2nd person | If you have loved | If you have loved |
3rd person | If he has loved | If they have loved |
PAST PERFECT TENSE
PAST PERFECT TENSE
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
1st person | If I had loved | If we had loved |
2nd person | If you had loved | If you had loved |
3rd person | If he had loved | If they had loved |
INFINITIVES
INFINITIVES
Present | Perfect |
---|---|
To love | To have loved |
PARTICIPLES
PARTICIPLES
Present | Past | Perfect |
---|---|---|
Loving | Loved | Having loved |
CONJUGATION OF "To Love"
Passive Voice
Indicative Mood
PRESENT TENSE
PRESENT TENSE
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
1st person | I am loved | We are loved |
2nd person | You are loved | You are loved |
3rd person | He is loved | They are loved |
PAST TENSE
PAST TENSE
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
1st person | I was loved | We were loved |
2nd person | You were loved | You were loved |
3rd person | He was loved | They were loved |
FUTURE TENSE
FUTURE TENSE
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
1st person | I shall be loved | We shall be loved |
2nd person | You will be loved | You will be loved |
3rd person | He will be loved | They will be loved |
PRESENT PERFECT TENSE
Present perfect tense
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
1st person | I have been loved | We have been loved |
2nd person | You have been loved | You have been loved |
3rd person | He has been loved | They have been loved |
PAST PERFECT TENSE
PAST PERFECT TENSE
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
1st person | I had been loved | We had been loved |
2nd person | You had been loved | You had been loved |
3rd person | He had been loved | They had been loved |
FUTURE PERFECT TENSE
FUTURE PERFECT TENSE
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
1st person | I shall have been loved | We shall have been loved |
2nd person | You will have been loved | You will have been loved |
3rd person | He will have been loved | They will have been loved |
Imperative Mood
(PRESENT TENSE ONLY)
Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
2nd person | Be (you) loved | Be (you) loved |
Subjunctive Mood
PRESENT TENSE
PRESENT TENSE
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
1st person | If I be loved | If we be loved |
2nd person | If you be loved | If you be loved |
3rd person | If he be loved | If they be loved |
PAST TENSE
PAST TENSE
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
1st person | If I were loved | If they were loved |
2nd person | If you were loved | If you were loved |
3rd person | If he were loved | If we were loved |
PRESENT PERFECT TENSE
PRESENT PERFECT TENSE
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
1st person | If I have been loved | If we have been loved |
2nd person | If you have been loved | If you have been loved |
3rd person | If he has been loved | If they have been loved |
PAST PERFECT TENSE
PAST PERFECT TENSE
Sing. | Plural | |
---|---|---|
1st person | If I had been loved | If we had been loved |
2nd person | If you had been loved | If you had been loved |
3rd person | If he had been loved | If they had been loved |
INFINITIVES
INFINITIVES
Present | Perfect | |
---|---|---|
To be loved | To have been loved |
PARTICIPLES
PARTICIPLES
Present | Past | Perfect |
---|---|---|
Being loved | Been loved | Having been loved |
(N. B.—Note that the plural form of the personal pronoun, you, is used in the second person singular throughout. The old form thou, except in the conjugation of the verb "To Be," may be said to be obsolete. In the third person singular he is representative of the three personal pronouns of the third person, He, She and It.)
(N. B.—Note that the plural form of the personal pronoun, you, is used in the second person singular throughout. The old form thou, except in the conjugation of the verb "To Be," can be considered obsolete. In the third person singular, he represents the three personal pronouns of the third person, He, She, and It.)
ADVERB
An adverb is a word which modifies a verb, an adjective or another adverb. Thus, in the example—"He writes well," the adverb shows the manner in which the writing is performed; in the examples—"He is remarkably diligent" and "He works very faithfully," the adverbs modify the adjective diligent and the other adverb faithfully by expressing the degree of diligence and faithfulness.
An adverb is a word that changes the meaning of a verb, an adjective, or another adverb. So, in the example—"He writes well," the adverb describes how the writing is done; in the examples—"He is remarkably diligent" and "He works very faithfully," the adverbs modify the adjective diligent and the other adverb faithfully by indicating the level of diligence and faithfulness.
Adverbs are chiefly used to express in one word what would otherwise require two or more words; thus, There signifies in that place; whence, from what place; usefully, in a useful manner.
Adverbs are mainly used to express in one word what would otherwise take two or more words; for example, There means in that place; whence means from what place; usefully means in a useful way.
Adverbs, like adjectives, are sometimes varied in their terminations to express comparison and different degrees of quality.
Adverbs, just like adjectives, are sometimes changed in their endings to show comparison and different levels of quality.
Some adverbs form the comparative and superlative by adding er and est; as, soon, sooner, soonest.
Some adverbs create their comparative and superlative forms by adding er and est; for example, soon, sooner, soonest.
Adverbs which end in ly are compared by prefixing more and most; as, nobly, more nobly, most nobly.
Adverbs that end in ly are compared by using more and most; for example, nobly, more nobly, most nobly.
A few adverbs are irregular in the formation of the comparative and superlative; as, well, better, best.
A few adverbs have irregular forms for the comparative and superlative, like well, better, best.
PREPOSITION
A preposition connects words, clauses, and sentences together and shows the relation between them. "My hand is on the table" shows relation between hand and table.
A preposition connects words, clauses, and sentences together and shows how they relate to each other. "My hand is on the table" shows the relationship between the hand and the table.
Prepositions are so called because they are generally placed before the words whose connection or relation with other words they point out.
Prepositions are named that way because they are usually positioned before the words that they indicate the connection or relationship with other words.
CONJUNCTION
A conjunction joins words, clauses and sentences; as "John and James." "My father and mother have come, but I have not seen them."
A conjunction connects words, clauses, and sentences; like "John and James." "My dad and mom have come, but I haven't seen them."
The conjunctions in most general use are and, also; either, or; neither, nor; though, yet; but, however; for, that; because, since; therefore, wherefore, then; if, unless, lest.
The most commonly used conjunctions are and, also; either, or; neither, nor; though, yet; but, however; for, that; because, since; therefore, wherefore, then; if, unless, lest.
INTERJECTION
An interjection is a word used to express some sudden emotion of the mind. Thus in the examples,—"Ah! there he comes; alas! what shall I do?" ah, expresses surprise, and alas, distress.
An interjection is a word used to express a sudden emotion. For example, "Wow! Here he comes; oh no! What should I do?" wow, shows surprise, and oh no, indicates distress.
Nouns, adjectives, verbs and adverbs become interjections when they are uttered as exclamations, as, nonsense! strange! hail! away! etc.
Nouns, adjectives, verbs, and adverbs become interjections when they are used as exclamations, like nonsense! strange! hail! away! etc.
We have now enumerated the parts of speech and as briefly as possible stated the functions of each. As they all belong to the same family they are related to one another but some are in closer affinity than others. To point out the exact relationship and the dependency of one word on another is called parsing and in order that every etymological connection may be distinctly understood a brief resume of the foregoing essentials is here given:
We have now listed the parts of speech and briefly explained the function of each. Since they all belong to the same family, they are related to each other, but some are more closely connected than others. Identifying the exact relationship and how one word depends on another is called parsing. To ensure that each etymological connection is clearly understood, a brief summary of the essential points is provided here:
The signification of the noun is limited to one, but to any one of the kind, by the indefinite article, and to some particular one, or some particular number, by the definite article.
The meaning of the noun is limited to one, but to any one of that type, with the indefinite article, and to a specific one, or some specific number, with the definite article.
Nouns, in one form, represent one of a kind, and in another, any number more than one; they are the names of males, or females, or of objects which are neither male nor female; and they represent the subject of an affirmation, a command or a question,—the owner or possessor of a thing,—or the object of an action, or of a relation expressed by a preposition.
Nouns can refer to one specific item or any number greater than one; they can represent males, females, or things that are neither male nor female. Nouns indicate the subject of a statement, a command, or a question, the owner or possessor of something, or the object of an action or a relationship expressed by a preposition.
Adjectives express the qualities which distinguish one person or thing from another; in one form they express quality without comparison; in another, they express comparison between two, or between one and a number taken collectively,—and in a third they express comparison between one and a number of others taken separately.
Adjectives describe the qualities that set one person or thing apart from another; in one form, they denote quality without comparison; in another, they show comparison between two, or between one and a group of others collectively,—and in a third form, they indicate comparison between one and a number of others individually.
Pronouns are used in place of nouns; one class of them is used merely as the substitutes of names; the pronouns of another class have a peculiar reference to some preceding words in the sentence, of which they are the substitutes,—and those of a third class refer adjectively to the persons or things they represent. Some pronouns are used for both the name and the substitute; and several are frequently employed in asking questions.
Pronouns are used instead of nouns; one type simply serves as replacements for names; another type has a specific reference to some earlier words in the sentence that they replace,—and a third type refers adjectively to the people or things they represent. Some pronouns are used for both the name and the replacement; and several are often used in asking questions.
Affirmations and commands are expressed by the verb; and different inflections of the verb express number, person, time and manner. With regard to time, an affirmation may be present or past or future; with regard to manner, an affirmation may be positive or conditional, it being doubtful whether the condition is fulfilled or not, or it being implied that it is not fulfilled;—the verb may express command or entreaty; or the sense of the verb may be expressed without affirming or commanding. The verb also expresses that an action or state is or was going on, by a form which is also used sometimes as a noun, and sometimes to qualify nouns.
Affirmations and commands are conveyed through the verb; different forms of the verb indicate number, person, time, and manner. In terms of time, an affirmation can be present, past, or future; regarding manner, an affirmation may be positive or conditional, where it’s uncertain whether the condition is met or implied that it’s not met;—the verb can convey command or entreaty; or the meaning of the verb can be expressed without affirming or commanding. The verb also indicates that an action or state is or was happening, using a form that can sometimes act as a noun, or serve to modify nouns.
Affirmations are modified by adverbs, some of which can be inflected to express different degrees of modification.
Affirmations are modified by adverbs, some of which can be changed to show different levels of modification.
Words are joined together by conjunctions; and the various relations which one thing bears to another are expressed by 'prepositions. Sudden emotions of the mind, and exclamations are expressed by interjections.
Words are connected by conjunctions; and the different relationships that one thing has to another are shown by prepositions. Sudden feelings of the mind, and exclamations are captured by interjections.
Some words according to meaning belong sometimes to one part of speech, sometimes to another. Thus, in "After a storm comes a calm," calm is a noun; in "It is a calm evening," calm is an adjective; and in "Calm your fears," calm is a verb.
Some words can belong to different parts of speech depending on their meaning. For example, in "After a storm comes a calm," calm is a noun; in "It is a calm evening," calm is an adjective; and in "Calm your fears," calm is a verb.
The following sentence containing all the parts of speech is parsed etymologically:
The following sentence, which includes all the parts of speech, is analyzed by its origins:
"I now see the old man coming, but, alas, he has walked with much difficulty."
"I can see the old man approaching, but unfortunately, he's having a hard time walking."
I, a personal pronoun, first person singular, masculine or feminine gender, nominative case, subject of the verb see.
I, a personal pronoun, first-person singular, masculine or feminine gender, nominative case, subject of the verb see.
now, an adverb of time modifying the verb see.
now, an adverb of time that modifies the verb see.
see, an irregular, transitive verb, indicative mood, present tense, first person singular to agree with its nominative or subject I.
see, an irregular, transitive verb, indicative mood, present tense, first person singular to match its nominative or subject I.
the, the definite article particularizing the noun man.
the, the definite article specifying the noun man.
old, an adjective, positive degree, qualifying the noun man.
old, an adjective, positive degree, describing the noun man.
man, a common noun, 3rd person singular, masculine gender, objective case governed by the transitive verb see.
man, a common noun, 3rd person singular, masculine gender, objective case governed by the transitive verb see.
coming, the present or imperfect participle of the verb "to come" referring to the noun man.
coming, the present or imperfect participle of the verb "to come," referring to the noun man.
but, a conjunction.
but
alas, an interjection, expressing pity or sorrow.
alas, an interjection, expressing regret or sadness.
he, a personal pronoun, 3rd person singular, masculine gender, nominative case, subject of verb has walked.
he, a personal pronoun, 3rd person singular, masculine gender, nominative case, subject of the verb has walked.
has walked, a regular, intransitive verb, indicative mood, perfect tense, 3rd person singular to agree with its nominative or subject he.
has walked, a standard intransitive verb, indicative mood, perfect tense, 3rd person singular to match its subject he.
with, a preposition, governing the noun difficulty.
with, a preposition, governing the noun difficulty.
much, an adjective, positive degree, qualifying the noun difficulty.
much, an adjective, in its basic form, describing the noun difficulty.
difficulty, a common noun, 3rd person singular, neuter gender, objective case governed by the preposition with.
difficulty, a common noun, 3rd person singular, neutral gender, objective case controlled by the preposition with.
N.B.—Much is generally an adverb. As an adjective it is thus compared:
N.B.—Much is usually an adverb. When used as an adjective, it is compared like this:
Positive | Comparative | Superlative |
---|---|---|
much | more | most |
CHAPTER III
THE SENTENCE
Different Kinds—Arrangement of Words—Paragraph
A sentence is an assemblage of words so arranged as to convey a determinate sense or meaning, in other words, to express a complete thought or idea. No matter how short, it must contain one finite verb and a subject or agent to direct the action of the verb.
A sentence is a group of words arranged in a way that conveys a specific sense or meaning, in other words, to express a complete thought or idea. Regardless of its length, it must include one finite verb and a subject or agent to direct the action of the verb.
"Birds fly;" "Fish swim;" "Men walk;"—are sentences.
"Birds fly," "Fish swim," "Men walk"—are sentences.
A sentence always contains two parts, something spoken about and something said about it. The word or words indicating what is spoken about form what is called the subject and the word or words indicating what is said about it form what is called the predicate.
A sentence always has two parts: what it talks about and what is said about that. The word or words that show what it's talking about make up the subject, and the word or words that describe what is being said form the predicate.
In the sentences given, birds, fish and men are the subjects, while fly, swim and walk are the predicates.
In the sentences provided, birds, fish, and men are the subjects, while fly, swim, and walk are the predicates.
There are three kinds of sentences, simple, compound and complex.
There are three types of sentences: simple, compound, and complex.
The simple sentence expresses a single thought and consists of one subject and one predicate, as, "Man is mortal."
The simple sentence communicates one idea and is made up of one subject and one predicate, like, "Man is mortal."
A compound sentence consists of two or more simple sentences of equal importance the parts of which are either expressed or understood, as, "The men work in the fields and the women work in the household," or "The men work in the fields and the women in the household" or "The men and women work in the fields and in the household."
A compound sentence is made up of two or more simple sentences that are equally important. The parts can be either stated or implied, like "The men work in the fields and the women work in the household," or "The men work in the fields and the women in the household" or "The men and women work in the fields and in the household."
A complex sentence consists of two or more simple sentences so combined that one depends on the other to complete its meaning; as; "When he returns, I shall go on my vacation." Here the words, "when he returns" are dependent on the rest of the sentence for their meaning.
A complex sentence includes two or more simple sentences that are connected in a way that one relies on the other to complete its meaning; for example, "When he returns, I shall go on my vacation." In this case, the phrase "when he returns" depends on the rest of the sentence for its meaning.
A clause is a separate part of a complex sentence, as "when he returns" in the last example.
A clause is a distinct part of a complex sentence, like "when he returns" in the last example.
A phrase consists of two or more words without a finite verb.
A phrase is made up of two or more words that don't contain a finite verb.
Without a finite verb we cannot affirm anything or convey an idea, therefore we can have no sentence.
Without a finite verb, we can't assert anything or express an idea, so we can't form a sentence.
Infinitives and participles which are the infinite parts of the verb cannot be predicates. "I looking up the street" is not a sentence, for it is not a complete action expressed. When we hear such an expression as "A dog running along the street," we wait for something more to be added, something more affirmed about the dog, whether he bit or barked or fell dead or was run over.
Infinitives and participles, which are the non-finite forms of the verb, cannot serve as predicates. "I looking up the street" is not a proper sentence because it doesn’t express a complete action. When we hear an expression like "A dog running along the street," we expect something more to follow, something more to be said about the dog, whether it bit, barked, fell dead, or got run over.
Thus in every sentence there must be a finite verb to limit the subject.
Thus, in every sentence, there has to be a finite verb to define the subject.
When the verb is transitive, that is, when the action cannot happen without affecting something, the thing affected is called the object.
When a verb is transitive, meaning the action can't occur without impacting something, that affected thing is called the object.
Thus in "Cain killed Abel" the action of the killing affected Abel. In "The cat has caught a mouse," mouse is the object of the catching.
Thus in "Cain killed Abel," the act of killing impacted Abel. In "The cat has caught a mouse," the mouse is the object of the catching.
ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS IN A SENTENCE
Of course in simple sentences the natural order of arrangement is subject—verb—object. In many cases no other form is possible. Thus in the sentence "The cat has caught a mouse," we cannot reverse it and say "The mouse has caught a cat" without destroying the meaning, and in any other form of arrangement, such as "A mouse, the cat has caught," we feel that while it is intelligible, it is a poor way of expressing the fact and one which jars upon us more or less.
Of course, in simple sentences, the natural order is subject-verb-object. In many cases, no other structure works. For instance, in the sentence "The cat has caught a mouse," we can't switch it to say "The mouse has caught a cat" without losing the meaning. In any other arrangement, like "A mouse, the cat has caught," we find that while it's understandable, it doesn't express the idea well and feels awkward to us.
In longer sentences, however, when there are more words than what are barely necessary for subject, verb and object, we have greater freedom of arrangement and can so place the words as to give the best effect. The proper placing of words depends upon perspicuity and precision. These two combined give style to the structure.
In longer sentences, though, when there are more words than just the bare essentials for subject, verb, and object, we have more freedom in how we arrange them, allowing us to position the words for the best effect. The right placement of words relies on clarity and accuracy. Together, these two create style in the structure.
Most people are familiar with Gray's line in the immortal Elegy—"The ploughman homeward plods his weary way." This line can be paraphrased to read 18 different ways. Here are a few variations:
Most people know Gray's famous line from the timeless Elegy—"The ploughman heads home, tired from his work." This line can be rephrased in 18 different ways. Here are a few variations:
Homeward the ploughman plods his weary way. The ploughman plods his weary way homeward. Plods homeward the ploughman his weary way. His weary way the ploughman homeward plods. Homeward his weary way plods the ploughman. Plods the ploughman his weary way homeward. His weary way the ploughman plods homeward. His weary way homeward the ploughman plods. The ploughman plods homeward his weary way. The ploughman his weary way plods homeward.
The farmer makes his tired way home. The farmer trudges wearily home. Tired, the farmer heads home. The farmer is on his tired way home. Wearily, the farmer heads home. The farmer is making his tired journey home. The farmer heads home, exhausted. The weary farmer walks home. The farmer is going home, weary. The farmer, exhausted, is heading home.
and so on. It is doubtful if any of the other forms are superior to the one used by the poet. Of course his arrangement was made to comply with the rhythm and rhyme of the verse. Most of the variations depend upon the emphasis we wish to place upon the different words.
and so on. It's uncertain if any of the other forms are better than the one the poet used. Obviously, his arrangement was designed to fit the rhythm and rhyme of the verse. Most of the variations depend on the emphasis we want to place on the different words.
In arranging the words in an ordinary sentence we should not lose sight of the fact that the beginning and end are the important places for catching the attention of the reader. Words in these places have greater emphasis than elsewhere.
In arranging the words in a regular sentence, we should remember that the beginning and end are the key spots for grabbing the reader's attention. Words in these positions carry more weight than those in the middle.
In Gray's line the general meaning conveyed is that a weary ploughman is plodding his way homeward, but according to the arrangement a very slight difference is effected in the idea. Some of the variations make us think more of the ploughman, others more of the plodding, and still others more of the weariness.
In Gray's line, the overall meaning is that a tired farmer is making his way home, but the arrangement creates a subtle shift in the idea. Some variations focus more on the farmer, others on the act of plodding, and still others emphasize the weariness.
As the beginning and end of a sentence are the most important places, it naturally follows that small or insignificant words should be kept from these positions. Of the two places the end one is the more important, therefore, it really calls for the most important word in the sentence. Never commence a sentence with And, But, Since, Because, and other similar weak words and never end it with prepositions, small, weak adverbs or pronouns.
As the start and end of a sentence are the most important spots, it makes sense to avoid placing small or unimportant words there. Of the two positions, the end is more crucial, so it deserves the most significant word in the sentence. Never start a sentence with And, But, Since, Because, or other similar weak words, and never end it with prepositions, small, weak adverbs, or pronouns.
The parts of a sentence which are most closely connected with one another in meaning should be closely connected in order also. By ignoring this principle many sentences are made, if not nonsensical, really ridiculous and ludicrous. For instance: "Ten dollars reward is offered for information of any person injuring this property by order of the owner." "This monument was erected to the memory of John Jones, who was shot by his affectionate brother."
The parts of a sentence that are most closely related in meaning should also be arranged closely together. Ignoring this principle can make many sentences not just nonsensical, but genuinely ridiculous and laughable. For example: "A reward of ten dollars is offered for information about anyone harming this property by the owner's order." "This monument was built in memory of John Jones, who was shot by his loving brother."
In the construction of all sentences the grammatical rules must be inviolably observed. The laws of concord, that is, the agreement of certain words, must be obeyed.
In constructing all sentences, the grammatical rules must be strictly followed. The rules of agreement, meaning the alignment of certain words, must be adhered to.
-
The verb agrees with its subject in person and number. "I have," "Thou hast," (the pronoun thou is here used to illustrate the verb form, though it is almost obsolete), "He has," show the variation of the verb to agree with the subject. A singular subject calls for a singular verb, a plural subject demands a verb in the plural; as, "The boy writes," "The boys write."
The verb matches its subject in person and number. "I have," "You have," (the pronoun you is now used instead of thou, which is almost obsolete), "He has," show how the verb changes to agree with the subject. A singular subject requires a singular verb, while a plural subject needs a plural verb; for example, "The boy writes," "The boys write."
The agreement of a verb and its subject is often destroyed by confusing (1) collective and common nouns; (2) foreign and English nouns; (3) compound and simple subjects; (4) real and apparent subjects.
The agreement between a verb and its subject is often disrupted by confusing (1) collective and common nouns; (2) foreign and English nouns; (3) compound and simple subjects; (4) real and apparent subjects.
(1) A collective noun is a number of individuals or things regarded as a whole; as, class regiment. When the individuals or things are prominently brought forward, use a plural verb; as The class were distinguished for ability. When the idea of the whole as a unit is under consideration employ a singular verb; as The regiment was in camp. (2) It is sometimes hard for the ordinary individual to distinguish the plural from the singular in foreign nouns, therefore, he should be careful in the selection of the verb. He should look up the word and be guided accordingly. "He was an alumnus of Harvard." "They were alumni of Harvard." (3) When a sentence with one verb has two or more subjects denoting different things, connected by and, the verb should be plural; as, "Snow and rain are disagreeable." When the subjects denote the same thing and are connected by or the verb should be singular; as, "The man or the woman is to blame." (4) When the same verb has more than one subject of different persons or numbers, it agrees with the most prominent in thought; as, "He, and not you, is wrong." "Whether he or I am to be blamed."
(1) A collective noun refers to a group of individuals or things seen as a single unit; for example, class regiment. When the individuals or things are emphasized, use a plural verb; for instance, The class were distinguished for ability. When considering the whole as a unit, use a singular verb; for example, The regiment was in camp. (2) It can sometimes be difficult for an average person to tell the difference between plural and singular in foreign nouns, so they should pay attention when choosing the verb. They should look up the word and follow that guidance. "He was an alumnus of Harvard." "They were alumni of Harvard." (3) When a sentence with one verb has two or more subjects that are different, connected by and, the verb should be plural; for example, "Snow and rain are disagreeable." When the subjects refer to the same thing and are connected by or, the verb should be singular; for example, "The man or the woman is to blame." (4) When the same verb has multiple subjects of different persons or numbers, it agrees with the most prominent one in context; for example, "He, and not you, is wrong." "Whether he or I am to be blamed."
-
Never use the past participle for the past tense nor vice versa. This mistake is a very common one. At every turn we hear "He done it" for "He did it." "The jar was broke" instead of broken. "He would have went" for "He would have gone," etc.
Never use the past participle for the past tense or vice versa. This mistake is really common. Everywhere you hear "He done it" instead of "He did it." "The jar was broke" instead of broken. "He would have went" for "He would have gone," etc.
-
The use of the verbs shall and will is a rock upon which even the best speakers come to wreck. They are interchanged recklessly. Their significance changes according as they are used with the first, second or third person. With the first person shall is used in direct statement to express a simple future action; as, "I shall go to the city to-morrow." With the second and third persons shall is used to express a determination; as, "You shall go to the city to-morrow," "He shall go to the city to-morrow."
The use of the verbs shall and will is a stumbling block even for the best speakers. They are often switched around carelessly. Their meaning changes depending on whether they’re used with the first, second, or third person. When used in the first person, shall indicates a simple future action; for example, "I shall go to the city tomorrow." In the second and third persons, shall conveys a sense of determination; for instance, "You shall go to the city tomorrow," "He shall go to the city tomorrow."
With the first person will is used in direct statement to express determination, as, "I will go to the city to-morrow." With the second and third persons will is used to express simple future action; as, "You will go to the city to-morrow," "He will go to the city to-morrow."
With the first person, will is used in a direct statement to show determination, as in, "I will go to the city tomorrow." In the second and third persons, will is used to indicate simple future action; for example, "You will go to the city tomorrow," "He will go to the city tomorrow."
A very old rule regarding the uses of shall and will is thus expressed in rhyme:
A very old rule about when to use shall and will is expressed in rhyme like this:
In the first person simply shall foretells, In will a threat or else a promise dwells. Shall in the second and third does threat, Will simply then foretells the future feat.
In the first person, shall indicates a future action, While will carries a threat or a promise in its fraction. Shall in the second and third persons suggests a threat, Will then simply predicts what’s coming next.
-
Take special care to distinguish between the nominative and objective case. The pronouns are the only words which retain the ancient distinctive case ending for the objective. Remember that the objective case follows transitive verbs and prepositions. Don't say "The boy who I sent to see you," but "The boy whom I sent to see you." Whom is here the object of the transitive verb sent. Don't say "She bowed to him and I" but "She bowed to him and me" since me is the objective case following the preposition to understood. "Between you and I" is a very common expression. It should be "Between you and me" since between is a preposition calling for the objective case.
Take special care to distinguish between the nominative and objective cases. The pronouns are the only words that keep the old distinctive case ending for the objective. Remember that the objective case follows transitive verbs and prepositions. Don't say "The boy who I sent to see you," but "The boy whom I sent to see you." Whom is the object of the transitive verb sent. Don't say "She bowed to him and I," but "She bowed to him and me," since me is the objective case following the understood preposition to. "Between you and I" is a very common expression. It should be "Between you and me," since between is a preposition that requires the objective case.
-
Be careful in the use of the relative pronouns who, which and that. Who refers only to persons; which only to things; as, "The boy who was drowned," "The umbrella which I lost." The relative that may refer to both persons and things; as, "The man that I saw." "The hat that I bought."
Be careful when using the relative pronouns who, which, and that. Who refers only to people; which refers only to things; for example, "The boy who drowned," "The umbrella which I lost." The relative that can refer to both people and things; for instance, "The man that I saw," "The hat that I bought."
-
Don't use the superlative degree of the adjective for the comparative; as "He is the richest of the two" for "He is the richer of the two." Other mistakes often made in this connection are (1) Using the double comparative and superlative; as, "These apples are much more preferable." "The most universal motive to business is gain." (2) Comparing objects which belong to dissimilar classes; as "There is no nicer life than a teacher." (3) Including objects in class to which they do not belong; as, "The fairest of her daughters, Eve." (4) Excluding an object from a class to which it does belong; as, "Caesar was braver than any ancient warrior."
Don’t use the superlative form of an adjective when you mean the comparative; for example, say "He is the richer of the two" instead of "He is the richest of the two." Other common mistakes in this regard are (1) using double comparatives and superlatives, like "These apples are much more preferable" or "The most universal motive for business is gain." (2) Comparing items that belong to different categories, such as "There is no nicer life than a teacher." (3) Including items in categories they don't belong to, like "The fairest of her daughters, Eve." (4) Excluding an item from a category it does belong to, like "Caesar was braver than any ancient warrior."
-
Don't use an adjective for an adverb or an adverb for an adjective. Don't say, "He acted nice towards me" but "He acted nicely toward me," and instead of saying "She looked beautifully" say "She looked beautiful."
Don't use an adjective for an adverb or an adverb for an adjective. Don't say, "He acted nice toward me," but "He acted nicely toward me," and instead of saying "She looked beautifully," say "She looked beautiful."
-
Place the adverb as near as possible to the word it modifies. Instead of saying, "He walked to the door quickly," say "He walked quickly to the door."
Place the adverb as close as possible to the word it modifies. Instead of saying, "He walked to the door quickly," say "He quickly walked to the door."
-
Not alone be careful to distinguish between the nominative and objective cases of the pronouns, but try to avoid ambiguity in their use.
Not only should you be careful to distinguish between the nominative and objective cases of pronouns, but also try to avoid any ambiguity in their use.
The amusing effect of disregarding the reference of pronouns is well illustrated by Burton in the following story of Billy Williams, a comic actor who thus narrates his experience in riding a horse owned by Hamblin, the manager:
The funny result of ignoring the reference of pronouns is clearly shown by Burton in the following story of Billy Williams, a comedic actor who shares his experience of riding a horse owned by Hamblin, the manager:
"So down I goes to the stable with Tom Flynn, and told the man to put the saddle on him."
"So down I go to the stable with Tom Flynn and told the man to put the saddle on him."
"On Tom Flynn?"
"About Tom Flynn?"
"No, on the horse. So after talking with Tom Flynn awhile I mounted him."
"No, on the horse. So after chatting with Tom Flynn for a bit, I got on him."
"What! mounted Tom Flynn?"
"What! Tom Flynn is mounted?"
"No, the horse; and then I shook hands with him and rode off."
"No, the horse; then I shook his hand and rode away."
"Shook hands with the horse, Billy?"
"Did you shake hands with the horse, Billy?"
"No, with Tom Flynn; and then I rode off up the Bowery, and who should I meet but Tom Hamblin; so I got off and told the boy to hold him by the head."
"No, with Tom Flynn; and then I rode off up the Bowery, and who should I run into but Tom Hamblin; so I got off and told the boy to hold him by the head."
"What! hold Hamblin by the head?"
"What! Hold Hamblin by the head?"
"No, the horse; and then we went and had a drink together."
"No, the horse; and then we went out for a drink together."
"What! you and the horse?"
"What! You and the horse?"
"No, me and Hamblin; and after that I mounted him again and went out of town."
"No, me and Hamblin; and after that I got back on him and left town."
"What! mounted Hamblin again?"
"What! Mounted Hamblin again?"
"No, the horse; and when I got to Burnham, who should be there but Tom Flynn,—he'd taken another horse and rode out ahead of me; so I told the hostler to tie him up."
"No, the horse; and when I got to Burnham, who was there but Tom Flynn—he had taken another horse and rode out ahead of me; so I told the stableman to tie him up."
"Tie Tom Flynn up?"
"Tie up Tom Flynn?"
"No, the horse; and we had a drink there."
"No, the horse; and we had a drink there."
"What! you and the horse?"
"What! You and the horse?"
"No, me and Tom Flynn."
"No, Tom Flynn and I."
Finding his auditors by this time in a horse laugh, Billy wound up with: "Now, look here, —every time I say horse, you say Hamblin, and every time I say Hamblin you say horse: I'll be hanged if I tell you any more about it."
Finding his audience by this time in a horse laugh, Billy ended with: "Now, listen up, —every time I say horse, you say Hamblin, and every time I say Hamblin you say horse: I swear I won't tell you any more about it."
SENTENCE CLASSIFICATION
There are two great classes of sentences according to the general principles upon which they are founded. These are termed the loose and the periodic.
There are two main types of sentences based on the general principles they are built on. These are called the loose and the periodic.
In the loose sentence the main idea is put first, and then follow several facts in connection with it. Defoe is an author particularly noted for this kind of sentence. He starts out with a leading declaration to which he adds several attendant connections. For instance in the opening of the story of Robinson Crusoe we read: "I was born in the year 1632 in the city of York, of a good family, though not of that country, my father being a foreigner of Bremen, who settled first at Hull; he got a good estate by merchandise, and leaving off his trade lived afterward at York, from whence he had married my mother, whose relations were named Robinson, a very good family in the country and from I was called Robinson Kreutznaer; but by the usual corruption of words in England, we are now called, nay, we call ourselves, and write our name Crusoe, and so my companions always called me."
In a loose sentence, the main idea is presented first, followed by several related facts. Defoe is particularly known for this style of writing. He begins with a primary statement and then adds several related details. For example, in the opening of Robinson Crusoe, we read: "I was born in 1632 in the city of York, to a good family, although not from that area; my father was a foreigner from Bremen who initially settled in Hull. He made a good fortune through trade and eventually stopped working, settling in York, where he married my mother, whose family was named Robinson, a respected family in the region. That's why I was called Robinson Kreutznaer; but due to the usual changes in language in England, we are now called, and we call ourselves, and write our name as Crusoe, and that's how my friends always referred to me."
In the periodic sentence the main idea comes last and is preceded by a series of relative introductions. This kind of sentence is often introduced by such words as that, if, since, because. The following is an example:
In a periodic sentence, the main idea is at the end, following a series of related introductions. This type of sentence usually starts with words like that, if, since, because. Here’s an example:
"That through his own folly and lack of circumspection he should have been reduced to such circumstances as to be forced to become a beggar on the streets, soliciting alms from those who had formerly been the recipients of his bounty, was a sore humiliation."
"That due to his own foolishness and lack of caution he ended up in a situation where he had to become a beggar on the streets, asking for charity from those who had once benefited from his generosity, was a painful humiliation."
On account of its name many are liable to think the loose sentence an undesirable form in good composition, but this should not be taken for granted. In many cases it is preferable to the periodic form.
Because of its name, many people tend to think of the loose sentence as an undesirable style in good writing, but this shouldn't be assumed without consideration. In many situations, it is better than the periodic form.
As a general rule in speaking, as opposed to writing, the loose form is to be preferred, inasmuch as when the periodic is employed in discourse the listeners are apt to forget the introductory clauses before the final issue is reached.
As a general rule in speaking, as opposed to writing, the loose form is preferred because when the periodic form is used in conversation, listeners tend to forget the introductory parts before reaching the final point.
Both kinds are freely used in composition, but in speaking, the loose, which makes the direct statement at the beginning, should predominate.
Both types are commonly used in writing, but in speaking, the loose, which presents the main point first, should be more prevalent.
As to the length of sentences much depends on the nature of the composition. However the general rule may be laid down that short sentences are preferable to long ones. The tendency of the best writers of the present day is towards short, snappy, pithy sentences which rivet the attention of the reader. They adopt as their motto multum in parvo (much in little) and endeavor to pack a great deal in small space. Of course the extreme of brevity is to be avoided. Sentences can be too short, too jerky, too brittle to withstand the test of criticism. The long sentence has its place and a very important one. It is indispensable in argument and often is very necessary to description and also in introducing general principles which require elaboration. In employing the long sentence the inexperienced writer should not strain after the heavy, ponderous type. Johnson and Carlyle used such a type, but remember, an ordinary mortal cannot wield the sledge hammer of a giant. Johnson and Carlyle were intellectual giants and few can hope to stand on the same literary pedestal. The tyro in composition should never seek after the heavy style. The best of all authors in the English language for style is Addison. Macaulay says: "If you wish a style learned, but not pedantic, elegant but not ostentatious, simple yet refined, you must give your days and nights to the volumes of Joseph Addison." The simplicity, apart from the beauty of Addison's writings causes us to reiterate the literary command—"Never use a big word when a little one will convey the same or a similar meaning."
The length of sentences depends a lot on what you’re writing. However, a good rule of thumb is that short sentences are better than long ones. The best writers today lean towards short, punchy sentences that grab the reader's attention. They live by the motto multum in parvo (much in little) and try to fit a lot into a small space. Of course, being overly brief isn't good. Sentences can be too short, too abrupt, or too stiff to hold up under scrutiny. Long sentences have their place and it's an important one. They're essential in arguments and often necessary for descriptions, as well as introducing general ideas that need more explanation. When using long sentences, inexperienced writers shouldn't strive for a heavy, cumbersome style. Johnson and Carlyle wrote like that, but remember, an ordinary person can't swing the sledgehammer of a giant. Johnson and Carlyle were literary giants, and few can hope to reach the same heights. Beginners in writing should avoid trying for a heavy style. The best author in English for style is Addison. Macaulay said, "If you want a style that's learned but not pretentious, elegant but not showy, simple yet refined, you should dedicate your days and nights to the works of Joseph Addison." The simplicity, along with the beauty of Addison's writing, reminds us of the literary rule—"Never use a big word when a small one will do just as well."
Macaulay himself is an elegant stylist to imitate. He is like a clear brook kissed by the noon-day sun in the shining bed of which you can see and count the beautiful white pebbles. Goldsmith is another writer whose simplicity of style charms.
Macaulay is a great writer to emulate. He's like a clear stream lit by the midday sun where you can see and count the beautiful white pebbles on the bottom. Goldsmith is another author whose simple style is captivating.
The beginner should study these writers, make their works his vade mecum, they have stood the test of time and there has been no improvement upon them yet, nor is there likely to be, for their writing is as perfect as it is possible to be in the English language.
The beginner should study these writers and make their works his vade mecum; they have stood the test of time and there has been no improvement on them yet, nor is there likely to be, as their writing is as perfect as it can be in the English language.
Apart from their grammatical construction there can be no fixed rules for the formation of sentences. The best plan is to follow the best authors and these masters of language will guide you safely along the way.
Aside from their grammatical structure, there aren't any strict rules for forming sentences. The best approach is to follow great authors, and these language experts will lead you in the right direction.
THE PARAGRAPH
The paragraph may be defined as a group of sentences that are closely related in thought and which serve one common purpose. Not only do they preserve the sequence of the different parts into which a composition is divided, but they give a certain spice to the matter like raisins in a plum pudding. A solid page of printed matter is distasteful to the reader; it taxes the eye and tends towards the weariness of monotony, but when it is broken up into sections it loses much of its heaviness and the consequent lightness gives it charm, as it were, to capture the reader.
A paragraph can be defined as a group of sentences that are closely connected in meaning and serve a common purpose. They not only maintain the order of the various parts of a piece of writing but also add a bit of interest, like raisins in a plum pudding. A dense page of text is off-putting to readers; it strains the eyes and can feel monotonous. However, when it's divided into sections, it becomes lighter and more appealing, drawing in the reader.
Paragraphs are like stepping-stones on the bed of a shallow river, which enable the foot passenger to skip with ease from one to the other until he gets across; but if the stones are placed too far apart in attempting to span the distance one is liable to miss the mark and fall in the water and flounder about until he is again able to get a foothold. 'Tis the same with written language, the reader by means of paragraphs can easily pass from one portion of connected thought to another and keep up his interest in the subject until he gets to the end.
Paragraphs are like stepping-stones on the bottom of a shallow river, allowing a person to easily hop from one to the next until they reach the other side. But if the stones are spaced too far apart in trying to cover the distance, someone might miss and fall into the water, thrashing around until they can find their footing again. It’s the same with writing; paragraphs let readers smoothly transition from one part of a connected idea to another, maintaining their interest in the topic until they reach the end.
Throughout the paragraph there must be some connection in regard to the matter under consideration,—a sentence dependency. For instance, in the same paragraph we must not speak of a house on fire and a runaway horse unless there is some connection between the two. We must not write consecutively:
Throughout the paragraph, there should be some connection regarding the topic being discussed—a dependency between the sentences. For example, in the same paragraph, we shouldn't mention a house on fire and a runaway horse unless there's some link between the two. We shouldn't write consecutively:
"The fire raged with fierce intensity, consuming the greater part of the large building in a short time." "The horse took fright and wildly dashed down the street scattering pedestrians in all directions." These two sentences have no connection and therefore should occupy separate and distinct places. But when we say—"The fire raged with fierce intensity consuming the greater part of the large building in a short time and the horse taking fright at the flames dashed wildly down the street scattering pedestrians in all directions,"—there is a natural sequence, viz., the horse taking fright as a consequence of the flames and hence the two expressions are combined in one paragraph.
"The fire blazed with intense heat, destroying most of the large building in a short time." "The horse got scared and bolted down the street, sending pedestrians scattering in all directions." These two sentences are unrelated and should be in separate places. But when we say—"The fire blazed with intense heat, destroying most of the large building in a short time and the horse, frightened by the flames, bolted wildly down the street, scattering pedestrians in all directions,"—there's a natural flow, meaning the horse's fright is a result of the flames, so the two ideas are connected in one paragraph.
As in the case of words in sentences, the most important places in a paragraph are the beginning and the end. Accordingly the first sentence and the last should by virtue of their structure and nervous force, compel the reader's attention. It is usually advisable to make the first sentence short; the last sentence may be long or short, but in either case should be forcible. The object of the first sentence is to state a point clearly; the last sentence should enforce it.
As with words in sentences, the most important parts of a paragraph are the beginning and the end. Therefore, the first and last sentences should, through their structure and strength, grab the reader's attention. It's usually a good idea to keep the first sentence short; the last sentence can be either long or short, but in both cases, it should be impactful. The purpose of the first sentence is to express a point clearly; the last sentence should reinforce it.
It is a custom of good writers to make the conclusion of the paragraph a restatement or counterpart or application of the opening.
It’s a habit of good writers to make the conclusion of the paragraph a rephrasing, reflection, or application of the opening.
In most cases a paragraph may be regarded as the elaboration of the principal sentence. The leading thought or idea can be taken as a nucleus and around it constructed the different parts of the paragraph. Anyone can make a context for every simple sentence by asking himself questions in reference to the sentence. Thus—"The foreman gave the order"— suggests at once several questions; "What was the order?" "to whom did he give it?" "why did he give it?" "what was the result?" etc. These questions when answered will depend upon the leading one and be an elaboration of it into a complete paragraph.
In most cases, a paragraph can be seen as an expansion of the main sentence. The main thought or idea serves as a core, and around it, the various parts of the paragraph are built. Anyone can create context for any simple sentence by asking themselves questions related to it. For example, "The foreman gave the order" immediately raises several questions: "What was the order?" "Who did he give it to?" "Why did he give it?" "What was the outcome?" etc. The answers to these questions will depend on the main one and will expand it into a complete paragraph.
If we examine any good paragraph we shall find it made up of a number of items, each of which helps to illustrate, confirm or enforce the general thought or purpose of the paragraph. Also the transition from each item to the next is easy, natural and obvious; the items seem to come of themselves. If, on the other hand, we detect in a paragraph one or more items which have no direct bearing, or if we are unable to proceed readily from item to item, especially if we are obliged to rearrange the items before we can perceive their full significance, then we are justified in pronouncing the paragraph construction faulty.
If we take a look at any good paragraph, we’ll see it's made up of several elements, each of which helps to illustrate, support, or reinforce the main idea or purpose of the paragraph. The transition from one element to the next is smooth, natural, and clear; the elements flow effortlessly. However, if we find that one or more elements in a paragraph don’t relate directly or if we struggle to move from one element to the next—especially if we need to rearrange them to understand their full meaning—then we can say the paragraph is poorly constructed.
No specific rules can be given as to the construction of paragraphs. The best advice is,—Study closely the paragraph structure of the best writers, for it is only through imitation, conscious or unconscious of the best models, that one can master the art.
No specific rules can be laid out for constructing paragraphs. The best advice is to closely examine the paragraph structure of skilled writers, because it’s only through consciously or unconsciously imitating these excellent examples that one can master the craft.
The best paragraphist in the English language for the essay is Macaulay, the best model to follow for the oratorical style is Edmund Burke and for description and narration probably the greatest master of paragraph is the American Goldsmith, Washington Irving.
The best essay writer in English is Macaulay, the best example to follow for oratory style is Edmund Burke, and for description and storytelling, the greatest master of paragraphs is the American Goldsmith, Washington Irving.
A paragraph is indicated in print by what is known as the indentation of the line, that is, by commencing it a space from the left margin.
A paragraph is shown in print by what’s called indentation, which means starting it a space in from the left margin.
CHAPTER IV
FIGURATIVE LANGUAGE
Figures of Speech—Definitions and Examples —Use of Figures
In Figurative Language we employ words in such a way that they differ somewhat from their ordinary signification in commonplace speech and convey our meaning in a more vivid and impressive manner than when we use them in their every-day sense. Figures make speech more effective, they beautify and emphasize it and give to it a relish and piquancy as salt does to food; besides they add energy and force to expression so that it irresistibly compels attention and interest. There are four kinds of figures, viz.: (1) Figures of Orthography which change the spelling of a word; (2) Figures of Etymology which change the form of words; (3) Figures of Syntax which change the construction of sentences; (4) Figures of Rhetoric or the art of speaking and writing effectively which change the mode of thought.
In Figurative Language, we use words in a way that makes them slightly different from their usual meanings in everyday conversation, allowing us to express our ideas more vividly and impactfully than when we use them in their normal sense. Figures enhance speech; they beautify and emphasize it, giving it a flavor and excitement much like salt does for food. They also add energy and strength to our expression, making it impossible to ignore and drawing interest. There are four types of figures: (1) Figures of Orthography, which alter the spelling of a word; (2) Figures of Etymology, which change the form of words; (3) Figures of Syntax, which modify the construction of sentences; (4) Figures of Rhetoric, or the art of effectively speaking and writing, which change the way we think.
We shall only consider the last mentioned here as they are the most important, really giving to language the construction and style which make it a fitting medium for the intercommunication of ideas.
We will only consider the last one mentioned here since they are the most important, truly providing language with the structure and style that make it a suitable medium for sharing ideas.
Figures of Rhetoric have been variously classified, some authorities extending the list to a useless length. The fact is that any form of expression which conveys thought may be classified as a Figure.
Figures of Rhetoric have been classified in different ways, with some experts making the list unnecessarily long. The truth is that any way of expressing an idea can be considered a Figure.
The principal figures as well as the most important and those oftenest used are, Simile, Metaphor, Personification, Allegory, Synechdoche, Metonymy, Exclamation, Hyperbole, Apostrophe, Vision, Antithesis, Climax, Epigram, Interrogation and Irony.
The main figures, as well as the ones most frequently used, are Simile, Metaphor, Personification, Allegory, Synecdoche, Metonymy, Exclamation, Hyperbole, Apostrophe, Vision, Antithesis, Climax, Epigram, Interrogation and Irony.
The first four are founded on resemblance, the second six on contiguity and the third five, on contrast.
The first four are based on resemblance, the next six on contiguity, and the last five on contrast.
A Simile (from the Latin similis, like), is the likening of one thing to another, a statement of the resemblance of objects, acts, or relations; as "In his awful anger he was like the storm-driven waves dashing against the rock." A simile makes the principal object plainer and impresses it more forcibly on the mind. "His memory is like wax to receive impressions and like marble to retain them." This brings out the leading idea as to the man's memory in a very forceful manner. Contrast it with the simple statement—"His memory is good." Sometimes Simile is prostituted to a low and degrading use; as "His face was like a danger signal in a fog storm." "Her hair was like a furze-bush in bloom." "He was to his lady love as a poodle to its mistress." Such burlesque is never permissible. Mere likeness, it should be remembered, does not constitute a simile. For instance there is no simile when one city is compared to another. In order that there may be a rhetorical simile, the objects compared must be of different classes. Avoid the old trite similes such as comparing a hero to a lion. Such were played out long ago. And don't hunt for farfetched similes. Don't say—"Her head was glowing as the glorious god of day when he sets in a flambeau of splendor behind the purple-tinted hills of the West." It is much better to do without such a simile and simply say—"She had fiery red hair."
A Simile (from the Latin similis, meaning "like") is when you compare one thing to another, highlighting the similarities between objects, actions, or relationships; for example, "In his terrible anger, he was like the storm-driven waves crashing against the rock." A simile clarifies the main subject and makes it more memorable. "His memory is like wax that can take impressions and like marble that can hold onto them." This effectively emphasizes the idea of the man's memory. Compare that to the straightforward statement—"His memory is good." Sometimes, simile is used in a cheap and demeaning way; for instance, "His face was like a danger signal in a fog." "Her hair was like a blooming furze-bush." "He was to his lady love what a poodle is to its owner." Such mockery is never acceptable. It's important to remember that mere likeness does not create a simile. For example, there is no simile when one city is compared to another. To have a true rhetorical simile, the items being compared must belong to different categories. Avoid old and worn-out trite similes like comparing a hero to a lion; those have been used up long ago. Also, don't search for overly complicated similes. Instead of saying—"Her head was glowing like the glorious god of day setting in a flame of glory behind the purple hills of the West," it's much better to simply say—"She had fiery red hair."
A Metaphor (from the Greek metapherein, to carry over or transfer), is a word used to imply a resemblance but instead of likening one object to another as in the simile we directly substitute the action or operation of one for another. If, of a religious man we say,—"He is as a great pillar upholding the church," the expression is a simile, but if we say—"He is a great pillar upholding the church" it is a metaphor. The metaphor is a bolder and more lively figure than the simile. It is more like a picture and hence, the graphic use of metaphor is called "word-painting." It enables us to give to the most abstract ideas form, color and life. Our language is full of metaphors, and we very often use them quite unconsciously. For instance, when we speak of the bed of a river, the shoulder of a hill, the foot of a mountain, the hands of a clock, the key of a situation, we are using metaphors.
A Metaphor (from the Greek metapherein, meaning to carry over or transfer) is a word that implies a resemblance, but instead of comparing one object to another as in a simile, we directly replace the action or role of one with another. For example, if we say of a religious man, "He is like a great pillar supporting the church," that’s a simile, but if we say, "He is a great pillar supporting the church," it's a metaphor. The metaphor is a stronger and more vivid figure than the simile. It's more like a picture, which is why the creative use of metaphor is called "word-painting." It allows us to give the most abstract ideas form, color, and life. Our language is full of metaphors, and we often use them without even thinking. For instance, when we refer to the bed of a river, the shoulder of a hill, the foot of a mountain, the hands of a clock, or the key to a situation, we are using metaphors.
Don't use mixed metaphors, that is, different metaphors in relation to the same subject: "Since it was launched our project has met with much opposition, but while its flight has not reached the heights ambitioned, we are yet sanguine we shall drive it to success." Here our project begins as a ship, then becomes a bird and finally winds up as a horse.
Don't use mixed metaphors, which means using different metaphors for the same subject: "Since it was launched, our project has faced a lot of opposition, but although its progress hasn't achieved the ambitious heights we hoped for, we are still confident we will drive it to success." Here our project starts as a ship, then turns into a bird, and finally ends up as a horse.
Personification (from the Latin persona, person, and facere, to make) is the treating of an inanimate object as if it were animate and is probably the most beautiful and effective of all the figures.
Personification (from the Latin persona, meaning person, and facere, meaning to make) is when you treat an inanimate object as if it were alive, and it's likely the most beautiful and effective of all the figures.
"The mountains sing together, the hills rejoice and clap their hands."
"The mountains sing together, the hills rejoice and clap."
"Earth felt the wound; and Nature from her seat,
Sighing, through all her works, gave signs of woe."
"Earth felt the wound; and Nature from her seat,
Sighing, through all her works, showed signs of sorrow."
Personification depends much on a vivid imagination and is adapted especially to poetical composition. It has two distinguishable forms: (1) when personality is ascribed to the inanimate as in the foregoing examples, and (2) when some quality of life is attributed to the inanimate; as, a raging storm; an angry sea; a whistling wind, etc.
Personification relies heavily on a vivid imagination and is especially suited for poetry. It has two distinct forms: (1) when personality is given to inanimate objects, as in the examples above, and (2) when a life-like quality is assigned to the inanimate; for example, a raging storm, an angry sea, a whistling wind, etc.
An Allegory (from the Greek allos, other, and agoreuein, to speak), is a form of expression in which the words are symbolical of something. It is very closely allied to the metaphor, in fact is a continued metaphor.
An Allegory (from the Greek allos, meaning other, and agoreuein, meaning to speak) is a way of expressing ideas where the words symbolize something else. It's very similar to a metaphor; in fact, it's an extended metaphor.
Allegory, metaphor and simile have three points in common,—they are all founded on resemblance. "Ireland is like a thorn in the side of England;" this is simile. "Ireland is a thorn in the side of England;" this is metaphor. "Once a great giant sprang up out of the sea and lived on an island all by himself. On looking around he discovered a little girl on another small island near by. He thought the little girl could be useful to him in many ways so he determined to make her subservient to his will. He commanded her, but she refused to obey, then he resorted to very harsh measures with the little girl, but she still remained obstinate and obdurate. He continued to oppress her until finally she rebelled and became as a thorn in his side to prick him for his evil attitude towards her;" this is an allegory in which the giant plainly represents England and the little girl, Ireland; the implication is manifest though no mention is made of either country. Strange to say the most perfect allegory in the English language was written by an almost illiterate and ignorant man, and written too, in a dungeon cell. In the "Pilgrim's Progress," Bunyan, the itinerant tinker, has given us by far the best allegory ever penned. Another good one is "The Faerie Queen" by Edmund Spenser.
Allegory, metaphor, and simile have three things in common—they are all based on similarity. "Ireland is like a thorn in the side of England;" this is a simile. "Ireland is a thorn in the side of England;" this is a metaphor. "Once, a great giant emerged from the sea and lived alone on an island. When he looked around, he spotted a little girl on another nearby small island. He thought the little girl could be helpful to him in many ways, so he decided to make her obey him. He commanded her, but she refused to follow his orders. Then he took very harsh measures against her, but she remained stubborn and unyielding. He continued to oppress her until finally, she rebelled and became a thorn in his side, pricking him for his cruel behavior towards her;" this is an allegory where the giant clearly represents England and the little girl represents Ireland; the meaning is clear even though neither country is named. Strangely, the most perfect allegory in the English language was written by a nearly illiterate and ignorant man, and it was written in a dungeon cell. In "Pilgrim's Progress," Bunyan, the wandering tinker, gave us by far the best allegory ever written. Another good one is "The Faerie Queene" by Edmund Spenser.
Synecdoche (from the Greek, sun with, and ekdexesthai, to receive), is a figure of speech which expresses either more or less than it literally denotes. By it we give to an object a name which literally expresses something more or something less than we intend. Thus: we speak of the world when we mean only a very limited number of the people who compose the world: as, "The world treated him badly." Here we use the whole for a part. But the most common form of this figure is that in which a part is used for the whole; as, "I have twenty head of cattle," "One of his hands was assassinated," meaning one of his men. "Twenty sail came into the harbor," meaning twenty ships. "This is a fine marble," meaning a marble statue.
Synecdoche (from the Greek, sun meaning "with," and ekdexesthai, meaning "to receive") is a figure of speech that represents either more or less than its literal meaning. It gives an object a name that conveys something broader or narrower than what we actually mean. For example, we say "the world treated him badly" when we're really referring to a small group of people in the world, using the whole to represent a part. The most common form of this figure is when a part is used to represent the whole, like saying, "I have twenty head of cattle," or "One of his hands was assassinated," meaning one of his men. When we say, "Twenty sail came into the harbor," we're referring to twenty ships. Similarly, "This is a fine marble" means a marble statue.
Metonymy (from the Greek meta, change, and onyma, a name) is the designation of an object by one of its accompaniments, in other words, it is a figure by which the name of one object is put for another when the two are so related that the mention of one readily suggests the other. Thus when we say of a drunkard—"He loves the bottle" we do not mean that he loves the glass receptacle, but the liquor that it is supposed to contain. Metonymy, generally speaking, has, three subdivisions: (1) when an effect is put for cause or vice versa: as "Gray hairs should be respected," meaning old age. "He writes a fine hand," that is, handwriting. (2) when the sign is put for the thing signified; as, "The pen is mightier than the sword," meaning literary power is superior to military force. (3) When the container is put for the thing contained; as "The House was called to order," meaning the members in the House.
Metonymy (from the Greek meta, change, and onyma, name) is when you refer to an object by one of its related features. In simple terms, it's a figure of speech where the name of one thing is used to represent another because they are closely connected; mentioning one usually brings the other to mind. For instance, when we say about a drunkard, "He loves the bottle," we don't mean he loves the glass container, but rather the alcohol it holds. Metonymy generally has three types: (1) when an effect is used to represent the cause or vice versa: like "Gray hairs should be respected," which refers to old age. "He writes a fine hand," meaning good handwriting. (2) when the sign represents the thing signified; such as "The pen is mightier than the sword," which implies that literary power is stronger than military force. (3) when the container stands for the thing it contains; for example, "The House was called to order," meaning the members inside the House.
Exclamation (from the Latin ex, out, and clamare, to cry), is a figure by which the speaker instead of stating a fact, simply utters an expression of surprise or emotion. For instance when he hears some harrowing tale of woe or misfortune instead of saying,—"It is a sad story" he exclaims "What a sad story!"
Exclamation (from the Latin ex, meaning out, and clamare, meaning to cry), is a figure of speech where the speaker expresses surprise or emotion instead of stating a fact. For example, when hearing a distressing story of sorrow or misfortune, instead of saying, "It is a sad story," they exclaim, "What a sad story!"
Exclamation may be defined as the vocal expression of feeling, though it is also applied to written forms which are intended to express emotion. Thus in describing a towering mountain we can write "Heavens, what a piece of Nature's handiwork! how majestic! how sublime! how awe-inspiring in its colossal impressiveness!" This figure rather belongs to poetry and animated oratory than to the cold prose of every-day conversation and writing.
Exclamation can be defined as the vocal expression of feelings, but it also applies to written forms meant to convey emotion. For example, when describing a towering mountain, we might say, "Wow, what an incredible piece of nature! How majestic! How sublime! How awe-inspiring in its massive impressiveness!" This style is more suited to poetry and passionate speech than to the straightforward prose of everyday conversation and writing.
Hyperbole (from the Greek hyper, beyond, and ballein, to throw), is an exaggerated form of statement and simply consists in representing things to be either greater or less, better or worse than they really are. Its object is to make the thought more effective by overstating it. Here are some examples:—"He was so tall his head touched the clouds." "He was as thin as a poker." "He was so light that a breath might have blown him away." Most people are liable to overwork this figure. We are all more or less given to exaggeration and some of us do not stop there, but proceed onward to falsehood and downright lying. There should be a limit to hyperbole, and in ordinary speech and writing it should be well qualified and kept within reasonable bounds.
Hyperbole (from the Greek hyper, meaning beyond, and ballein, meaning to throw) is a form of exaggerated statement that involves describing things as being greater or less, better or worse than they actually are. The purpose is to enhance the impact of the thought by overstating it. Here are some examples:—"He was so tall his head touched the clouds." "He was as thin as a poker." "He was so light that a breath might have blown him away." Most people tend to overuse this figure of speech. We all have a tendency to exaggerate, and some of us go even further into falsehood and outright lying. There should be a limit to hyperbole, and in everyday speech and writing, it should be properly moderated and kept within reasonable limits.
An Apostrophe (from the Greek apo, from, and strephein, to turn), is a direct address to the absent as present, to the inanimate as living, or to the abstract as personal. Thus: "O, illustrious Washington! Father of our Country! Could you visit us now!"
An Apostrophe (from the Greek apo, meaning from, and strephein, meaning to turn) is a direct address to someone who is absent as if they were present, to something inanimate as if it were alive, or to an abstract concept as if it were a person. For example: "Oh, great Washington! Father of our Country! If only you could visit us now!"
"My Country tis of thee— Sweet land of liberty, Of thee I sing."
"My country, it's of you— Sweet land of freedom, Of you I sing."
"O! Grave, where is thy Victory, O! Death where is thy sting!" This figure is very closely allied to Personification.
"O! Grave, where is your victory? O! Death, where is your sting?" This figure is very closely related to Personification.
Vision (from the Latin videre, to see) consists in treating the past, the future, or the remote as if present in time or place. It is appropriate to animated description, as it produces the effect of an ideal presence. "The old warrior looks down from the canvas and tells us to be men worthy of our sires."
Vision (from the Latin videre, to see) involves viewing the past, the future, or distant things as if they are present in both time and space. It's suitable for lively description because it creates the impression of an ideal presence. "The old warrior gazes down from the canvas and urges us to be men worthy of our ancestors."
This figure is much exemplified in the Bible. The book of Revelation is a vision of the future. The author who uses the figure most is Carlyle.
This example is widely shown in the Bible. The book of Revelation is a vision of what’s to come. The author who uses this example the most is Carlyle.
An Antithesis (from the Greek anti, against, and tithenai, to set) is founded on contrast; it consists in putting two unlike things in such a position that each will appear more striking by the contrast.
An Antithesis (from the Greek anti, meaning against, and tithenai, meaning to set) is based on contrast; it involves placing two different things in a way that makes each one stand out more because of the contrast.
"Ring out the old, ring in the new, Ring out the false, ring in the true."
"Celebrate the past, welcome the new, Let go of the fake, embrace the real."
"Let us be friends in peace, but enemies in war."
"Let us be friends in peace, but enemies in war."
Here is a fine antithesis in the description of a steam engine—"It can engrave a seal and crush masses of obdurate metal before it; draw out, without breaking, a thread as fine as a gossamer; and lift up a ship of war like a bauble in the air; it can embroider muslin and forge anchors; cut steel into ribands, and impel loaded vessels against the fury of winds and waves."
Here’s a great contrast in the description of a steam engine—"It can engrave a seal and crush solid chunks of metal in front of it; draw out a thread as fine as a spider's web without breaking it; and lift a warship like a toy in the air; it can embroider muslin and forge anchors; cut steel into ribbons, and propel heavy vessels against the power of winds and waves."
Climax (from the Greek, klimax, a ladder), is an arrangement of thoughts and ideas in a series, each part of which gets stronger and more impressive until the last one, which emphasizes the force of all the preceding ones. "He risked truth, he risked honor, he risked fame, he risked all that men hold dear,—yea, he risked life itself, and for what?—for a creature who was not worthy to tie his shoe-latchets when he was his better self."
Climax (from the Greek, klimax, meaning a ladder) is a way of organizing thoughts and ideas in a sequence, where each part becomes stronger and more impactful until the final one, which highlights the significance of everything that came before it. "He risked the truth, he risked his honor, he risked his fame, he risked everything that men value—yes, he risked his very life, and for what?—for someone who wasn't even worthy to tie his shoelaces when he was at his best."
Epigram (from the Greek epi, upon, and graphein, to write), originally meant an inscription on a monument, hence it came to signify any pointed expression. It now means a statement or any brief saying in prose or poetry in which there is an apparent contradiction; as, "Conspicuous for his absence." "Beauty when unadorned is most adorned." "He was too foolish to commit folly." "He was so wealthy that he could not spare the money."
Epigram (from the Greek epi, meaning upon, and graphein, meaning to write) originally referred to an inscription on a monument. Over time, it came to mean any sharp or witty expression. It now refers to a statement or a brief saying in prose or poetry that contains an apparent contradiction, such as, "Conspicuous for his absence." "Beauty when unadorned is most adorned." "He was too foolish to commit folly." "He was so wealthy that he could not spare the money."
Interrogation (from the Latin interrogatio, a question), is a figure of speech in which an assertion is made by asking a question; as, "Does God not show justice to all?" "Is he not doing right in his course?" "What can a man do under the circumstances?"
Interrogation (from the Latin interrogatio, meaning a question) is a figure of speech where a statement is made by asking a question; for example, "Does God not show justice to everyone?" "Is he not doing the right thing?" "What can a person do in this situation?"
Irony (from the Greek eironcia, dissimulation) is a form of expression in which the opposite is substituted for what is intended, with the end in view, that the falsity or absurdity may be apparent; as, "Benedict Arnold was an honorable man." "A Judas Iscariot never betrays a friend." "You can always depend upon the word of a liar."
Irony (from the Greek eironcia, dissimulation) is a way of expressing something by saying the opposite of what is meant, with the intention that the falsehood or absurdity will be obvious; for example, "Benedict Arnold was an honorable man." "A Judas Iscariot never betrays a friend." "You can always depend on the word of a liar."
Irony is cousin germain to ridicule, derision, mockery, satire and sarcasm. Ridicule implies laughter mingled with contempt; derision is ridicule from a personal feeling of hostility; mockery is insulting derision; satire is witty mockery; sarcasm is bitter satire and irony is disguised satire.
Irony is closely related to ridicule, derision, mockery, satire, and sarcasm. Ridicule suggests laughter mixed with disdain; derision is ridicule stemming from a personal grudge; mockery is insulting ridicule; satire is clever mockery; sarcasm is biting satire, and irony is subtle satire.
There are many other figures of speech which give piquancy to language and play upon words in such a way as to convey a meaning different from their ordinary signification in common every-day speech and writing. The golden rule for all is to keep them in harmony with the character and purpose of speech and composition.
There are many other figures of speech that add flavor to language and use words in a way that conveys a meaning different from their usual definitions in everyday conversation and writing. The golden rule for all of them is to keep them in harmony with the character and purpose of speech and composition.
CHAPTER V
PUNCTUATION
Principal Points—Illustrations—Capital Letters.
Lindley Murray and Goold Brown laid down cast-iron rules for punctuation, but most of them have been broken long since and thrown into the junk-heap of disuse. They were too rigid, too strict, went so much into minutiae, that they were more or less impractical to apply to ordinary composition. The manner of language, of style and of expression has considerably changed since then, the old abstruse complex sentence with its hidden meanings has been relegated to the shade, there is little of prolixity or long-drawn-out phrases, ambiguity of expression is avoided and the aim is toward terseness, brevity and clearness. Therefore, punctuation has been greatly simplified, to such an extent indeed, that it is now as much a matter of good taste and judgment as adherence to any fixed set of rules. Nevertheless there are laws governing it which cannot be abrogated, their principles must be rigidly and inviolably observed.
Lindley Murray and Goold Brown established strict rules for punctuation, but most of them have been neglected and discarded long ago. They were too inflexible, too strict, and focused too much on details, making them impractical for everyday writing. Since then, the way we use language, style, and expression has changed significantly. The old, complex sentences with their hidden meanings have been pushed aside; we now avoid wordiness and lengthy phrases, steering clear of ambiguity in our expressions. The focus is now on conciseness, brevity, and clarity. As a result, punctuation has been greatly simplified, to the point that it's more about good taste and judgment than following a strict set of rules. Still, there are fundamental laws governing punctuation that cannot be ignored; their principles must be strictly and consistently followed.
The chief end of punctuation is to mark the grammatical connection and the dependence of the parts of a composition, but not the actual pauses made in speaking. Very often the points used to denote the delivery of a passage differ from those used when the passage is written. Nevertheless, several of the punctuation marks serve to bring out the rhetorical force of expression.
The main purpose of punctuation is to indicate the grammatical connections and dependencies between parts of a composition, not the actual pauses made while speaking. Often, the punctuation used to represent the delivery of a passage is different from what's used when the passage is written. However, several punctuation marks help emphasize the rhetorical impact of expression.
The principal marks of punctuation are:
The main punctuation marks are:
-
The Comma [,]
The Comma [,]
-
The Semicolon [;]
The Semicolon [;]
-
The Colon [:]
The Colon :
-
The Period [.]
The Dot [.]
-
The Interrogation [?]
The Interrogation
-
The Exclamation [!]
The Exclamation Mark [!]
-
The Dash [—]
The Dash
-
The Parenthesis [()]
The Parenthesis [()]
-
The Quotation [" "]
The Quotation [" "]
There are several other points or marks to indicate various relations, but properly speaking such come under the heading of Printer's Marks, some of which are treated elsewhere.
There are several other points or marks to indicate different relationships, but technically, these fall under the category of Printer's Marks, some of which are discussed elsewhere.
Of the above, the first four may be styled the grammatical points, and the remaining five, the rhetorical points.
Of the above, the first four can be called the grammatical points, and the remaining five, the rhetorical points.
The Comma: The office of the Comma is to show the slightest separation which calls for punctuation at all. It should be omitted whenever possible. It is used to mark the least divisions of a sentence.
The Comma: The role of the Comma is to indicate the smallest separation that requires punctuation. It should be left out whenever it can. It is used to denote the smallest divisions within a sentence.
-
A series of words or phrases has its parts separated by commas:—"Lying, trickery, chicanery, perjury, were natural to him." "The brave, daring, faithful soldier died facing the foe." If the series is in pairs, commas separate the pairs: "Rich and poor, learned and unlearned, black and white, Christian and Jew, Mohammedan and Buddhist must pass through the same gate."
A series of words or phrases has its parts separated by commas:—"Lying, deception, trickery, perjury were natural to him." "The brave, daring, loyal soldier died facing the enemy." If the series is in pairs, commas separate the pairs: "Rich and poor, educated and uneducated, black and white, Christian and Jew, Muslim and Buddhist must pass through the same gate."
-
A comma is used before a short quotation: "It was Patrick Henry who said, 'Give me liberty or give me death.'"
A comma is used before a short quotation: "It was Patrick Henry who said, 'Give me liberty or give me death.'"
-
When the subject of the sentence is a clause or a long phrase, a comma is used after such subject: "That he has no reverence for the God I love, proves his insincerity." "Simulated piety, with a black coat and a sanctimonious look, does not proclaim a Christian."
When the subject of the sentence is a clause or a long phrase, a comma is used after that subject: "That he has no respect for the God I love proves his insincerity." "Fake piety, with a black coat and a holier-than-thou look, doesn't make someone a Christian."
-
An expression used parenthetically should be inclosed by commas: "The old man, as a general rule, takes a morning walk."
An expression used in parentheses should be enclosed by commas: "The old man, as a general rule, takes a morning walk."
-
Words in apposition are set off by commas: "McKinley, the President, was assassinated."
Words in apposition are separated by commas: "McKinley, the President, was assassinated."
-
Relative clauses, if not restrictive, require commas: "The book, which is the simplest, is often the most profound."
Relative clauses, when not restrictive, need commas: "The book, which is the simplest, is often the most profound."
-
In continued sentences each should be followed by a comma: "Electricity lights our dwellings and streets, pulls cars, trains, drives the engines of our mills and factories."
"Electricity lights up our homes and streets, powers cars and trains, drives the engines of our mills and factories."
-
When a verb is omitted a comma takes its place: "Lincoln was a great statesman; Grant, a great soldier."
When a verb is left out, a comma takes its place: "Lincoln was a great statesman; Grant, a great soldier."
-
The subject of address is followed by a comma: "John, you are a good man."
The subject of the address is followed by a comma: "John, you are a good man."
-
In numeration, commas are used to express periods of three figures: "Mountains 25,000 feet high; 1,000,000 dollars."
In numeration, commas are used to indicate groups of three digits: "Mountains 25,000 feet high; 1,000,000 dollars."
The Semicolon marks a slighter connection than the comma. It is generally confined to separating the parts of compound sentences. It is much used in contrasts:
The Semicolon indicates a weaker connection than the comma. It's typically used to separate the parts of compound sentences. It’s often used in contrasts:
-
"Gladstone was great as a statesman; he was sublime as a man."
"Gladstone was an amazing statesman; he was extraordinary as a person."
-
The Semicolon is used between the parts of all compound sentences in which the grammatical subject of the second part is different from that of the first: "The power of England relies upon the wisdom of her statesmen; the power of America upon the strength of her army and navy."
The semicolon is used between the parts of all compound sentences where the grammatical subject of the second part is different from that of the first: "The power of England relies on the wisdom of her statesmen; the power of America on the strength of her army and navy."
-
The Semicolon is used before words and abbreviations which introduce particulars or specifications following after, such as, namely, as, e.g., vid., i.e., etc.: "He had three defects; namely, carelessness, lack of concentration and obstinacy in his ideas." "An island is a portion of land entirely surrounded by water; as Cuba." "The names of cities should always commence with a capital letter; e.g., New York, Paris." "The boy was proficient in one branch; viz., Mathematics." "No man is perfect; i.e., free from all blemish."
The semicolon is used before words and abbreviations that introduce details or specifics, such as, namely, as, e.g., vid., i.e., etc.: "He had three defects: namely, carelessness, lack of concentration, and stubbornness in his ideas." "An island is a piece of land completely surrounded by water; as in Cuba." "The names of cities should always start with a capital letter; e.g., New York, Paris." "The boy was skilled in one subject; viz., Mathematics." "No person is perfect; i.e., free from all flaws."
The Colon except in conventional uses is practically obsolete.
The Colon, except in standard uses, is basically outdated.
-
It is generally put at the end of a sentence introducing a long quotation: "The cheers having subsided, Mr. Bryan spoke as follows:"
It is usually placed at the end of a sentence that introduces a long quotation: "After the cheers died down, Mr. Bryan spoke as follows:"
-
It is placed before an explanation or illustration of the subject under consideration: "This is the meaning of the term:"
It comes before an explanation or example of the topic at hand: "This is what the term means:"
-
A direct quotation formally introduced is generally preceded by a colon: "The great orator made this funny remark:"
A direct quotation that is formally introduced is usually preceded by a colon: "The great speaker made this funny remark:"
-
The colon is often used in the title of books when the secondary or subtitle is in apposition to the leading one and when the conjunction or is omitted: "Acoustics: the Science of Sound."
The colon is often used in book titles when the subtitle is closely related to the main title and when the conjunction or is left out: "Acoustics: the Science of Sound."
-
It is used after the salutation in the beginning of letters: "Sir: My dear Sir: Gentlemen: Dear Mr. Jones:" etc. In this connection a dash very often follows the colon.
It is used after the greeting at the start of letters: "Sir: My dear Sir: Gentlemen: Dear Mr. Jones:" etc. In this context, a dash often follows the colon.
-
It is sometimes used to introduce details of a group of things already referred to in the mass: "The boy's excuses for being late were: firstly, he did not know the time, secondly, he was sent on an errand, thirdly, he tripped on a rock and fell by the wayside."
It is sometimes used to introduce details about a group of things already mentioned in the mass: "The boy's excuses for being late were: first, he didn’t know the time; second, he was sent on an errand; third, he tripped on a rock and fell by the side of the road."
The Period is the simplest punctuation mark. It is simply used to mark the end of a complete sentence that is neither interrogative nor exclamatory.
The Period is the most straightforward punctuation mark. It's used to indicate the end of a complete sentence that isn't a question or an exclamation.
-
After every sentence conveying a complete meaning: "Birds fly." "Plants grow." "Man is mortal."
After every sentence that conveys a complete thought: "Birds fly." "Plants grow." "Humans are mortal."
-
In abbreviations: after every abbreviated word: Rt. Rev. T. C. Alexander, D.D., L.L.D.
In abbreviations: after every abbreviated word: Rt. Rev. T. C. Alexander, D.D., L.L.D.
-
A period is used on the title pages of books after the name of the book, after the author's name, after the publisher's imprint: American Trails. By Theodore Roosevelt. New York. Scribner Company.
A period is used on the title pages of books after the name of the book, after the author's name, after the publisher's imprint: American Trails. By Theodore Roosevelt. New York. Scribner Company.
The Mark of Interrogation is used to ask or suggest a question.
The Mark of Interrogation is used to ask or suggest a question.
-
Every question admitting of an answer, even when it is not expected, should be followed by the mark of interrogation: "Who has not heard of Napoleon?"
Every question that can be answered, even if it’s unexpected, should be followed by a question mark: "Who hasn't heard of Napoleon?"
-
When several questions have a common dependence they should be followed by one mark of interrogation at the end of the series: "Where now are the playthings and friends of my boyhood; the laughing boys; the winsome girls; the fond neighbors whom I loved?"
When several questions are related, they should end with a single question mark at the end of the series: "Where are the toys and friends of my childhood; the laughing boys; the charming girls; the loving neighbors I adored?"
-
The mark is often used parenthetically to suggest doubt: "In 1893 (?) Gladstone became converted to Home Rule for Ireland."
The mark is often used in parentheses to imply uncertainty: "In 1893 (?) Gladstone converted to Home Rule for Ireland."
The Exclamation point should be sparingly used, particularly in prose. Its chief use is to denote emotion of some kind.
The Exclamation point should be used sparingly, especially in prose. Its main purpose is to show some kind of emotion.
-
It is generally employed with interjections or clauses used as interjections: "Alas! I am forsaken." "What a lovely landscape!"
It is usually used with interjections or clauses that act as interjections: "Oh no! I am abandoned." "What a beautiful landscape!"
-
Expressions of strong emotion call for the exclamation: "Charge, Chester, charge! On, Stanley, on!"
Expressions of strong emotion call for the exclamation: "Charge, Chester, charge! On, Stanley, on!"
-
When the emotion is very strong double exclamation points may be used: "Assist him!! I would rather assist Satan!!"
When the emotion is really intense, you can use double exclamation points: "Help him!! I would rather help Satan!!"
The Dash is generally confined to cases where there is a sudden break from the general run of the passage. Of all the punctuation marks it is the most misused.
The Dash is usually used in situations where there's a sudden shift from the main flow of the text. Out of all punctuation marks, it’s the most commonly misused.
-
It is employed to denote sudden change in the construction or sentiment: "The Heroes of the Civil War,—how we cherish them." "He was a fine fellow—in his own opinion."
It is used to indicate a sudden shift in construction or sentiment: "The Heroes of the Civil War—how we cherish them." "He was a great guy—in his own opinion."
-
When a word or expression is repeated for oratorical effect, a dash is used to introduce the repetition: "Shakespeare was the greatest of all poets—Shakespeare, the intellectual ocean whose waves washed the continents of all thought."
When a word or phrase is repeated for emphasis, a dash is used to introduce the repetition: "Shakespeare was the greatest of all poets—Shakespeare, the intellectual ocean whose waves washed over the continents of all thought."
-
The Dash is used to indicate a conclusion without expressing it: "He is an excellent man but—"
The Dash is used to show a conclusion without directly stating it: "He is an excellent man but—"
-
It is used to indicate what is not expected or what is not the natural outcome of what has gone before: "He delved deep into the bowels of the earth and found instead of the hidden treasure—a button."
It shows what isn't expected or what isn't the natural result of what happened earlier: "He dug deep into the ground and found instead of hidden treasure—a button."
-
It is used to denote the omission of letters or figures: "J—n J—s for John Jones; 1908-9 for 1908 and 1909; Matthew VII:5-8 for Matthew VII:5, 6, 7, and 8.
It is used to indicate that letters or numbers are missing: "J—n J—s for John Jones; 1908-9 for 1908 and 1909; Matthew VII:5-8 for Matthew VII:5, 6, 7, and 8.
-
When an ellipsis of the words, namely, that is, to wit, etc., takes place, the dash is used to supply them: "He excelled in three branches—arithmetic, algebra, and geometry."
When an ellipsis of the words, namely, that is, to wit, etc., happens, a dash is used to fill them in: "He excelled in three areas—arithmetic, algebra, and geometry."
-
A dash is used to denote the omission of part of a word when it is undesirable to write the full word: He is somewhat of a r——l (rascal). This is especially the case in profane words.
A dash is used to indicate that part of a word has been left out when it's not ideal to write the full word: He is somewhat of a r——l (rascal). This is particularly true for profanity.
-
Between a citation and the authority for it there is generally a dash: "All the world's a stage."—Shakespeare.
Between a citation and its source, there’s usually a dash: "All the world's a stage."—Shakespeare.
-
When questions and answers are put in the same paragraph they should be separated by dashes: "Are you a good boy? Yes, Sir.—Do you love study? I do."
When questions and answers are in the same paragraph, they should be separated by dashes: "Are you a good boy? Yes, Sir.—Do you love study? I do."
Marks of Parenthesis are used to separate expressions inserted in the body of a sentence, which are illustrative of the meaning, but have no essential connection with the sentence, and could be done without. They should be used as little as possible for they show that something is being brought into a sentence that does not belong to it.
Marks of Parenthesis are used to separate expressions inserted in the body of a sentence that illustrate the meaning but aren’t essential to it and could be omitted. They should be used sparingly because they indicate that something is being added to a sentence that doesn’t really fit.
-
When the unity of a sentence is broken the words causing the break should be enclosed in parenthesis: "We cannot believe a liar (and Jones is one), even when he speaks the truth."
When the unity of a sentence is disrupted, the words causing the disruption should be enclosed in parentheses: "We cannot believe a liar (and Jones is one), even when he speaks the truth."
-
In reports of speeches marks of parenthesis are used to denote interpolations of approval or disapproval by the audience: "The masses must not submit to the tyranny of the classes (hear, hear), we must show the trust magnates (groans), that they cannot ride rough-shod over our dearest rights (cheers);" "If the gentleman from Ohio (Mr. Brown), will not be our spokesman, we must select another. (A voice,—Get Robinson)."
In speech reports, parentheses are used to show audience reactions of approval or disapproval: "The masses must not submit to the tyranny of the classes (hear, hear), we must show the trust magnates (groans) that they can't just trample over our dearest rights (cheers);" "If the gentleman from Ohio (Mr. Brown) won't be our spokesperson, we need to choose someone else. (A voice—Get Robinson)."
When a parenthesis is inserted in the sentence where no comma is required, no point should be used before either parenthesis. When inserted at a place requiring a comma, if the parenthetical matter relates to the whole sentence, a comma should be used before each parenthesis; if it relates to a single word, or short clause, no stop should come before it, but a comma should be put after the closing parenthesis.
When you add a parenthesis to a sentence where a comma isn’t needed, don’t put a period before either parenthesis. If you add it where a comma is necessary, and the parenthetical content applies to the entire sentence, use a comma before each parenthesis. If it pertains to just a single word or a short clause, don’t put a stop before it, but do place a comma after the closing parenthesis.
The Quotation marks are used to show that the words enclosed by them are borrowed.
The Quotation marks are used to indicate that the words inside them are borrowed.
-
A direct quotation should be enclosed within the quotation marks: Abraham Lincoln said,—"I shall make this land too hot for the feet of slaves."
A direct quote should be put in quotation marks: Abraham Lincoln said, "I shall make this land too hot for the feet of slaves."
-
When a quotation is embraced within another, the contained quotation has only single marks: Franklin said, "Most men come to believe 'honesty is the best policy.'"
When a quote is included within another quote, the inner quote uses single quotation marks: Franklin said, "Most men come to believe 'honesty is the best policy.'"
-
When a quotation consists of several paragraphs the quotation marks should precede each paragraph.
When a quote is made up of multiple paragraphs, the quotation marks should come before each paragraph.
-
Titles of books, pictures and newspapers when formally given are quoted.
Titles of books, movies, and newspapers are put in quotes when formally mentioned.
-
Often the names of ships are quoted though there is no occasion for it.
Often, ship names are mentioned even when it's unnecessary.
The Apostrophe should come under the comma rather than under the quotation marks or double comma. The word is Greek and signifies a turning away from. The letter elided or turned away is generally an e. In poetry and familiar dialogue the apostrophe marks the elision of a syllable, as "I've for I have"; "Thou'rt for thou art"; "you'll for you will," etc. Sometimes it is necessary to abbreviate a word by leaving out several letters. In such case the apostrophe takes the place of the omitted letters as "cont'd for continued." The apostrophe is used to denote the elision of the century in dates, where the century is understood or to save the repetition of a series of figures, as "The Spirit of '76"; "I served in the army during the years 1895, '96, '97, '98 and '99." The principal use of the apostrophe is to denote the possessive case. All nouns in the singular number whether proper names or not, and all nouns in the plural ending with any other letter than s, form the possessive by the addition of the apostrophe and the letter s. The only exceptions to this rule are, that, by poetical license the additional s may be elided in poetry for sake of the metre, and in the scriptural phrases "For goodness' sake." "For conscience' sake," "For Jesus' sake," etc. Custom has done away with the s and these phrases are now idioms of the language. All plural nouns ending in s form the possessive by the addition of the apostrophe only as boys', horses'. The possessive case of the personal pronouns never take the apostrophe, as ours, yours, hers, theirs.
The Apostrophe should go under the comma rather than under the quotation marks or double comma. The word comes from Greek and means a turning away from something. The letter that is omitted or turned away is usually an e. In poetry and casual dialogue, the apostrophe shows the omission of a syllable, like "I've" for "I have," "Thou'rt" for "thou art," and "you'll" for "you will," etc. Sometimes, it's necessary to shorten a word by dropping several letters. In such cases, the apostrophe replaces the omitted letters, as in "cont'd" for "continued." The apostrophe is also used to indicate the omission of the century in dates, where the century is understood, or to avoid repeating a series of figures, as in "The Spirit of '76" and "I served in the army during the years 1895, '96, '97, '98, and '99." The main use of the apostrophe is to show the possessive case. All singular nouns, whether proper names or not, and all plural nouns ending in a letter other than s, form the possessive by adding the apostrophe and the letter s. The only exceptions to this rule are, by poetic license, the additional s may be omitted for the sake of meter in poetry and in the phrases "For goodness' sake," "For conscience' sake," and "For Jesus' sake," etc. Custom has removed the s, and these phrases are now idiomatic expressions. All plural nouns ending in s form the possessive by just adding the apostrophe, like boys' and horses'. The possessive form of personal pronouns never uses an apostrophe, such as ours, yours, hers, and theirs.
CAPITAL LETTERS
Capital letters are used to give emphasis to or call attention to certain words to distinguish them from the context. In manuscripts they may be written small or large and are indicated by lines drawn underneath, two lines for SMALL CAPITALS and three lines for CAPITALS.
Capital letters are used to emphasize or draw attention to certain words, setting them apart from the rest of the text. In manuscripts, they can be written in small or large form and are marked with lines underneath: two lines for SMALL CAPITALS and three lines for CAPITALS.
Some authors, notably Carlyle, make such use of Capitals that it degenerates into an abuse. They should only be used in their proper places as given in the table below.
Some authors, especially Carlyle, use capital letters so excessively that it becomes a problem. They should only be used in the correct places as shown in the table below.
-
The first word of every sentence, in fact the first word in writing of any kind should begin with a capital; as, "Time flies." "My dear friend."
The first word of every sentence, and actually the first word in any written text, should start with a capital letter; for example, "Time flies." "My dear friend."
-
Every direct quotation should begin with a capital; "Dewey said,—'Fire, when you're ready, Gridley!'"
Every direct quote should start with a capital: "Dewey said, 'Fire, when you're ready, Gridley!'"
-
Every direct question commences with a capital; "Let me ask you; 'How old are you?'"
Every direct question starts with a capital; "Let me ask you, 'How old are you?'"
-
Every line of poetry begins with a capital; "Breathes there a man with soul so dead?"
Every line of poetry starts with a capital letter; "Is there any man whose soul is so dead?"
-
Every numbered clause calls for a capital: "The witness asserts: (1) That he saw the man attacked; (2) That he saw him fall; (3) That he saw his assailant flee."
Every numbered clause requires a capital letter: "The witness states: (1) That he saw the man being attacked; (2) That he saw him fall; (3) That he saw his attacker run away."
-
The headings of essays and chapters should be wholly in capitals; as, CHAPTER VIII—RULES FOR USE OF CAPITALS.
The headings of essays and chapters should be entirely in capitals; for example, CHAPTER VIII—RULES FOR USE OF CAPITALS.
-
In the titles of books, nouns, pronouns, adjectives and adverbs should begin with a capital; as, "Johnson's Lives of the Poets."
In the titles of books, nouns, pronouns, adjectives, and adverbs should start with a capital letter; for example, "Johnson's Lives of the Poets."
-
In the Roman notation numbers are denoted by capitals; as, I II III V X L C D M—1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 50, 100, 500, 1000.
In Roman numerals, numbers are represented by capital letters: I, II, III, V, X, L, C, D, M—1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 50, 100, 500, 1000.
-
Proper names begin with a capital; as, "Jones, Johnson, Caesar, Mark Antony, England, Pacific, Christmas."
Proper names start with a capital letter, like "Jones, Johnson, Caesar, Mark Antony, England, Pacific, Christmas."
Such words as river, sea, mountain, etc., when used generally are common, not proper nouns, and require no capital. But when such are used with an adjective or adjunct to specify a particular object they become proper names, and therefore require a capital; as, "Mississippi River, North Sea, Alleghany Mountains," etc. In like manner the cardinal points north, south, east and west, when they are used to distinguish regions of a country are capitals; as, "The North fought against the South."
Words like river, sea, mountain, etc., when used in a general sense, are common nouns and don’t need to be capitalized. However, when they are paired with an adjective or other descriptor to refer to a specific entity, they become proper nouns and should be capitalized; for example, "Mississippi River, North Sea, Alleghany Mountains," etc. Similarly, the cardinal directions—north, south, east, and west—when used to denote specific regions of a country, should be capitalized; for instance, "The North fought against the South."
When a proper name is compounded with another word, the part which is not a proper name begins with a capital if it precedes, but with a small letter if it follows, the hyphen; as "Post-homeric," "Sunday-school."
When a proper name is combined with another word, the part that isn’t a proper name starts with a capital letter if it comes first, but with a lowercase letter if it comes after the hyphen; as in "Post-homeric," "Sunday-school."
-
Words derived from proper names require a Capital; as, "American, Irish, Christian, Americanize, Christianize."
Words derived from proper names need a capital letter; for example, "American, Irish, Christian, Americanize, Christianize."
In this connection the names of political parties, religious sects and schools of thought begin with capitals; as, "Republican, Democrat, Whig, Catholic, Presbyterian, Rationalists, Free Thinkers."
In this context, the names of political parties, religious groups, and schools of thought start with capital letters; for example, "Republican, Democrat, Whig, Catholic, Presbyterian, Rationalists, Free Thinkers."
-
The titles of honorable, state and political offices begin with a capital; as, "President, Chairman, Governor, Alderman."
The titles of honorable, state, and political offices start with a capital letter; for example, "President, Chairman, Governor, Alderman."
-
The abbreviations of learned titles and college degrees call for capitals; as, "LL.D., M.A., B.S.," etc. Also the seats of learning conferring such degrees as, "Harvard University, Manhattan College," etc.
The abbreviations of academic titles and college degrees use capital letters; for example, "LL.D., M.A., B.S.," etc. Additionally, the names of institutions granting these degrees, such as "Harvard University, Manhattan College," etc.
-
When such relative words as father, mother, brother, sister, uncle, aunt, etc., precede a proper name, they are written and printed with capitals; as, Father Abraham, Mother Eddy, Brother John, Sister Jane, Uncle Jacob, Aunt Eliza. Father, when used to denote the early Christian writer, is begun with a capital; "Augustine was one of the learned Fathers of the Church."
When words like father, mother, brother, sister, uncle, aunt, etc., come before a proper name, they are capitalized; for example, Father Abraham, Mother Eddy, Brother John, Sister Jane, Uncle Jacob, Aunt Eliza. Father, when referring to the early Christian writer, is also capitalized; "Augustine was one of the learned Fathers of the Church."
-
The names applied to the Supreme Being begin with capitals: "God, Lord, Creator, Providence, Almighty, The Deity, Heavenly Father, Holy One." In this respect the names applied to the Saviour also require capitals: "Jesus Christ, Son of God, Man of Galilee, The Crucified, The Anointed One." Also the designations of Biblical characters as "Lily of Israel, Rose of Sharon, Comfortress of the Afflicted, Help of Christians, Prince of the Apostles, Star of the Sea," etc. Pronouns referring to God and Christ take capitals; as, "His work, The work of Him, etc."
The names used for the Supreme Being start with capital letters: "God, Lord, Creator, Providence, Almighty, The Deity, Heavenly Father, Holy One." Similarly, the names for the Savior also need to be capitalized: "Jesus Christ, Son of God, Man of Galilee, The Crucified, The Anointed One." Additionally, the titles of Biblical figures such as "Lily of Israel, Rose of Sharon, Comforter of the Afflicted, Help of Christians, Prince of the Apostles, Star of the Sea," etc. are also capitalized. Pronouns referring to God and Christ are capitalized as well; for example, "His work, The work of Him," etc.
-
Expressions used to designate the Bible or any particular division of it begin with a capital; as, "Holy Writ, The Sacred Book, Holy Book, God's Word, Old Testament, New Testament, Gospel of St. Matthew, Seven Penitential Psalms."
Expressions used to refer to the Bible or any specific part of it start with a capital letter; for example, "Holy Writ, The Sacred Book, Holy Book, God's Word, Old Testament, New Testament, Gospel of St. Matthew, Seven Penitential Psalms."
-
Expressions based upon the Bible or in reference to Biblical characters begin with a capital: "Water of Life, Hope of Men, Help of Christians, Scourge of Nations."
Expressions based on the Bible or referring to Biblical characters start with a capital letter: "Water of Life, Hope of Men, Help of Christians, Scourge of Nations."
-
The names applied to the Evil One require capitals: "Beelzebub, Prince of Darkness, Satan, King of Hell, Devil, Incarnate Fiend, Tempter of Men, Father of Lies, Hater of Good."
The names used for the Evil One should be capitalized: "Beelzebub, Prince of Darkness, Satan, King of Hell, Devil, Incarnate Fiend, Tempter of Men, Father of Lies, Hater of Good."
-
Words of very special importance, especially those which stand out as the names of leading events in history, have capitals; as, "The Revolution, The Civil War, The Middle Ages, The Age of Iron," etc.
Words of significant importance, especially those that highlight major historical events, are capitalized; as in, "The Revolution, The Civil War, The Middle Ages, The Age of Iron," etc.
-
Terms which refer to great events in the history of the race require capitals; "The Flood, Magna Charta, Declaration of Independence."
Terms that refer to significant events in the history of humanity should be capitalized: "The Flood, Magna Carta, Declaration of Independence."
-
The names of the days of the week and the months of the year and the seasons are commenced with capitals: "Monday, March, Autumn."
The names of the days of the week, the months of the year, and the seasons start with capital letters: "Monday, March, Autumn."
-
The Pronoun I and the interjection O always require the use of capitals. In fact all the interjections when uttered as exclamations commence with capitals: "Alas! he is gone." "Ah! I pitied him."
The pronoun I and the interjection O always need to be capitalized. In fact, all interjections used as exclamations start with capitals: "Alas! He is gone." "Ah! I pitied him."
-
All noms-de-guerre, assumed names, as well as names given for distinction, call for capitals, as, "The Wizard of the North," "Paul Pry," "The Northern Gael," "Sandy Sanderson," "Poor Robin," etc.
All noms-de-guerre, assumed names, and names given for distinction should be capitalized, like "The Wizard of the North," "Paul Pry," "The Northern Gael," "Sandy Sanderson," "Poor Robin," etc.
-
In personification, that is, when inanimate things are represented as endowed with life and action, the noun or object personified begins with a capital; as, "The starry Night shook the dews from her wings." "Mild-eyed Day appeared," "The Oak said to the Beech—'I am stronger than you.'"
In personification, which means giving human traits to non-human things, the noun or object being personified starts with a capital letter; for example, "The starry Night shook the dews from her wings." "Mild-eyed Day appeared," "The Oak said to the Beech—'I am stronger than you.'"
CHAPTER VI
LETTER WRITING
Principles of Letter-Writing—Forms—Notes
Many people seem to regard letter-writing as a very simple and easily acquired branch, but on the contrary it is one of the most difficult forms of composition and requires much patience and labor to master its details. In fact there are very few perfect letter-writers in the language. It constitutes the direct form of speech and may be called conversation at a distance. Its forms are so varied by every conceivable topic written at all times by all kinds of persons in all kinds of moods and tempers and addressed to all kinds of persons of varying degrees in society and of different pursuits in life, that no fixed rules can be laid down to regulate its length, style or subject matter. Only general suggestions can be made in regard to scope and purpose, and the forms of indicting set forth which custom and precedent have sanctioned.
Many people think that writing letters is really simple and something anyone can pick up easily, but actually, it’s one of the toughest forms of writing and takes a lot of patience and hard work to get right. In fact, there are very few perfect letter-writers in any language. It’s a direct way of communicating and can be seen as having a conversation from a distance. The formats are so diverse, covering every possible topic and written at all times by all sorts of people in different moods and states of mind, and sent to various recipients with different social statuses and life paths, that no strict rules can be established for its length, style, or subject matter. Only general advice can be offered regarding its scope and purpose, along with the formats of writing that tradition and precedent have upheld.
The principles of letter-writing should be understood by everybody who has any knowledge of written language, for almost everybody at some time or other has necessity to address some friend or acquaintance at a distance, whereas comparatively few are called upon to direct their efforts towards any other kind of composition.
The principles of letter-writing should be understood by everyone who knows how to write, because almost everyone will at some point need to communicate with a friend or acquaintance who is far away, while only a limited number of people are required to focus on other types of writing.
Formerly the illiterate countryman, when he had occasion to communicate with friends or relations, called in the peripatetic schoolmaster as his amanuensis, but this had one draw-back,—secrets had to be poured into an ear other than that for which they were intended, and often the confidence was betrayed.
In the past, the uneducated farmer, when he needed to talk to friends or family, would ask the wandering schoolteacher to write for him. However, this had a downside—his secrets had to be shared with someone other than the person they were meant for, and often that trust was broken.
Now, that education is abroad in the land, there is seldom any occasion for any person to call upon the service of another to compose and write a personal letter. Very few now-a-days are so grossly illiterate as not to be able to read and write. No matter how crude his effort may be it is better for any one to write his own letters than trust to another. Even if he should commence,—"deer fren, i lift up my pen to let ye no that i hove been sik for the past 3 weeks, hopping this will findye the same," his spelling and construction can be excused in view of the fact that his intention is good, and that he is doing his best to serve his own turn without depending upon others.
Now that education is widespread, there’s rarely a need for anyone to rely on someone else to write a personal letter. Very few people today are so poorly educated that they can't read and write. No matter how rough their writing might be, it’s better for anyone to write their own letters than to depend on someone else. Even if they start with, “Dear friend, I picked up my pen to let you know that I have been sick for the past three weeks, hoping this finds you well,” their spelling and grammar can be overlooked because their intention is good, and they’re making an effort to handle things themselves without relying on others.
The nature, substance and tone of any letter depend upon the occasion that calls it forth, upon the person writing it and upon the person for whom it is intended. Whether it should be easy or formal in style, plain or ornate, light or serious, gay or grave, sentimental or matter-of-fact depend upon these three circumstances.
The nature, substance, and tone of any letter depend on the occasion that prompts it, the person writing it, and the person receiving it. Whether the style should be casual or formal, straightforward or elaborate, light or serious, cheerful or somber, sentimental or straightforward is determined by these three factors.
In letter writing the first and most important requisites are to be natural and simple; there should be no straining after effect, but simply a spontaneous out-pouring of thoughts and ideas as they naturally occur to the writer. We are repelled by a person who is stiff and labored in his conversation and in the same way the stiff and labored letter bores the reader. Whereas if it is light and in a conversational vein it immediately engages his attention.
In letter writing, the first and most important requirements are to be natural and straightforward; there should be no forced attempts to impress, but rather a genuine flow of thoughts and ideas as they come to the writer. We are put off by someone who is rigid and pretentious in their conversation, and similarly, a stiff and overdone letter bores the reader. However, if it’s casual and conversational, it immediately grabs their attention.
The letter which is written with the greatest facility is the best kind of letter because it naturally expresses what is in the writer, he has not to search for his words, they flow in a perfect unison with the ideas he desires to communicate. When you write to your friend John Browne to tell him how you spent Sunday you have not to look around for the words, or study set phrases with a view to please or impress Browne, you just tell him the same as if he were present before you, how you spent the day, where you were, with whom you associated and the chief incidents that occurred during the time. Thus, you write natural and it is such writing that is adapted to epistolary correspondence.
The easiest letters to write are the best kind because they naturally express what the writer feels. You don’t have to hunt for the right words; they come flowing out perfectly in sync with the ideas you want to share. When you write to your friend John Browne to tell him about your Sunday, you don’t need to search for fancy phrases to impress him. You just tell him, as if he were right there with you, what you did, where you went, who you hung out with, and the main things that happened throughout the day. That’s how you write naturally, and that’s the kind of writing that works well for letters.
There are different kinds of letters, each calling for a different style of address and composition, nevertheless the natural key should be maintained in all, that is to say, the writer should never attempt to convey an impression that he is other than what he is. It would be silly as well as vain for the common street laborer of a limited education to try to put on literary airs and emulate a college professor; he may have as good a brain, but it is not as well developed by education, and he lacks the polish which society confers. When writing a letter the street laborer should bear in mind that only the letter of a street-laborer is expected from him, no matter to whom his communication may be addressed and that neither the grammar nor the diction of a Chesterfield or Gladstone is looked for in his language. Still the writer should keep in mind the person to whom he is writing. If it is to an Archbishop or some other great dignitary of Church or state it certainly should be couched in terms different from those he uses to John Browne, his intimate friend. Just as he cannot say "Dear John" to an Archbishop, no more can he address him in the familiar words he uses to his friend of everyday acquaintance and companionship. Yet there is no great learning required to write to an Archbishop, no more than to an ordinary individual. All the laborer needs to know is the form of address and how to properly utilize his limited vocabulary to the best advantage. Here is the form for such a letter:
There are different types of letters, each requiring a different style of address and composition. However, the writer should always stay true to themselves, meaning they shouldn't try to come across as something they aren’t. It would be both foolish and pretentious for a common street worker with limited education to try to sound like a literary scholar or a college professor; they might be just as intelligent, but their education hasn’t shaped them the same way, and they don’t have the polish that society provides. When writing a letter, the street worker should remember that only a street worker's letter is expected from them, regardless of who the letter is addressed to, and that no one expects the grammar or vocabulary of someone like Chesterfield or Gladstone in their writing. Still, the writer should consider who they are writing to. If it’s addressed to an Archbishop or another high-ranking official in the Church or state, the language should definitely be different from what they use with their close friend, John Browne. Just as they can’t say "Dear John" to an Archbishop, they also can’t address them with the casual phrases used with their everyday friends. Nevertheless, writing to an Archbishop doesn’t require great learning, just as it doesn't when writing to an ordinary person. All the worker needs to know is the correct way to address the person and how to make the best use of their limited vocabulary. Here’s the format for such a letter:
17 Second Avenue, New York City. January 1st, 1910. Most Rev. P. A. Jordan, Archbishop of New York. Most Rev. and dear Sir:— While sweeping the crossing at Fifth Avenue and 50th street on last Wednesday morning, I found the enclosed Fifty Dollar Bill, which I am sending to you in the hope that it may be restored to the rightful owner. I beg you will acknowledge receipt and should the owner be found I trust you will notify me, so that I may claim some reward for my honesty. I am, Most Rev. and dear Sir, Very respectfully yours, Thomas Jones.
17 Second Avenue, New York City. January 1, 1910. Most Rev. P. A. Jordan, Archbishop of New York. Most Rev. and dear Sir:— While I was sweeping the crossing at Fifth Avenue and 50th Street last Wednesday morning, I found the enclosed Fifty Dollar Bill, which I am sending you in the hope that it can be returned to its rightful owner. I kindly ask that you acknowledge receipt, and if the owner is found, I hope you will let me know so that I may claim some reward for my honesty. I am, Most Rev. and dear Sir, Very respectfully yours, Thomas Jones.
Observe the brevity of the letter. Jones makes no suggestions to the Archbishop how to find the owner, for he knows the course the Archbishop will adopt, of having the finding of the bill announced from the Church pulpits. Could Jones himself find the owner there would be no occasion to apply to the Archbishop.
Notice how short the letter is. Jones doesn’t suggest to the Archbishop how to locate the owner because he knows the Archbishop will choose to announce the finding of the bill from the Church pulpits. If Jones could find the owner himself, there would be no need to go to the Archbishop.
This letter, it is true, is different from that which he would send to Browne. Nevertheless it is simple without being familiar, is just a plain statement, and is as much to the point for its purpose as if it were garnished with rhetoric and "words of learned length and thundering sound."
This letter is indeed different from the one he would send to Browne. However, it’s straightforward without being overly casual; it’s just a clear statement and serves its purpose as effectively as if it were embellished with fancy language and elaborate, impressive words.
Letters may be divided into those of friendship, acquaintanceship, those of business relations, those written in an official capacity by public servants, those designed to teach, and those which give accounts of the daily happenings on the stage of life, in other words, news letters.
Letters can be categorized into friendships, acquaintanceships, business communications, those written officially by public servants, educational letters, and those that report on the everyday events of life, in other words, newsletters.
Letters of friendship are the most common and their style and form depend upon the degree of relationship and intimacy existing between the writers and those addressed. Between relatives and intimate friends the beginning and end may be in the most familiar form of conversation, either affectionate or playful. They should, however, never overstep the boundaries of decency and propriety, for it is well to remember that, unlike conversation, which only is heard by the ears for which it is intended, written words may come under eyes other than those for whom they were designed. Therefore, it is well never to write anything which the world may not read without detriment to your character or your instincts. You can be joyful, playful, jocose, give vent to your feelings, but never stoop to low language and, above all, to language savoring in the slightest degree of moral impropriety.
Letters of friendship are the most common, and their style and format depend on the level of relationship and closeness between the writers and the recipients. Between family members and close friends, the beginning and end can be very casual, either warm or playful. However, they should never cross the lines of decency and propriety, because unlike conversation, which is only heard by the intended audience, written words can be seen by others as well. Therefore, it’s best to avoid writing anything that the world can't read without harming your character or instincts. You can express happiness, playfulness, and your emotions, but never resort to inappropriate language and, above all, avoid any words that suggest moral impropriety.
Business letters are of the utmost importance on account of the interests involved. The business character of a man or of a firm is often judged by the correspondence. On many occasions letters instead of developing trade and business interests and gaining clientele, predispose people unfavorably towards those whom they are designed to benefit. Ambiguous, slip-shod language is a detriment to success. Business letters should be clear, concise, to the point and, above all, honest, giving no wrong impressions or holding out any inducements that cannot be fulfilled. In business letters, just as in business conduct, honesty is always the best policy.
Business letters are extremely important because of the interests at stake. A person's or a company's business reputation is often judged by their correspondence. Often, letters that should promote trade and attract clients end up creating a negative impression of those they’re meant to help. Vague or careless language hinders success. Business letters should be clear, concise, direct, and above all, honest, avoiding any misleading impressions or promises that can't be kept. In business letters, just like in business dealings, honesty is always the best approach.
Official letters are mostly always formal. They should possess clearness, brevity and dignity of tone to impress the receivers with the proper respect for the national laws and institutions.
Official letters are usually quite formal. They should be clear, concise, and dignified in tone to ensure that the recipients have the proper respect for the national laws and institutions.
Letters designed to teach or didactic letters are in a class all by themselves. They are simply literature in the form of letters and are employed by some of the best writers to give their thoughts and ideas a greater emphasis. The most conspicuous example of this kind of composition is the book on Etiquette by Lord Chesterfield, which took the form of a series of letters to his son.
Letters meant to teach, or didactic letters, stand out on their own. They are basically literature presented as letters and are used by some of the finest writers to highlight their thoughts and ideas more intensely. The most notable example of this type of writing is the book on etiquette by Lord Chesterfield, which consists of a series of letters to his son.
News letters are accounts of world happenings and descriptions of ceremonies and events sent into the newspapers. Some of the best authors of our time are newspaper men who write in an easy flowing style which is most readable, full of humor and fancy and which carries one along with breathless interest from beginning to end.
Newsletters are reports on global events and descriptions of ceremonies and happenings sent to newspapers. Some of the best writers of our time are journalists who write in a smooth, engaging style that is very readable, filled with humor and creativity, and keeps readers captivated from start to finish.
The principal parts of a letter are (1) the heading or introduction; (2) the body or substance of the letter; (3) the subscription or closing expression and signature; (4) the address or direction on the envelope. For the body of a letter no forms or rules can be laid down as it altogether depends on the nature of the letter and the relationship between the writer and the person addressed.
The main parts of a letter are (1) the heading or introduction; (2) the body or main content of the letter; (3) the subscription or closing remarks and signature; (4) the address or information on the envelope. For the body of a letter, there are no specific forms or rules, as it completely depends on the type of letter and the relationship between the writer and the recipient.
There are certain rules which govern the other three features and which custom has sanctioned. Every one should be acquainted with these rules.
There are specific rules that regulate the other three features, and these have been accepted by tradition. Everyone should be familiar with these rules.
THE HEADING
The Heading has three parts, viz., the name of the place, the date of writing and the designation of the person or persons addressed; thus:
The Heading has three parts: the name of the place, the date it was written, and the title of the person or people being addressed; as follows:
73 New Street, Newark, N. J., February 1st, 1910. Messr. Ginn and Co., New York Gentlemen:
73 New Street, Newark, NJ, February 1, 1910. Messrs. Ginn and Co., New York Dear Sirs:
The name of the place should never be omitted; in cities, street and number should always be given, and except when the city is large and very conspicuous, so that there can be no question as to its identity with another of the same or similar name, the abbreviation of the State should be appended, as in the above, Newark, N. J. There is another Newark in the State of Ohio. Owing to failure to comply with this rule many letters go astray. The date should be on every letter, especially business letters. The date should never be put at the bottom in a business letter, but in friendly letters this may be done. The designation of the person or persons addressed differs according to the relations of the correspondents. Letters of friendship may begin in many ways according to the degrees of friendship or intimacy. Thus:
The name of the place should never be left out; in cities, the street and number should always be included. Unless the city is large and well-known enough that there's no chance of confusing it with another city of the same or similar name, the state's abbreviation should be added, as in the example above, Newark, N. J. There’s another Newark in Ohio. Many letters get lost because people don’t follow this rule. The date should appear on every letter, especially business letters. In business letters, the date should never be placed at the bottom, but in friendly letters, that’s acceptable. The designation of the person or persons being addressed varies based on the relationship between the correspondents. Friendly letters can start in numerous ways depending on how close the friends are. So:
My dear Wife: My dear Husband: My dear Friend: My darling Mother: My dearest Love: Dear Aunt: Dear Uncle: Dear George: etc.
My dear Wife: My dear Husband: My dear Friend: My darling Mother: My dearest Love: Dear Aunt: Dear Uncle: Dear George: etc.
To mark a lesser degree of intimacy such formal designations as the following may be employed:
To indicate a lower level of intimacy, you can use formal titles like the following:
Dear Sir: My dear Sir: Dear Mr. Smith: Dear Madam: etc.
Dear Sir: My dear Sir: Dear Mr. Smith: Dear Madam: etc.
For clergymen who have the degree of Doctor of Divinity, the designation is as follows:
For clergy who have a Doctor of Divinity degree, the title is as follows:
Rev. Alban Johnson, D. D. My dear Sir: or Rev. and dear Sir: or more familiarly Dear Dr. Johnson:
Rev. Alban Johnson, D. D. My dear Sir: or Rev. and dear Sir: or more casually Dear Dr. Johnson:
Bishops of the Roman and Anglican Communions are addressed as Right Reverend.
Bishops of the Roman and Anglican Communions are called Right Reverend.
The Rt. Rev., the Bishop of Long Island. or The Rt. Rev. Frederick Burgess, Bishop of Long Island. Rt. Rev. and dear Sir:
The Right Reverend, the Bishop of Long Island, or The Right Reverend Frederick Burgess, Bishop of Long Island. Right Reverend and dear Sir:
Archbishops of the Roman Church are addressed as Most Reverend and Cardinals as Eminence. Thus:
Archbishops of the Roman Church are called Most Reverend and Cardinals Eminence. So:
The Most Rev. Archbishop Katzer. Most Rev. and dear Sir: His Eminence, James Cardinal Gibbons, Archbishop of Baltimore. May it please your Eminence:
The Most Rev. Archbishop Katzer. Most Rev. and dear Sir: His Eminence, James Cardinal Gibbons, Archbishop of Baltimore. May it please your Eminence:
The title of the Governor of a State or territory and of the President of the United States is Excellency. However, Honorable is more commonly applied to Governors:—
The title for a Governor of a state or territory and for the President of the United States is Excellency. However, Honorable is more commonly used for Governors:—
His Excellency, William Howard Taft, President of the United States. Sir:— His Excellency, Charles Evans Hughes, Governor of the State of New York. Sir:— Honorable Franklin Fort, Governor of New Jersey. Sir:—
His Excellency, William Howard Taft, President of the United States. Sir:— His Excellency, Charles Evans Hughes, Governor of the State of New York. Sir:— Honorable Franklin Fort, Governor of New Jersey. Sir:—
The general salutation for Officers of the Army and Navy is Sir. The rank and station should be indicated in full at the head of the letter, thus:
The common greeting for Officers of the Army and Navy is Sir. The rank and position should be fully stated at the top of the letter, like this:
General Joseph Thompson, Commanding the Seventh Infantry. Sir: Rear Admiral Robert Atkinson, Commanding the Atlantic Squadron. Sir:
General Joseph Thompson, Commanding the Seventh Infantry. Sir: Rear Admiral Robert Atkinson, Commanding the Atlantic Squadron. Sir:
The title of officers of the Civil Government is Honorable and they are addressed as Sir.
The title for officials in the Civil Government is Honorable, and they are addressed as Sir.
Hon. Nelson Duncan, Senator from Ohio. Sir: Hon. Norman Wingfield, Secretary of the Treasury. Sir: Hon. Rupert Gresham, Mayor of New York. Sir:
Hon. Nelson Duncan, Senator from Ohio. Sir: Hon. Norman Wingfield, Secretary of the Treasury. Sir: Hon. Rupert Gresham, Mayor of New York. Sir:
Presidents and Professors of Colleges and Universities are generally addressed as Sir or Dear Sir.
Presidents and professors at colleges and universities are usually addressed as Sir or Dear Sir.
Professor Ferguson Jenks, President of .......... University. Sir: or Dear Sir:
Professor Ferguson Jenks, President of .......... University. Sir: or Dear Sir:
Presidents of Societies and Associations are treated as business men and addressed as Sir or Dear Sir.
Presidents of Societies and Associations are treated as businesspeople and addressed as Sir or Dear Sir.
Mr. Joseph Banks, President of the Night Owls. Dear Sir: or Sir:
Mr. Joseph Banks,
President of the Night Owls.
Dear Sir: or Sir:
Doctors of Medicine are addressed as Sir: My dear Sir: Dear Sir: and more familiarly My dear Dr: or Dear Dr: as
Doctors of Medicine are addressed as Sir: My dear Sir: Dear Sir: and more casually My dear Dr: or Dear Dr: as
Ryerson Pitkin, M. D. Sir: Dear Sir: My dear Dr:
Ryerson Pitkin, M. D. Sir: Dear Sir: My dear Dr:
Ordinary people with no degrees or titles are addressed as Mr. and Mrs. and are designed Dear Sir: Dear Madam: and an unmarried woman of any age is addressed on the envelope as Miss So-and-so, but always designed in the letter as
Ordinary people without degrees or titles are addressed as Mr. and Mrs. and written as Dear Sir: Dear Madam: An unmarried woman of any age is addressed on the envelope as Miss So-and-so, but always written in the letter as
Dear Madam:
Dear Ma'am:
The plural of Mr. as in addressing a firm is Messrs, and the corresponding salutation is Dear Sirs: or Gentlemen:
The plural of Mr. when addressing a firm is Messrs, and the appropriate salutation is Dear Sirs: or Gentlemen:
In England Esq. is used for Mr. as a mark of slight superiority and in this country it is sometimes used, but it is practically obsolete. Custom is against it and American sentiment as well. If it is used it should be only applied to lawyers and justices of the peace.
In England, Esq. is used for Mr. as a sign of slight superiority, and in this country, it's sometimes used, but it's practically outdated. Custom is against it, and so is American sentiment. If it is used, it should only be applied to lawyers and justices of the peace.
SUBSCRIPTION
The Subscription or ending of a letter consists of the term of respect or affection and the signature. The term depends upon the relation of the person addressed. Letters of friendship can close with such expressions as:
The Subscription or ending of a letter includes a term of respect or affection and the signature. The term used depends on the relationship with the person being addressed. Letters to friends can end with expressions like:
Yours lovingly, Yours affectionately, Devotedly yours, Ever yours, etc.
Yours lovingly, Yours affectionately, Devotedly yours, Ever yours, etc.
as between husbands and wives or between lovers. Such gushing terminations as Your Own Darling, Your own Dovey and other pet and silly endings should be avoided, as they denote shallowness. Love can be strongly expressed without dipping into the nonsensical and the farcical.
as between husbands and wives or between lovers. Such overly emotional endings like Your Own Darling, Your Own Dovey, and other cutesy and silly phrases should be avoided, as they imply shallowness. Love can be powerfully expressed without resorting to the ridiculous and the absurd.
Formal expressions of Subscription are:
Subscription formal expressions are:
Yours Sincerely, Yours truly, Respectfully yours,
Yours Sincerely, Yours truly, Respectfully yours,
and the like, and these may be varied to denote the exact bearing or attitude the writer wishes to assume to the person addressed: as,
and similar things, which can be changed to show the exact position or attitude the writer wants to take towards the person being addressed: as,
Very sincerely yours, Very respectfully yours, With deep respect yours, Yours very truly, etc.
Sincerely yours, Respectfully yours, With deep respect, Yours truly, etc.
Such elaborate endings as
Such intricate conclusions as
"In the meantime with the highest respect, I am yours to command," "I have the honor to be, Sir, Your humble Servant," "With great expression of esteem, I am Sincerely yours," "Believe me, my dear Sir, Ever faithfully yours,"
"In the meantime, with the utmost respect, I'm at your service," "I have the honor to be, Sir, your humble servant," "With deep respect, I am sincerely yours," "Believe me, my dear Sir, I am always faithfully yours,"
are condemned as savoring too much of affectation.
are seen as being overly pretentious.
It is better to finish formal letters without any such qualifying remarks. If you are writing to Mr. Ryan to tell him that you have a house for sale, after describing the house and stating the terms simply sign yourself
It’s better to conclude formal letters without any qualifying remarks. If you’re writing to Mr. Ryan to inform him that you have a house for sale, after describing the house and stating the terms, just sign your name.
Your obedient Servant Yours very truly, Yours with respect, James Wilson.
Your obedient servant Yours truly, Yours respectfully, James Wilson.
Don't say you have the honor to be anything or ask him to believe anything, all you want to tell him is that you have a house for sale and that you are sincere, or hold him in respect as a prospective customer.
Don't say you have the honor of being anything or ask him to believe anything; all you need to tell him is that you have a house for sale and that you’re being genuine, or treat him with respect as a potential buyer.
Don't abbreviate the signature as: Y'rs Resp'fly and always make your sex obvious. Write plainly
Don't shorten the signature to: Y'rs Resp'fly and always make your gender clear. Write clearly.
John Field
and not J. Field, so that the person to whom you send it may not take you for Jane Field.
and not J. Field, so that the person you send it to may not think you are Jane Field.
It is always best to write the first name in full. Married women should prefix Mrs. to their names, as
It is always best to write the first name in full. Married women should use Mrs. before their names, as
Mrs. Theodore Watson.
If you are sending a letter acknowledging a compliment or some kindness done you may say, Yours gratefully, or Yours very gratefully, in proportion to the act of kindness received.
If you're sending a letter to thank someone for a compliment or a kind act, you can say, Yours gratefully, or Yours very gratefully, depending on how significant the kindness was.
It is not customary to sign letters of degrees or titles after your name, except you are a lord, earl or duke and only known by the title, but as we have no such titles in America it is unnecessary to bring this matter into consideration. Don't sign yourself,
It’s not common to sign letters with degrees or titles after your name unless you’re a lord, earl, or duke and are only known by that title. Since we don’t have such titles in America, there’s no need to worry about this. Don’t sign yourself,
Sincerely yours, Obadiah Jackson, M.A. or L.L. D.
Sincerely, Obadiah Jackson, M.A. or L.L.D.
If you're an M. A. or an L.L. D. people generally know it without your sounding your own trumpet. Many people, and especially clergymen, are fond of flaunting after their names degrees they have received honoris causa, that is, degrees as a mark of honor, without examination. Such degrees should be kept in the background. Many a deadhead has these degrees which he could never have earned by brain work.
If you have an M.A. or an L.L.D., people usually recognize it without you needing to show off. A lot of folks, especially clergy, like to flaunt honorary degrees they received honoris causa, which are given as a sign of honor without requiring any exams. These degrees should be kept under wraps. Many slackers hold these degrees that they could never have earned through actual effort.
Married women whose husbands are alive may sign the husband's name with the prefix Mrs: thus,
Married women whose husbands are alive can sign their husband's name using the prefix Mrs: so,
Mrs. William Southey.
but when the husband is dead the signature should be—
but when the husband is dead the signature should be—
Mrs. Sarah Southey.
So when we receive a letter from a woman we are enabled to tell whether she has a husband living or is a widow. A woman separated from her husband but not a divorcee should not sign his name.
So when we get a letter from a woman, we can tell whether she has a husband who's alive or if she's a widow. A woman who is separated from her husband but not divorced should not sign his name.
ADDRESS
The address of a letter consists of the name, the title and the residence.
The address of a letter includes the person's name, title, and home address.
Mr. Hugh Black, 112 Southgate Street, Altoona, Pa.
Mr. Hugh Black, 112 Southgate Street, Altoona, PA.
Intimate friends have often familiar names for each other, such as pet names, nicknames, etc., which they use in the freedom of conversation, but such names should never, under any circumstances, appear on the envelope. The subscription on the envelope should be always written with propriety and correctness and as if penned by an entire stranger. The only difficulty in the envelope inscription is the title. Every man is entitled to Mr. and every lady to Mrs. and every unmarried lady to Miss. Even a boy is entitled to Master. When more than one is addressed the title is Messrs. Mesdames is sometimes written of women. If the person addressed has a title it is courteous to use it, but titles never must be duplicated. Thus, we can write
Close friends often have familiar names for each other, like pet names or nicknames, which they use freely in conversation. However, such names should never appear on the envelope, regardless of the circumstances. The address on the envelope should always be written properly and correctly, as if it were from a complete stranger. The only challenge in addressing the envelope is the title. Every man gets Mr., every woman gets Mrs., and every unmarried woman gets Miss. Even a boy is entitled to Master. When addressing multiple people, the title is Messrs.. Mesdames is sometimes used for women. If the person being addressed has a title, it's polite to use it, but titles should never be duplicated. Therefore, we can write
Robert Stitt, M. D., but never Dr. Robert Stitt, M. D, or Mr. Robert Stitt, M. D.
Robert Stitt, M. D., but never Dr. Robert Stitt, M. D., or Mr. Robert Stitt, M. D.
In writing to a medical doctor it is well to indicate his profession by the letters M. D. so as to differentiate him from a D. D. It is better to write Robert Stitt, M. D., than Dr. Robert Stitt.
In writing to a doctor, it's good to show his profession with the letters M. D. to distinguish him from a D. D. It's preferable to write Robert Stitt, M. D., instead of Dr. Robert Stitt.
In the case of clergymen the prefix Rev. is retained even when they have other titles; as
In the case of clergymen, the prefix Rev. is kept even when they have other titles; as
Rev. Tracy Tooke, LL. D.
Rev. Tracy Tooke, LL.D.
When a person has more titles than one it is customary to only give him the leading one. Thus instead of writing Rev. Samuel MacComb, B. A., M. A., B. Sc., Ph. D., LL. D., D. D. the form employed is Rev. Samuel MacComb, LL. D. LL. D. is appended in preference to D. D. because in most cases the "Rev." implies a "D. D." while comparatively few with the prefix "Rev." are entitled to "LL. D."
When someone has multiple titles, it’s common to only use the most important one. So instead of writing Rev. Samuel MacComb, B. A., M. A., B. Sc., Ph. D., LL. D., D. D., you would write Rev. Samuel MacComb, LL. D. LL. D. is preferred over D. D. because usually "Rev." suggests a "D. D.," while relatively few people with the title "Rev." actually hold an "LL. D."
In the case of Honorables such as Governors, Judges, Members of Congress, and others of the Civil Government the prefix "Hon." does away with Mr. and Esq. Thus we write Hon. Josiah Snifkins, not Hon. Mr. Josiah Snifkins or Hon. Josiah Snifkins, Esq. Though this prefix Hon. is also often applied to Governors they should be addressed as Excellency. For instance:
In the case of officials like Governors, Judges, Members of Congress, and others in the Civil Government, the prefix "Hon." replaces "Mr." and "Esq." So we write Hon. Josiah Snifkins, not Hon. Mr. Josiah Snifkins or Hon. Josiah Snifkins, Esq. Although this prefix "Hon." is often used for Governors, they should be addressed as Excellency. For example:
His Excellency, Charles E. Hughes, Albany, N. Y.
His Excellency, Charles E. Hughes, Albany, NY.
In writing to the President the superscription on the envelope should be
In writing to the President, the address on the envelope should be
To the President, Executive Mansion, Washington, D. C.
To the President, Executive Mansion, Washington, D.C.
Professional men such as doctors and lawyers as well as those having legitimately earned College Degrees may be addressed on the envelopes by their titles, as
Professional individuals like doctors and lawyers, as well as those who have legitimately earned a college degree, may be addressed on the envelopes by their titles, as
Jonathan Janeway, M. D. Hubert Houston, B. L. Matthew Marks, M. A., etc.
Jonathan Janeway, M.D. Hubert Houston, B.L. Matthew Marks, M.A., etc.
The residence of the person addressed should be plainly written out in full. The street and numbers should be given and the city or town written very legibly. If the abbreviation of the State is liable to be confounded or confused with that of another then the full name of the State should be written. In writing the residence on the envelope, instead of putting it all in one line as is done at the head of a letter, each item of the residence forms a separate line. Thus,
The address of the person you're writing to should be clearly written out in full. Include the street and number, and make sure the city or town name is very easy to read. If the state abbreviation could be confused with another, then write out the full name of the state. When writing the address on the envelope, instead of putting it all in one line like you do at the top of a letter, each part of the address should be on a separate line. So,
Liberty, Sullivan County, New York. 215 Minna St., San Francisco, California.
Liberty, Sullivan County, New York. 215 Minna St., San Francisco, California.
There should be left a space for the postage stamp in the upper right hand corner. The name and title should occupy a line that is about central between the top of the envelope and the bottom. The name should neither be too much to right or left but located in the centre, the beginning and end at equal distances from either end.
There should be a space for the postage stamp in the upper right corner. The name and title should be centered between the top and bottom of the envelope. The name should not be too far to the right or left but placed in the center, with the beginning and end at equal distances from each side.
In writing to large business concerns which are well known or to public or city officials it is sometimes customary to leave out number and street. Thus,
In writing to major businesses that are well known or to public or city officials, it's sometimes common to omit the number and street. Thus,
Messrs. Seigel, Cooper Co., New York City, Hon. William J. Gaynor, New York City.
Messrs. Seigel, Cooper Co., New York City, Hon. William J. Gaynor, New York City.
NOTES
Notes may be regarded as letters in miniature confined chiefly to invitations, acceptances, regrets and introductions, and modern etiquette tends towards informality in their composition. Card etiquette, in fact, has taken the place of ceremonious correspondence and informal notes are now the rule. Invitations to dinner and receptions are now mostly written on cards. "Regrets" are sent back on visiting cards with just the one word "Regrets" plainly written thereon. Often on cards and notes of invitation we find the letters R. S. V. P. at the bottom. These letters stand for the French repondez s'il vous plait, which means "Reply, if you please," but there is no necessity to put this on an invitation card as every well-bred person knows that a reply is expected. In writing notes to young ladies of the same family it should be noted that the eldest daughter of the house is entitled to the designation Miss without any Christian name, only the surname appended. Thus if there are three daughters in the Thompson family Martha, the eldest, Susan and Jemina, Martha is addressed as Miss Thompson and the other two as Miss Susan Thompson and Miss Jemina Thompson respectively.
Notes can be seen as short letters mainly used for invitations, confirmations, regrets, and introductions, and today's etiquette leans towards being informal in their writing. Card etiquette has actually replaced formal correspondence, making informal notes the norm now. Most dinner and reception invitations are written on cards. "Regrets" are returned on visiting cards with just the single word "Regrets" clearly written on them. Often, on invitation cards and notes, you'll see the letters R. S. V. P. at the bottom. These letters stand for the French repondez s'il vous plait, which means "Reply, if you please," but it’s not necessary to include this on an invitation card since everyone with good manners knows a reply is expected. When writing notes to young women from the same family, it's important to note that the oldest daughter is addressed as Miss without her first name, only her last name. So, if there are three daughters in the Thompson family—Martha, the eldest, Susan, and Jemina—Martha is addressed as Miss Thompson, while the other two are addressed as Miss Susan Thompson and Miss Jemina Thompson, respectively.
Don't write the word addressed on the envelope of a note.
Don't write the word addressed on the envelope of a note.
Don't seal a note delivered by a friend.
Don't seal a note given to you by a friend.
Don't write a note on a postal card.
Don't write a message on a postcard.
Here are a few common forms:—
Here are a few common types:—
FORMAL INVITATIONS
Mr. and Mrs. Henry Wagstaff request the honor of Mr. McAdoo's presence on Friday evening, June 15th, at 8 o'clock to meet the Governor of the Fort. 19 Woodbine Terrace June 8th, 1910.
Mr. and Mrs. Henry Wagstaff invite Mr. McAdoo to join them on Friday evening, June 15th, at 8:00 PM to meet the Governor of the Fort. 19 Woodbine Terrace June 8th, 1910.
This is an invitation to a formal reception calling for evening dress. Here is Mr. McAdoo's reply in the third person:—
This is an invitation to a formal reception requiring evening attire. Here is Mr. McAdoo's response in the third person:—
Mr. McAdoo presents his compliments to Mr. and Mrs. Henry Wagstaff and accepts with great pleasure their invitation to meet the Governor of the Fort on the evening of June fifteenth. 215 Beacon Street, June 10th, 1910.
Mr. McAdoo sends his regards to Mr. and Mrs. Henry Wagstaff and is pleased to accept their invitation to meet the Governor of the Fort on the evening of June 15th. 215 Beacon Street, June 10th, 1910.
Here is how Mr. McAdoo might decline the invitation:—
Here’s how Mr. McAdoo might say no to the invitation:—
Mr. McAdoo regrets that owing to a prior engagement he must forego the honor of paying his respects to Mr. and Mrs. Wagstaff and the Governor of the Fort on the evening of June fifteenth. 215 Beacon St., June 10th, 1910.
Mr. McAdoo regrets that due to a prior commitment he must miss the chance to pay his respects to Mr. and Mrs. Wagstaff and the Governor of the Fort on the evening of June 15th. 215 Beacon St., June 10th, 1910.
Here is a note addressed, say to Mr. Jeremiah Reynolds.
Here is a note addressed to Mr. Jeremiah Reynolds.
Mr. and Mrs. Oldham at home on Wednesday evening October ninth from seven to eleven. 21 Ashland Avenue, October 5th.
Mr. and Mrs. Oldham are hosting at home on Wednesday evening, October 9th, from 7 to 11 PM. 21 Ashland Avenue, October 5th.
Mr. Reynolds makes reply:—
Mr. Reynolds responds:—
Mr. Reynolds accepts with high appreciation the honor of Mr. and Mrs. Oldham's invitation for Wednesday evening October ninth. Windsor Hotel October 7th
Mr. Reynolds gratefully accepts the invitation from Mr. and Mrs. Oldham for Wednesday evening, October 9th. Windsor Hotel October 7th
Mr. Reynolds regrets that his duties render it impossible for him to accept Mr. and Mrs. Oldham's kind invitation for the evening of October ninth. Windsor Hotel, October 7th,
Mr. Reynolds is sorry that his responsibilities make it impossible for him to accept Mr. and Mrs. Oldham's kind invitation for the evening of October ninth. Windsor Hotel, October 7th,
Sometimes less informal invitations are sent on small specially designed note paper in which the first person takes the place of the third. Thus
Sometimes less formal invitations are sent on small, specially designed notepaper where the first person takes the place of the third. Thus
360 Pine St., Dec. 11th, 1910. Dear Mr. Saintsbury: Mr. Johnson and I should be much pleased to have you dine with us and a few friends next Thursday, the fifteenth, at half past seven. Yours sincerely, Emma Burnside.
360 Pine St., Dec. 11, 1910. Dear Mr. Saintsbury: Mr. Johnson and I would be delighted to have you join us for dinner with a few friends next Thursday, the fifteenth, at 7:30 PM. Yours sincerely, Emma Burnside.
Mr. Saintsbury's reply:
Mr. Saintsbury's response:
57 Carlyle Strand Dec. 13th, 1910. Dear Mrs. Burnside: Let me accept very appreciatively your invitation to dine with Mr. Burnside and you on next Thursday, the fifteenth, at half past seven. Yours sincerely, Henry Saintsbury. Mrs. Alexander Burnside.
57 Carlyle Strand Dec. 13, 1910. Dear Mrs. Burnside: I’m very grateful for your invitation to have dinner with you and Mr. Burnside next Thursday, the fifteenth, at 7:30 PM. Yours sincerely, Henry Saintsbury. Mrs. Alexander Burnside.
NOTES OF INTRODUCTION
Notes of introduction should be very circumspect as the writers are in reality vouching for those whom they introduce. Here is a specimen of such a note.
Notes of introduction should be very careful since the writers are really vouching for those they introduce. Here is an example of such a note.
603 Lexington Ave., New York City, June 15th, 1910. Rev. Cyrus C. Wiley, D. D., Newark, N. J. My dear Dr. Wiley: I take the liberty of presenting to you my friend, Stacy Redfern, M. D., a young practitioner, who is anxious to locate in Newark. I have known him many years and can vouch for his integrity and professional standing. Any courtesy and kindness which you may show him will be very much appreciated by me. Very sincerely yours, Franklin Jewett.
603 Lexington Ave., New York City, June 15, 1910. Rev. Cyrus C. Wiley, D. D., Newark, N. J. Dear Dr. Wiley, I’d like to introduce you to my friend, Stacy Redfern, M. D., a young doctor who is eager to set up practice in Newark. I’ve known him for many years and can assure you of his integrity and professional reputation. Any kindness and support you can offer him would mean a lot to me. Sincerely yours, Franklin Jewett.
CHAPTER VII
ERRORS
Mistakes—Slips of Authors—Examples and Corrections—Errors of Redundancy.
In the following examples the word or words in parentheses are uncalled for and should be omitted:
In the following examples, the word or words in parentheses are unnecessary and should be removed:
-
Fill the glass (full).
Fill the glass to the top.
-
They appeared to be talking (together) on private affairs.
They seemed to be discussing personal matters.
-
I saw the boy and his sister (both) in the garden.
I saw the boy and his sister in the garden.
-
He went into the country last week and returned (back) yesterday.
He went out to the countryside last week and came back yesterday.
-
The subject (matter) of his discourse was excellent.
The topic of his talk was excellent.
-
You need not wonder that the (subject) matter of his discourse was excellent; it was taken from the Bible.
You don't need to be surprised that the topic of his talk was great; it was based on the Bible.
-
They followed (after) him, but could not overtake him.
They followed him, but couldn't catch up.
-
The same sentiments may be found throughout (the whole of) the book.
The same feelings can be found throughout the entire book.
-
I was very ill every day (of my life) last week.
I was sick every day last week.
-
That was the (sum and) substance of his discourse.
That was the essence of his speech.
-
He took wine and water and mixed them (both) together.
He mixed wine and water together.
-
He descended (down) the steps to the cellar.
He walked down the steps to the basement.
-
He fell (down) from the top of the house.
He fell from the roof of the house.
-
I hope you will return (again) soon.
I hope you'll come back soon.
-
The things he took away he restored (again).
The things he took away, he returned (again).
-
The thief who stole my watch was compelled to restore it (back again).
The thief who took my watch was forced to give it back.
-
It is equally (the same) to me whether I have it today or tomorrow.
It doesn't matter to me whether I have it today or tomorrow.
-
She said, (says she) the report is false; and he replied, (says he) if it be not correct I have been misinformed.
She said the report is false; and he replied, if it's not correct, I've been misinformed.
-
I took my place in the cars (for) to go to New York.
I took my seat in the train to go to New York.
-
They need not (to) call upon him.
They don't need to call on him.
-
Nothing (else) but that would satisfy him.
Nothing else would satisfy him.
-
Whenever I ride in the cars I (always) find it prejudicial to my health.
Whenever I ride in cars, I always find it bad for my health.
-
He was the first (of all) at the meeting.
He was the first one at the meeting.
-
He was the tallest of (all) the brothers.
He was the tallest of all the brothers.
-
You are the tallest of (all) your family.
You are the tallest in your family.
-
Whenever I pass the house he is (always) at the door.
Whenever I walk by the house, he’s always at the door.
-
The rain has penetrated (through) the roof.
The rain has gotten through the roof.
-
Besides my uncle and aunt there was (also) my grandfather at the church.
Besides my uncle and aunt, my grandfather was also at the church.
-
It should (ever) be your constant endeavor to please your family.
It should always be your goal to make your family happy.
-
If it is true as you have heard (then) his situation is indeed pitiful.
If what you've heard is true, then his situation is truly sad.
-
Either this (here) man or that (there) woman has (got) it.
Either this guy (here) or that girl (there) has it.
-
Where is the fire (at)?
Where's the fire?
-
Did you sleep in church? Not that I know (of).
Did you fall asleep during church? Not that I know of.
-
I never before (in my life) met (with) such a stupid man.
I have never met someone so stupid in my life.
-
(For) why did he postpone it?
For why did he postpone it?
-
Because (why) he could not attend.
Because he couldn’t make it.
-
What age is he? (Why) I don't know.
What age is he? I have no idea.
-
He called on me (for) to ask my opinion.
He called me to ask for my opinion.
-
I don't know where I am (at).
I don't know where I am.
-
I looked in (at) the window.
I peered in through the window.
-
I passed (by) the house.
I walked by the house.
-
He (always) came every Sunday.
He came every Sunday.
-
Moreover, (also) we wish to say he was in error.
Moreover, we also want to say he was mistaken.
-
It is not long (ago) since he was here.
It wasn't long ago that he was here.
-
Two men went into the wood (in order) to cut (down) trees.
Two men went into the woods to cut down trees.
Further examples of redundancy might be multiplied. It is very common in newspaper writing where not alone single words but entire phrases are sometimes brought in, which are unnecessary to the sense or explanation of what is written.
Further examples of redundancy could be numerous. It is very common in newspaper writing where not only single words but also entire phrases are sometimes included that are unnecessary to the meaning or explanation of what is written.
GRAMMATICAL ERRORS OF STANDARD AUTHORS
Even the best speakers and writers are sometimes caught napping. Many of our standard authors to whom we have been accustomed to look up as infallible have sinned more or less against the fundamental principles of grammar by breaking the rules regarding one or more of the nine parts of speech. In fact some of them have recklessly trespassed against all nine, and still they sit on their pedestals of fame for the admiration of the crowd. Macaulay mistreated the article. He wrote,—"That a historian should not record trifles is perfectly true." He should have used an.
Even the best speakers and writers can sometimes make mistakes. Many of the well-known authors we see as flawless have strayed in varying degrees from the basic principles of grammar by breaking the rules about one or more of the nine parts of speech. In fact, some of them have carelessly violated all nine, yet they still remain on their pedestals of fame, admired by the public. Macaulay misused the article. He wrote, "That a historian should not record trifles is perfectly true." He should have used an.
Dickens also used the article incorrectly. He refers to "Robinson Crusoe" as "an universally popular book," instead of a universally popular book.
Dickens also used the article incorrectly. He refers to "Robinson Crusoe" as "an universally popular book," instead of a universally popular book.
The relation between nouns and pronouns has always been a stumbling block to speakers and writers. Hallam in his Literature of Europe writes, "No one as yet had exhibited the structure of the human kidneys, Vesalius having only examined them in dogs." This means that Vesalius examined human kidneys in dogs. The sentence should have been, "No one had as yet exhibited the kidneys in human beings, Vesalius having examined such organs in dogs only."
The relationship between nouns and pronouns has always been a challenge for speakers and writers. Hallam in his Literature of Europe writes, "No one as yet had exhibited the structure of the human kidneys, Vesalius having only examined them in dogs." This means that Vesalius examined human kidneys in dogs. The sentence should have been, "No one had yet exhibited the kidneys in human beings, Vesalius having only examined such organs in dogs."
Sir Arthur Helps in writing of Dickens, states—"I knew a brother author of his who received such criticisms from him (Dickens) very lately and profited by it." Instead of it the word should be them to agree with criticisms.
Sir Arthur Helps, in writing about Dickens, says—"I knew a fellow author of his who received such criticisms from him (Dickens) very recently and benefited from it." Instead of it, the word should be them to match the plural form of criticisms.
Here are a few other pronominal errors from leading authors:
Here are a few other pronoun errors from prominent authors:
"Sir Thomas Moore in general so writes it, although not many others so late as him." Should be he.—Trench's English Past and Present.
"Sir Thomas Moore generally writes it this way, although not many others do as recently as he." Should be he.—Trench's English Past and Present.
"What should we gain by it but that we should speedily become as poor as them." Should be they.—Alison's Essay on Macaulay.
"What should we gain by it but that we should quickly become as poor as they." Should be they.—Alison's Essay on Macaulay.
"If the king gives us leave you or I may as lawfully preach, as them that do." Should be they or those, the latter having persons understood.—Hobbes's History of Civil Wars.
"If the king allows us, you or I can preach just as legally as they do." It should be they or those, the latter implying people understood.—Hobbes's History of Civil Wars.
"The drift of all his sermons was, to prepare the Jews for the reception of a prophet, mightier than him, and whose shoes he was not worthy to bear." Should be than he.—Atterbury's Sermons.
"The focus of all his sermons was to get the Jews ready for the arrival of a prophet greater than he, and whose shoes he was not worthy to carry." Should be than he.—Atterbury's Sermons.
"Phalaris, who was so much older than her." Should be she.—Bentley's Dissertation on Phalaris.
"Phalaris, who was so much older than she." Should be she.—Bentley's Dissertation on Phalaris.
"King Charles, and more than him, the duke and the Popish faction were at liberty to form new schemes." Should be than he.—Bolingbroke's Dissertations on Parties.
"King Charles, and more than he, the duke and the Catholic faction were free to create new plans." Should be than he.—Bolingbroke's Dissertations on Parties.
"We contributed a third more than the Dutch, who were obliged to the same proportion more than us." Should be than we.—Swift's Conduct of the Allies.
"We contributed a third more than the Dutch, who were required to contribute the same proportion more than we." Should be than we.—Swift's Conduct of the Allies.
In all the above examples the objective cases of the pronouns have been used while the construction calls for nominative cases.
In all the examples above, the objective forms of the pronouns have been used, even though the construction requires nominative forms.
"Let thou and I the battle try"—Anon.
"Let you and I try the battle"—Anon.
Here let is the governing verb and requires an objective case after it; therefore instead of thou and I, the words should be you (sing.) and me.
Here let is the governing verb and requires an objective case after it; therefore instead of thou and I, the words should be you (sing.) and me.
"Forever in this humble cell, Let thee and I, my fair one, dwell"—Prior.
"Forever in this humble cell, let you and me, my beautiful one, dwell"—Prior.
Here thee and I should be the objectives you and me.
Here you and I should be the objectives you and me.
The use of the relative pronoun trips the greatest number of authors.
The use of the relative pronoun confuses most authors.
Even in the Bible we find the relative wrongly translated:
Even in the Bible, we see the relative translated incorrectly:
Whom do men say that I am?—St. Matthew.
Whom do people say that I am?—St. Matthew.
Whom think ye that I am?—Acts of the Apostles.
Whom do you think I am?—Acts of the Apostles.
Who should be written in both cases because the word is not in the objective governed by say or think, but in the nominative dependent on the verb am.
Who should be written in both cases because the word is not in the objective governed by say or think, but in the nominative dependent on the verb am.
"Who should I meet at the coffee house t'other night, but my old friend?"—Steele.
"Who should I run into at the coffee shop the other night but my old friend?"—Steele.
"It is another pattern of this answerer's fair dealing, to give us hints that the author is dead, and yet lay the suspicion upon somebody, I know not who, in the country."—Swift's Tale of a Tub.
"It’s another aspect of this responder's honesty to suggest that the author is dead while still casting suspicion on someone, I don’t know who, in the country."—Swift's Tale of a Tub.
"My son is going to be married to I don't know who." —Goldsmith's Good-natured Man.
"My son's getting married to I don't know who." —Goldsmith's Good-natured Man.
The nominative who in the above examples should be the objective whom.
The nominative who in the examples above should be the objective whom.
The plural nominative ye of the pronoun thou is very often used for the objective you, as in the following:
The plural form ye of the pronoun thou is often used for the objective you, as in the following:
"His wrath which will one day destroy ye both." —Milton.
"His anger that will one day destroy you both." —Milton.
"The more shame for ye; holy men I thought ye."—Shakespeare.
"The more shame for you; I thought you were holy men." — *Shakespeare*.
"I feel the gales that from ye blow."—Gray.
"I can feel the winds that blow from you."—Gray.
"Tyrants dread ye, lest your just decree Transfer the power and set the people free."—Prior.
"Tyrants fear you, because your fair decision may take away their power and free the people."—Prior.
Many of the great writers have played havoc with the adjective in the indiscriminate use of the degrees of comparison.
Many great writers have really messed with adjectives by using the degrees of comparison without any restraint.
"Of two forms of the same word, use the fittest."—Morell.
"Of two forms of the same word, use the most suitable."—Morell.
The author here in trying to give good advice sets a bad example. He should have used the comparative degree, "Fitter."
The author here in trying to give good advice sets a bad example. He should have used the comparative form, "Fitter."
Adjectives which have a comparative or superlative signification do not admit the addition of the words more, most, or the terminations, er, est, hence the following examples break this rule:
Adjectives that have a comparative or superlative meaning don't allow the addition of the words more, most, or the endings er, est, so the following examples break this rule:
"Money is the most universal incitement of human misery."—Gibbon's Decline and Fall.
"Money is the most universal cause of human suffering."—Gibbon's Decline and Fall.
"The chiefest of which was known by the name of Archon among the Grecians."—Dryden's Life of Plutarch.
"The chief of which was known by the name of Archon among the Greeks."—Dryden's Life of Plutarch.
"The chiefest and largest are removed to certain magazines they call libraries."—Swift's Battle of the Books.
"The biggest and most important ones are taken to certain storage places they call libraries."—Swift's Battle of the Books.
The two chiefest properties of air, its gravity and elastic force, have been discovered by mechanical experiments.—Arbuthno
The two main properties of air, its weight and elastic force, have been discovered through mechanical experiments.—Arbuthno
"From these various causes, which in greater or lesser degree, affected every individual in the colony, the indignation of the people became general."—Robertson's History of America.
"Because of these different reasons, which impacted everyone in the colony to varying degrees, the people's anger became widespread."—Robertson's History of America.
"The extremest parts of the earth were meditating a submission."—Atterbury's Sermons.
"The most remote parts of the earth were considering a submission."—Atterbury's Sermons.
"The last are indeed more preferable because they are founded on some new knowledge or improvement in the mind of man."—Addison, Spectator.
"The last are definitely more preferable because they are based on new knowledge or improvements in people's minds."—Addison, Spectator.
"This was in reality the easiest manner of the two."—Shaftesbury's Advice to an Author.
"This was actually the easiest way of the two."—Shaftesbury's Advice to an Author.
"In every well formed mind this second desire seems to be the strongest of the two."—Smith's Theory of Moral Sentiments.
"In every well-formed mind, this second desire appears to be the strongest of the two."—Smith's Theory of Moral Sentiments.
In these examples the superlative is wrongly used for the comparative. When only two objects are compared the comparative form must be used.
In these examples, the superlative is incorrectly used instead of the comparative. When comparing just two objects, the comparative form should be used.
Of impossibility there are no degrees of comparison, yet we find the following:
Of impossibility, there are no degrees of comparison, yet we find the following:
"As it was impossible they should know the words, thoughts and secret actions of all men, so it was more impossible they should pass judgment on them according to these things."—Whitby's Necessity of the Christian Religion.
"As it was impossible for them to know the words, thoughts, and secret actions of everyone, it was even more impossible for them to judge others based on those things." —Whitby's Necessity of the Christian Religion.
A great number of authors employ adjectives for adverbs. Thus we find:
A lot of writers use adjectives as adverbs. So we see:
"I shall endeavor to live hereafter suitable to a man in my station."—Addison.
"I will try to live from now on suitable to a man in my position."—Addison.
"I can never think so very mean of him."—Bentley's Dissertation on Phalaris.
"I can never think so poorly of him."—Bentley's Dissertation on Phalaris.
"His expectations run high and the fund to supply them is extreme scanty,—Lancaster's Essay on Delicacy.
"His expectations are high, but the resources to meet them are extremely limited. —Lancaster's Essay on Delicacy."
The commonest error in the use of the verb is the disregard of the concord between the verb and its subject. This occurs most frequently when the subject and the verb are widely separated, especially if some other noun of a different number immediately precedes the verb. False concords occur very often after either, or, neither, nor, and much, more, many, everyone, each.
The most common mistake with verbs is ignoring the agreement between the verb and its subject. This usually happens when the subject and verb are far apart, especially if another noun with a different number comes right before the verb. Mistakes in agreement often occur after either, or, neither, nor, and much, more, many, everyone, each.
Here are a few authors' slips:—
Here are a few authors' notes:—
"The terms in which the sale of a patent were communicated to the public."—Junius's Letters.
"The terms in which the sale of a patent were communicated to the public."—Junius's Letters.
"The richness of her arms and apparel were conspicuous."—Gibbon's Decline and Fall.
"The richness of her arms and clothing was obvious."—Gibbon's Decline and Fall.
"Everyone of this grotesque family were the creatures of national genius."—D'Israeli.
"Everyone in this bizarre family was the product of national talent."—D'Israeli.
"He knows not what spleen, languor or listlessness are."—Blair's Sermons.
"He doesn't know what bad humor, fatigue, or boredom are."—Blair's Sermons.
"Each of these words imply, some pursuit or object relinquished."—Ibid.
"Each of these words imply, some pursuit or object relinquished."—Ibid.
"Magnus, with four thousand of his supposed accomplices were put to death."—Gibbon.
"Magnus, along with four thousand of his supposed accomplices, was put to death."—Gibbon.
"No nation gives greater encouragements to learning than we do; yet at the same time none are so injudicious in the application."—Goldsmith.
"No nation supports learning more than we do; yet at the same time, none are as careless in how we apply it." —Goldsmith.
"There's two or three of us have seen strange sights."—Shakespeare.
"There are two or three of us who have seen strange sights."—Shakespeare.
The past participle should not be used for the past tense, yet the learned Byron overlooked this fact. He thus writes in the Lament of Tasso:—
The past participle shouldn't be used for the past tense, but the educated Byron missed this point. He writes in the Lament of Tasso:—
"And with my years my soul begun to pant With feelings of strange tumult and soft pain."
"And as I got older, my soul started to yearn with feelings of strange turmoil and gentle pain."
Here is another example from Savage's Wanderer in which there is double sinning:
Here is another example from Savage's Wanderer where there is double sinning:
"From liberty each nobler science sprung, A Bacon brighten'd and a Spenser sung."
"From freedom, each greater science arose, A Bacon enlightened and a Spenser sang."
Other breaches in regard to the participles occur in the following:—
Other mistakes related to the participles happen in the following:—
"Every book ought to be read with the same spirit and in the same manner as it is writ"—Fielding's Tom Jones.
"Every book should be read with the same intent and in the same way as it is written"—Fielding's Tom Jones.
"The Court of Augustus had not wore off the manners of the republic "—Hume's Essays.
"The Court of Augustus had not lost the manners of the republic"—Hume's Essays.
"Moses tells us that the fountains of the earth were broke open or clove asunder."—Burnet.
"Moses tells us that the fountains of the earth were broke open or split apart."—Burnet.
"A free constitution when it has been shook by the iniquity of former administrations."—Bolingbroke.
"A free constitution when it has been shaken by the wrongdoing of past administrations."—Bolingbroke.
"In this respect the seeds of future divisions were sowed abundantly."—Ibid.
"In this regard, the seeds of future divisions were sown abundantly."—Ibid.
In the following example the present participle is used for the infinitive mood:
In the following example, the present participle is used for the infinitive mood:
"It is easy distinguishing the rude fragment of a rock from the splinter of a statue."—Gilfillan's Literary Portraits.
"It is easy to distinguish the rough piece of rock from the fragment of a statue."—Gilfillan's Literary Portraits.
Distinguishing here should be replaced by to distinguish.
To distinguish here should be replaced by to distinguish.
The rules regarding shall and will are violated in the following:
The rules about shall and will are broken in the following:
"If we look within the rough and awkward outside, we will be richly rewarded by its perusal."—Gilfillan's Literary Portraits.
"If we look beyond the rough and clumsy exterior, we will be richly rewarded by what we discover."—Gilfillan's Literary Portraits.
"If I should declare them and speak of them, they should be more than I am able to express."—Prayer Book Revision of Psalms XI.
"If I were to declare them and talk about them, there would be more than I could express."—Prayer Book Revision of Psalms XI.
"If I would declare them and speak of them, they are more than can be numbered."—Ibid.
"If I were to declare them and talk about them, there are more than I can count."—Ibid.
"Without having attended to this, we will be at a loss, in understanding several passages in the classics."—Blair's Lectures.
"Without addressing this, we will struggle to understand several sections in the classics."—Blair's Lectures.
"We know to what cause our past reverses have been owing and we will have ourselves to blame, if they are again incurred."—Alison's History of Europe.
"We know why our past failures happened, and we will only have ourselves to blame if they happen again."—Alison's History of Europe.
Adverbial mistakes often occur in the best writers. The adverb rather is a word very frequently misplaced. Archbishop Trench in his "English Past and Present" writes, "It rather modified the structure of our sentences than the elements of our vocabulary." This should have been written,—"It modified the structure of our sentences rather than the elements of our vocabulary."
Adverb mistakes can happen even to the best writers. The adverb rather is often put in the wrong place. Archbishop Trench in his "English Past and Present" writes, "It rather modified the structure of our sentences than the elements of our vocabulary." This should have been written as, "It modified the structure of our sentences rather than the elements of our vocabulary."
"So far as his mode of teaching goes he is rather a disciple of Socrates than of St. Paul or Wesley." Thus writes Leslie Stephens of Dr. Johnson. He should have written,—" So far as his mode of teaching goes he is a disciple of Socrates rather than of St. Paul or Wesley."
"So far as his teaching style goes, he is more of a disciple of Socrates than of St. Paul or Wesley." That's what Leslie Stephens said about Dr. Johnson. He should have written, "So far as his teaching style goes, he is a disciple of Socrates more than of St. Paul or Wesley."
The preposition is a part of speech which is often wrongly used by some of the best writers. Certain nouns, adjectives and verbs require particular prepositions after them, for instance, the word different always takes the preposition from after it; prevail takes upon; averse takes to; accord takes with, and so on.
The preposition is a part of speech that is often used incorrectly by even some of the best writers. Certain nouns, adjectives, and verbs need specific prepositions that follow them. For example, the word different always takes the preposition from after it; prevail takes upon; averse takes to; accord takes with, and so on.
In the following examples the prepositions in parentheses are the ones that should have been used:
In the following examples, the prepositions in parentheses are the ones that should have been used:
"He found the greatest difficulty of (in) writing."—Hume's History of England.
"He found the greatest difficulty in writing."—Hume's History of England.
"If policy can prevail upon (over) force."—Addison.
"If policy can prevail over force."—Addison.
"He made the discovery and communicated to (with) his friends."—Swift's Tale of a Tub.
"He made the discovery and shared it with his friends."—Swift's Tale of a Tub.
"Every office of command should be intrusted to persons on (in) whom the parliament shall confide."—Macaulay.
"Every office of command should be entrusted to people in whom the parliament has confidence." —Macaulay.
Several of the most celebrated writers infringe the canons of style by placing prepositions at the end of sentences. For instance Carlyle, in referring to the Study of Burns, writes:—"Our own contributions to it, we are aware, can be but scanty and feeble; but we offer them with good will, and trust they may meet with acceptance from those they are intended for."
Several of the most celebrated writers break the rules of style by ending sentences with prepositions. For example, Carlyle, when talking about the Study of Burns, writes:—"Our own contributions to it, we know, can only be limited and weak; but we present them with good intentions and hope they may be accepted by those they are meant for."
—"for whom they are intended," he should have written.
—"for whom they're intended," he should have written.
"Most writers have some one vein which they peculiarly and obviously excel in."—William Minto.
"Most writers have a specific area where they particularly and obviously excel." — William Minto.
This sentence should read,—Most writers have some one vein in which they peculiarly and obviously excel.
This sentence should read,—Most writers have one specific area where they stand out and excel.
Many authors use redundant words which repeat the same thought and idea. This is called tautology.
Many writers use unnecessary words that repeat the same thought and idea. This is called tautology.
"Notwithstanding which (however) poor Polly embraced them all around."—Dickens.
"Even so, poor Polly hugged them all tightly."—Dickens.
"I judged that they would (mutually) find each other."—Crockett.
"I thought they would (both) find each other."—Crockett.
"....as having created a (joint) partnership between the two Powers in the Morocco question."—The Times.
"....as having established a partnership between the two Powers regarding the Morocco issue."—The Times.
"The only sensible position (there seems to be) is to frankly acknowledge our ignorance of what lies beyond."—Daily Telegraph.
"The only reasonable stance seems to be to openly admit that we don’t know what’s out there."—Daily Telegraph.
"Lord Rosebery has not budged from his position—splendid, no doubt,—of (lonely) isolation."—The Times.
"Lord Rosebery has not changed his stance—remarkable, of course,—of (solitary) isolation."—The Times.
"Miss Fox was (often) in the habit of assuring Mrs. Chick."—Dickens.
"Miss Fox often made a point of reassuring Mrs. Chick."—Dickens.
"The deck (it) was their field of fame."—Campbell.
"The deck was their place of recognition."—Campbell.
"He had come up one morning, as was now (frequently) his wont,"—Trollope.
"He had come up one morning, as was now (often) his habit,"—Trollope.
The counsellors of the Sultan (continue to) remain sceptical—The Times.
The Sultan's advisors still remain skeptical—The Times.
Seriously, (and apart from jesting), this is no light matter.—Bagehot.
Seriously, (and aside from joking), this is no trivial issue.—Bagehot.
To go back to your own country with (the consciousness that you go back with) the sense of duty well done.—Lord Halsbury.
To return to your own country with the awareness that you are going back with a sense of duty fulfilled.—Lord Halsbury.
The Peresviet lost both her fighting-tops and (in appearance) looked the most damaged of all the ships—The Times.
The Peresviet lost both her fighting tops and looked the most damaged of all the ships in terms of appearance—The Times.
Counsel admitted that, that was a fair suggestion to make, but he submitted that it was borne out by the (surrounding) circumstances.—Ibid.
Counsel agreed that it was a reasonable suggestion, but he argued that it was supported by the surrounding circumstances.—Ibid.
Another unnecessary use of words and phrases is that which is termed circumlocution, a going around the bush when there is no occasion for it,—save to fill space.
Another unnecessary use of words and phrases is what’s called circumlocution, beating around the bush when there’s no need for it—just to fill space.
It may be likened to a person walking the distance of two sides of a triangle to reach the objective point. For instance in the quotation: "Pope professed to have learned his poetry from Dryden, whom, whenever an opportunity was presented, he praised through the whole period of his existence with unvaried liberality; and perhaps his character may receive some illustration, of a comparison he instituted between him and the man whose pupil he was" much of the verbiage may be eliminated and the sentence thus condensed:
It can be compared to someone walking the two shorter sides of a triangle to get to a goal. For example, in the quote: "Pope claimed he learned his poetry from Dryden, whom he consistently praised throughout his life whenever he had the chance; and perhaps we can better understand his character through the comparison he made between Dryden and the man he studied under," a lot of the extra words can be removed, making the sentence shorter:
"Pope professed himself the pupil of Dryden, whom he lost no opportunity of praising; and his character may be illustrated by a comparison with his master."
"Pope considered himself a student of Dryden, whom he always praised at every chance; and his character can be highlighted by comparing him to his mentor."
"His life was brought to a close in 1910 at an age not far from the one fixed by the sacred writer as the term of human existence."
"His life came to an end in 1910 at an age not far from what the sacred writer considered the limit of human life."
This in brevity can be put, "His life was brought to a close at the age of seventy;" or, better yet, "He died at the age of seventy."
This can be summed up simply as, "He died at seventy."
"The day was intensely cold, so cold in fact that the thermometer crept down to the zero mark," can be expressed: "The day was so cold the thermometer registered zero."
"The day was so cold the thermometer registered zero."
Many authors resort to circumlocution for the purpose of "padding," that is, filling space, or when they strike a snag in writing upon subjects of which they know little or nothing. The young writer should steer clear of it and learn to express his thoughts and ideas as briefly as possible commensurate with lucidity of expression.
Many authors use indirect language to "pad" their writing, meaning they fill space or try to get through tough spots when they don’t know much about a topic. Young writers should avoid this and learn to express their thoughts and ideas as clearly and concisely as possible.
Volumes of errors in fact, in grammar, diction and general style, could be selected from the works of the great writers, a fact which eloquently testifies that no one is infallible and that the very best is liable to err at times. However, most of the erring in the case of these writers arises from carelessness or hurry, not from a lack of knowledge.
Volumes of mistakes in fact, grammar, wording, and overall style can be found in the works of great writers, which clearly shows that no one is perfect and even the best can make errors sometimes. However, most of the mistakes made by these writers come from carelessness or rushing, not from a lack of knowledge.
As a general rule it is in writing that the scholar is liable to slip; in oral speech he seldom makes a blunder. In fact, there are many people who are perfect masters of speech,—who never make a blunder in conversation, yet who are ignorant of the very principles of grammar and would not know how to write a sentence correctly on paper. Such persons have been accustomed from infancy to hear the language spoken correctly and so the use of the proper words and forms becomes a second nature to them. A child can learn what is right as easy as what is wrong and whatever impressions are made on the mind when it is plastic will remain there. Even a parrot can be taught the proper use of language. Repeat to a parrot.—"Two and two make four" and it never will say "two and two makes four."
As a general rule, scholars are more likely to make mistakes in writing; they rarely mess up when speaking. In fact, there are many people who are excellent speakers—who never make mistakes in conversation—but who are clueless about basic grammar and wouldn’t know how to write a correct sentence. These individuals have been exposed to properly spoken language from a young age, so using the right words and forms becomes second nature to them. A child can learn what's correct just as easily as what's incorrect, and whatever impressions are made when the mind is receptive will stick. Even a parrot can be trained to use language correctly. If you teach a parrot, "Two and two make four," it will never say, "two and two makes four."
In writing, however, it is different. Without a knowledge of the fundamentals of grammar we may be able to speak correctly from association with good speakers, but without such a knowledge we cannot hope to write the language correctly. To write even a common letter we must know the principles of construction, the relationship of one word to another. Therefore, it is necessary for everybody to understand at least the essentials of the grammar of his own language.
In writing, though, it's different. While we might be able to speak correctly by listening to good speakers, we can't expect to write the language correctly without knowing the basics of grammar. To write even a simple letter, we need to understand the principles of construction and how words relate to each other. So, it's important for everyone to grasp at least the essentials of the grammar of their own language.
CHAPTER VIII
PITFALLS TO AVOID
Common Stumbling Blocks—Peculiar Constructions—Misused Forms.
ATTRACTION
Very often the verb is separated from its real nominative or subject by several intervening words and in such cases one is liable to make the verb agree with the subject nearest to it. Here are a few examples showing that the leading writers now and then take a tumble into this pitfall:
Very often, the verb is separated from its actual subject by several words in between, and in these cases, it's easy to make the verb agree with the nearest subject. Here are a few examples showing that prominent writers sometimes fall into this trap:
-
"The partition which the two ministers made of the powers of government were singularly happy."—Macaulay.
"The division of government powers made by the two ministers was remarkably effective."—Macaulay.
(Should be was to agree with its subject, partition.)
(Should be was to agree with its subject, partition.)
-
"One at least of the qualities which fit it for training ordinary men unfit it for training an extraordinary man."—Bagehot.
"One of the qualities that make it suitable for training regular people makes it unsuitable for training an extraordinary person."—Bagehot.
(Should be unfits to agree with subject one.)
(Should be unfits to agree with subject one.)
-
"The Tibetans have engaged to exclude from their country those dangerous influences whose appearance were the chief cause of our action."—The Times.
"The Tibetans have committed to keeping out those dangerous influences that were the main reason for our actions."—The Times.
(Should be was to agree with appearance.)
(Should be was to agree with looks.)
-
"An immense amount of confusion and indifference prevail in these days."—Telegraph.
"There's a huge amount of confusion and indifference going on these days."—Telegraph.
(Should be prevails to agree with amount.)
(Should be prevails to agree with the amount.)
ELLIPSIS
Errors in ellipsis occur chiefly with prepositions.
Errors in ellipsis mostly happen with prepositions.
His objection and condoning of the boy's course, seemed to say the least, paradoxical.
His objection and approval of the boy's actions felt, to say the least, contradictory.
(The preposition to should come after objection.)
(The preposition to should come after objection.)
Many men of brilliant parts are crushed by force of circumstances and their genius forever lost to the world.
Many talented men are held back by their circumstances, and their genius is never realized by the world.
(Some maintain that the missing verb after genius is are, but such is ungrammatical. In such cases the right verb should be always expressed: as—their genius is forever lost to the world.
(Some maintain that the missing verb after genius is are, but that is ungrammatical. In such cases, the correct verb should always be stated: as—their genius is forever lost to the world.
THE SPLIT INFINITIVE
Even the best speakers and writers are in the habit of placing a modifying word or words between the to and the remaining part of the infinitive. It is possible that such will come to be looked upon in time as the proper form but at present the splitting of the infinitive is decidedly wrong. "He was scarcely able to even talk" "She commenced to rapidly walk around the room." "To have really loved is better than not to have at all loved." In these constructions it is much better not to split the infinitive. In every-day speech the best speakers sin against this observance.
Even the best speakers and writers often put a modifying word or words between the to and the rest of the infinitive. It's possible that this could be accepted as correct in the future, but for now, splitting the infinitive is definitely considered wrong. "He was barely able to even talk." "She started to quickly walk around the room." "To have truly loved is better than not to have loved at all." In these examples, it’s much better not to split the infinitive. In everyday speech, even the best speakers often break this rule.
In New York City there is a certain magistrate, a member of "the 400," who prides himself on his diction in language. He tells this story: A prisoner, a faded, battered specimen of mankind, on whose haggard face, deeply lined with the marks of dissipation, there still lingered faint reminders of better days long past, stood dejected before the judge. "Where are you from?" asked the magistrate. "From Boston," answered the accused. "Indeed," said the judge, "indeed, yours is a sad case, and yet you don't seem to thoroughly realise how low you have sunk." The man stared as if struck. "Your honor does me an injustice," he said bitterly. "The disgrace of arrest for drunkenness, the mortification of being thrust into a noisome dungeon, the publicity and humiliation of trial in a crowded and dingy courtroom I can bear, but to be sentenced by a Police Magistrate who splits his infinitives—that is indeed the last blow."
In New York City, there's a certain magistrate, a member of "the 400," who takes pride in his language skills. He tells this story: A prisoner, a worn-out, beaten-down figure, with a haggard face lined from years of excess, still showed faint signs of better days long gone, stood dejected before the judge. "Where are you from?" the magistrate asked. "From Boston," the accused replied. "Really," said the judge, "yours is a sad case, yet you don't seem to fully understand how low you've sunk." The man stared as if shocked. "Your honor is doing me an injustice," he said bitterly. "I can handle the disgrace of arrest for drunkenness, the humiliation of being thrown into a filthy jail, and the public embarrassment of a trial in a crowded, grim courtroom, but to be sentenced by a Police Magistrate who splits his infinitives—that is truly the final blow."
ONE
The indefinite adjective pronoun one when put in place of a personal substantive is liable to raise confusion. When a sentence or expression is begun with the impersonal one the word must be used throughout in all references to the subject. Thus, "One must mind one's own business if one wishes to succeed" may seem prolix and awkward, nevertheless it is the proper form. You must not say—"One must mind his business if he wishes to succeed," for the subject is impersonal and therefore cannot exclusively take the masculine pronoun. With any one it is different. You may say—"If any one sins he should acknowledge it; let him not try to hide it by another sin."
The indefinite pronoun one can cause confusion when used instead of a personal noun. When a sentence begins with the impersonal one, that word must be used consistently for all references to the subject. So, "One must mind one's own business if one wishes to succeed" may sound clunky and awkward, but it's the correct form. You shouldn't say, "One must mind his business if he wishes to succeed," because the subject is impersonal and can't just use the masculine pronoun. With anyone, it's different. You can say, "If anyone sins, they should acknowledge it; let them not try to hide it with another sin."
ONLY
This is a word that is a pitfall to the most of us whether learned or unlearned. Probably it is the most indiscriminately used word in the language. From the different positions it is made to occupy in a sentence it can relatively change the meaning. For instance in the sentence—"I only struck him that time," the meaning to be inferred is, that the only thing I did to him was to strike him, not kick or otherwise abuse him. But if the only is shifted, so as to make the sentence read-"I struck him only that time" the meaning conveyed is, that only on that occasion and at no other time did I strike him. If another shift is made to-"I struck only him that time," the meaning is again altered so that it signifies he was the only person I struck.
This is a word that trips up most of us, whether we are educated or not. It's probably the most casually used word in the language. Depending on where it is placed in a sentence, it can change the meaning quite a bit. For example, in the sentence—"I only struck him that time," it suggests that the only thing I did to him was strike him, not kick or do anything else. But if we move the only, so that the sentence reads—"I struck him only that time," it means that I only struck him on that one occasion, and not at any other time. If we make another change to—"I struck only him that time," it alters the meaning again to imply that he was the only person I struck.
In speaking we can by emphasis impress our meaning on our hearers, but in writing we have nothing to depend upon but the position of the word in the sentence. The best rule in regard to only is to place it immediately before the word or phrase it modifies or limits.
In speaking, we can emphasize our meaning to our listeners, but in writing, we can only rely on the position of the word in the sentence. The best guideline for only is to put it right before the word or phrase it modifies or limits.
ALONE
is another word which creates ambiguity and alters meaning. If we substitute it for only in the preceding example the meaning of the sentence will depend upon the arrangement. Thus "I alone struck him at that time" signifies that I and no other struck him. When the sentence reads "I struck him alone at that time" it must be interpreted that he was the only person that received a blow. Again if it is made to read "I struck him at that time alone" the sense conveyed is that that was the only occasion on which I struck him. The rule which governs the correct use of only is also applicable to alone.
is another word that creates confusion and changes meaning. If we replace it with only in the previous example, the meaning of the sentence will depend on the arrangement. So "I alone struck him at that time" means that I was the only one who struck him. When the sentence says "I struck him alone at that time," it should be understood that he was the only person who got hit. Again, if it reads "I struck him at that time alone," the meaning is that that was the only time I struck him. The rule that governs the correct use of only also applies to alone.
OTHER AND ANOTHER
These are words which often give to expressions a meaning far from that intended. Thus, "I have nothing to do with that other rascal across the street," certainly means that I am a rascal myself. "I sent the despatch to my friend, but another villain intercepted it," clearly signifies that my friend is a villain.
These words often twist expressions into meanings quite different from what’s intended. So, "I have nothing to do with that other troublemaker across the street" definitely implies that I’m a troublemaker too. "I sent the message to my friend, but another jerk intercepted it" clearly suggests that my friend is a jerk.
A good plan is to omit these words when they can be readily done without, as in the above examples, but when it is necessary to use them make your meaning clear. You can do this by making each sentence or phrase in which they occur independent of contextual aid.
A good plan is to leave out these words when you can easily do so, like in the examples above, but when you need to use them, make sure your meaning is clear. You can achieve this by making each sentence or phrase where they appear stand on its own without needing context.
AND WITH THE RELATIVE
Never use and with the relative in this manner: "That is the dog I meant and which I know is of pure breed." This is an error quite common. The use of and is permissible when there is a parallel relative in the preceding sentence or clause. Thus: "There is the dog which I meant and.which I know is of pure breed" is quite correct.
Never use and with the relative like this: "That is the dog I meant and which I know is purebred." This is a common mistake. You can use and when there is a parallel relative in the previous sentence or clause. So, "There is the dog which I meant and which I know is purebred" is perfectly correct.
LOOSE PARTICIPLES
A participle or participial phrase is naturally referred to the nearest nominative. If only one nominative is expressed it claims all the participles that are not by the construction of the sentence otherwise fixed. "John, working in the field all day and getting thirsty, drank from the running stream." Here the participles working and getting clearly refer to John. But in the sentence,—"Swept along by the mob I could not save him," the participle as it were is lying around loose and may be taken to refer to either the person speaking or to the person spoken about. It may mean that I was swept along by the mob or the individual whom I tried to save was swept along.
A participle or participial phrase usually refers to the nearest noun. If there's only one noun mentioned, it applies to all the participles that aren't otherwise defined by the sentence structure. "John, working in the field all day and getting thirsty, drank from the running stream." In this case, the participles working and getting clearly refer to John. However, in the sentence, "Swept along by the mob I could not save him," the participle seems ambiguous and could refer to either the speaker or the person being talked about. It could mean that I was swept along by the mob or that the person I tried to save was swept along.
"Going into the store the roof fell" can be taken that it was the roof which was going into the store when it fell. Of course the meaning intended is that some person or persons were going into the store just as the roof fell.
"Going into the store, the roof fell" can be interpreted as the roof being the one going into the store when it fell. Obviously, the intended meaning is that some person or people were entering the store just as the roof fell.
In all sentence construction with participles there should be such clearness as to preclude all possibility of ambiguity. The participle should be so placed that there can be no doubt as to the noun to which it refers. Often it is advisable to supply such words as will make the meaning obvious.
In every sentence that uses participles, there should be enough clarity to eliminate any chance of confusion. The participle should be positioned in a way that makes it clear which noun it refers to. Often, it's a good idea to add words that will clarify the meaning.
BROKEN CONSTRUCTION
Sometimes the beginning of a sentence presents quite a different grammatical construction from its end. This arises from the fact probably, that the beginning is lost sight of before the end is reached. This occurs frequently in long sentences. Thus: "Honesty, integrity and square-dealing will bring anybody much better through life than the absence of either." Here the construction is broken at than. The use of either, only used in referring to one of two, shows that the fact is forgotten that three qualities and not two are under consideration. Any one of the three meanings might be intended in the sentence, viz., absence of any one quality, absence of any two of the qualities or absence of the whole three qualities. Either denotes one or the other of two and should never be applied to any one of more than two. When we fall into the error of constructing such sentences as above, we should take them apart and reconstruct them in a different grammatical form. Thus,—"Honesty, integrity and square-dealing will bring a man much better through life than a lack of these qualities which are almost essential to success."
Sometimes the start of a sentence has a very different grammatical structure than its end. This probably happens because we lose track of the beginning before we reach the end. This is common in long sentences. For example: "Honesty, integrity, and fair dealing will help anyone get through life much better than the lack of any of these." Here, the structure breaks at than. The use of either, which refers to one of two, shows that the fact that three qualities are being considered is overlooked. Any of the three meanings could be intended in this sentence, such as the absence of any one quality, the absence of any two qualities, or the absence of all three qualities. Either indicates one or the other of two and should never be used when referring to more than two. When we make the mistake of writing sentences like this, we should break them down and rephrase them differently. For instance, "Honesty, integrity, and fair dealing will help a person get through life much better than lacking these qualities, which are almost essential for success."
DOUBLE NEGATIVE
It must be remembered that two negatives in the English language destroy each other and are equivalent to an affirmative. Thus "I don't know nothing about it" is intended to convey, that I am ignorant of the matter under consideration, but it defeats its own purpose, inasmuch as the use of nothing implies that I know something about it. The sentence should read—"I don't know anything about it."
It should be noted that two negatives in English cancel each other out and are the same as a positive. So, "I don't know nothing about it" is meant to express that I'm not informed about the topic at hand, but it backfires because using nothing suggests that I know something about it. The sentence should be—"I don't know anything about it."
Often we hear such expressions as "He was not asked to give no opinion," expressing the very opposite of what is intended. This sentence implies that he was asked to give his opinion. The double negative, therefore, should be carefully avoided, for it is insidious and is liable to slip in and the writer remain unconscious of its presence until the eye of the critic detects it.
Often, we hear phrases like "He was not asked to give no opinion," which convey the exact opposite of what is meant. This sentence suggests that he was asked to share his opinion. Therefore, double negatives should be avoided, as they can be sneaky and may go unnoticed by the writer until a critic points them out.
FIRST PERSONAL PRONOUN
The use of the first personal pronoun should be avoided as much as possible in composition. Don't introduce it by way of apology and never use such expressions as "In my opinion," "As far as I can see," "It appears to me," "I believe," etc. In what you write, the whole composition is expressive of your views, since you are the author, therefore, there is no necessity for you to accentuate or emphasize yourself at certain portions of it.
Avoid using the first-person pronoun as much as you can in writing. Don't introduce it as an excuse, and never say things like "In my opinion," "As far as I can see," "It seems to me," "I believe," etc. Everything you write reflects your views because you are the author, so there’s no need to highlight yourself at certain points.
Moreover, the big I's savor of egotism! Steer clear of them as far as you can. The only place where the first person is permissible is in passages where you are stating a view that is not generally held and which is likely to meet with opposition.
Moreover, the big I's reek of self-importance! Avoid them as much as possible. The only time the first person is acceptable is when you’re expressing a viewpoint that isn’t commonly accepted and is likely to face disagreement.
SEQUENCE OF TENSES
When two verbs depend on each other their tenses must have a definite relation to each other. "I shall have much pleasure in accepting your kind invitation" is wrong, unless you really mean that just now you decline though by-and-by you intend to accept; or unless you mean that you do accept now, though you have no pleasure in doing so, but look forward to be more pleased by-and-by. In fact the sequence of the compound tenses puzzle experienced writers. The best plan is to go back in thought to the time in question and use the tense you would then naturally use. Now in the sentence "I should have liked to have gone to see the circus" the way to find out the proper sequence is to ask yourself the question—what is it I "should have liked" to do? and the plain answer is "to go to see the circus." I cannot answer—"To have gone to see the circus" for that would imply that at a certain moment I would have liked to be in the position of having gone to the circus. But I do not mean this; I mean that at the moment at which I am speaking I wish I had gone to see the circus. The verbal phrase I should have liked carries me back to the time when there was a chance of seeing the circus and once back at the time, the going to the circus is a thing of the present. This whole explanation resolves itself into the simple question,—what should I have liked at that time, and the answer is "to go to see the circus," therefore this is the proper sequence, and the expression should be "I should have liked to go to see the circus."
When two verbs rely on each other, their tenses need to be related. "I shall have much pleasure in accepting your kind invitation" is incorrect unless you genuinely mean that you’re declining now but plan to accept later; or if you’re saying you do accept now but don’t enjoy it, yet you anticipate being more pleased later. In fact, the sequence of compound tenses can confuse experienced writers. The best approach is to mentally return to the relevant time and use the tense you would naturally use then. In the sentence "I should have liked to have gone to see the circus," to find the right sequence, you should ask yourself what you "should have liked" to do? The straightforward answer is "to go to see the circus." I can't say "To have gone to see the circus" since that would imply at some point I wanted to be in the position of having gone to the circus. But that’s not what I mean; I mean that at the moment I’m speaking, I wish I had gone to see the circus. The phrase I should have liked takes me back to when I had a chance to see the circus, and once I'm back at that time, going to the circus is a current idea. This entire explanation boils down to the simple question: what would I have liked at that time? The answer is "to go to see the circus," so that’s the correct sequence, and the expression should be "I should have liked to go to see the circus."
If we wish to speak of something relating to a time prior to that indicated in the past tense we must use the perfect tense of the infinitive; as, "He appeared to have seen better days." We should say "I expected to meet him," not "I expected to have met him." "We intended to visit you," not "to have visited you." "I hoped they would arrive," not "I hoped they would have arrived." "I thought I should catch the bird," not "I thought I should have caught the bird." "I had intended to go to the meeting," not "I had intended to have gone to the meeting."
If we want to talk about something that happened before the time mentioned in the past tense, we need to use the perfect tense of the infinitive; for example, "He seemed to have seen better days." We should say "I expected to meet him," not "I expected to have met him." "We planned to visit you," not "to have visited you." "I hoped they would arrive," not "I hoped they would have arrived." "I thought I would catch the bird," not "I thought I would have caught the bird." "I had planned to go to the meeting," not "I had planned to have gone to the meeting."
BETWEEN—AMONG
These prepositions are often carelessly interchanged. Between has reference to two objects only, among to more than two. "The money was equally divided between them" is right when there are only two, but if there are more than two it should be "the money was equally divided among them."
These prepositions are often mixed up carelessly. Between refers to only two objects, while among refers to more than two. "The money was equally divided between them" is correct when there are only two, but if there are more than two, it should be "the money was equally divided among them."
LESS—FEWER
Less refers is quantity, fewer to number. "No man has less virtues" should be "No man has fewer virtues." "The farmer had some oats and a fewer quantity of wheat" should be "the farmer had some oats and a less quantity of wheat."
Less refers to quantity, while fewer refers to number. "No man has less virtues" should be "No man has fewer virtues." "The farmer had some oats and a fewer quantity of wheat" should be "the farmer had some oats and a less quantity of wheat."
FURTHER—FARTHER
Further is commonly used to denote quantity, farther to denote distance. "I have walked farther than you," "I need no further supply" are correct.
Further is often used to refer to quantity, farther to refer to distance. "I have walked farther than you," "I need no further supply" are correct.
EACH OTHER—ONE ANOTHER
Each other refers to two, one another to more than two. "Jones and Smith quarreled; they struck each other" is correct. "Jones, Smith and Brown quarreled; they struck one another" is also correct. Don't say, "The two boys teach one another" nor "The three girls love each other."
Each other refers to two people, while one another refers to more than two. "Jones and Smith argued; they hit each other" is correct. "Jones, Smith, and Brown argued; they hit one another" is also correct. Don't say, "The two boys teach one another" or "The three girls love each other."
EACH, EVERY, EITHER, NEITHER
These words are continually misapplied. Each can be applied to two or any higher number of objects to signify every one of the number independently. Every requires more than two to be spoken of and denotes all the persons or things taken separately. Either denotes one or the other of two, and should not be used to include both. Neither is the negative of either, denoting not the other, and not the one, and relating to two persons or things considered separately.
These terms are often used incorrectly. Each can refer to two or any larger number of items to mean every one of them independently. Every needs more than two to be relevant and refers to all the people or things looked at individually. Either means one or the other of two, and shouldn't be used to include both. Neither is the negative form of either, indicating not one and not the other, and pertains to two people or things considered separately.
The following examples illustrate the correct usage of these words:
The following examples show how to use these words correctly:
Each man of the crew received a reward.
Each member of the crew got a reward.
Every man in the regiment displayed bravery.
Every man in the regiment showed courage.
We can walk on either side of the street.
We can walk on either side of the street.
Neither of the two is to blame.
Neither is to blame.
NEITHER-NOR
When two singular subjects are connected by neither, nor use a singular verb; as, Neither John nor James was there," not were there.
When two singular subjects are connected by neither and nor, use a singular verb; for example, Neither John nor James was there, not were there.
NONE
Custom Has sanctioned the use of this word both with a singular and plural; as—"None is so blind as he who will not see" and "None are so blind as they who will not see." However, as it is a contraction of no one it is better to use the singular verb.
Custom has allowed the use of this word in both singular and plural forms; as—"None is so blind as he who will not see" and "None are so blind as they who will not see." However, since it’s a contraction of no one, it’s better to use the singular verb.
RISE-RAISE
These verbs are very often confounded. Rise is to move or pass upward in any manner; as to "rise from bed;" to increase in value, to improve in position or rank, as "stocks rise;" "politicians rise;" "they have risen to honor."
These verbs are often confused. Rise means to move or go upward in any way; for example, to "rise from bed;" to increase in value, or to improve in position or rank, such as "stocks rise;" "politicians rise;" "they have risen to honor."
Raise is to lift up, to exalt, to enhance, as "I raise the table;" "He raised his servant;" "The baker raised the price of bread."
Raise means to lift up, to elevate, to improve, as in "I raise the table;" "He raised his servant;" "The baker raised the price of bread."
LAY-LIE
The transitive verb lay, and lay, the past tense of the neuter verb lie, are often confounded, though quite different in meaning. The neuter verb to lie, meaning to lie down or rest, cannot take the objective after it except with a preposition. We can say "He lies on the ground," but we cannot say "He lies the ground," since the verb is neuter and intransitive and, as such, cannot have a direct object. With lay it is different. Lay is a transitive verb, therefore it takes a direct object after it; as "I lay a wager," "I laid the carpet," etc.
The transitive verb lay and laid, the past tense of the neuter verb lie, are often confused, even though they have different meanings. The neuter verb to lie, which means to recline or rest, cannot take a direct object unless a preposition is used. We can say "He lies on the ground," but we cannot say "He lies the ground," since the verb is neuter and intransitive, which means it can't have a direct object. With lay, it's different. Lay is a transitive verb, so it takes a direct object after it, as in "I lay a wager," "I laid the carpet," etc.
Of a carpet or any inanimate subject we should say, "It lies on the floor," "A knife lies on the table," not lays. But of a person we say—"He lays the knife on the table," not "He lies——." Lay being the past tense of the neuter to lie (down) we should say, "He lay on the bed," and lain being its past participle we must also say "He has lain on the bed."
For a carpet or any inanimate object, we should say, "It lies on the floor," "A knife lies on the table," not lays. But for a person, we say, "He lays the knife on the table," not "He lies—." Lay is the past tense of the intransitive verb lie (down), so we should say, "He lay on the bed," and lain is its past participle, so we must also say, "He has lain on the bed."
We can say "I lay myself down." "He laid himself down" and such expressions.
We can say "I lie down." "He lay down" and similar phrases.
It is imperative to remember in using these verbs that to lay means to do something, and to lie means to be in a state of rest.
It’s important to remember when using these verbs that to lay means to do something, and to lie means to be in a state of rest.
SAYS I—I SAID
"Says I" is a vulgarism; don't use it. "I said" is correct form.
"Says I" is informal language; don't use it. "I said" is the correct form.
IN—INTO
Be careful to distinguish the meaning of these two little prepositions and don't interchange them. Don't say "He went in the room" nor "My brother is into the navy." In denotes the place where a person or thing, whether at rest or in motion, is present; and into denotes entrance. "He went into the room;" "My brother is in the navy" are correct.
Be careful to distinguish the meaning of these two little prepositions and don't mix them up. Don't say "He went in the room" nor "My brother is into the navy." In refers to the location where a person or thing is, whether stationary or moving; and into refers to entrance. "He went into the room;" "My brother is in the navy" are correct.
EAT—ATE
Don't confound the two. Eat is present, ate is past. "I eat the bread" means that I am continuing the eating; "I ate the bread" means that the act of eating is past. Eaten is the perfect participle, but often eat is used instead, and as it has the same pronunciation (et) of ate, care should be taken to distinguish the past tense, I ate from the perfect I have eaten (eat).
Don't confuse the two. Eat is present, ate is past. "I eat the bread" means that I'm still eating; "I ate the bread" means that the eating is done. Eaten is the perfect participle, but often eat is used instead, and since it sounds the same (et) as ate, be careful to distinguish the past tense, I ate, from the perfect I have eaten (eat).
SEQUENCE OF PERSON
Remember that the first person takes precedence of the second and the second takes precedence of the third. When Cardinal Wolsey said Ego et Rex (I and the King), he showed he was a good grammarian, but a bad courtier.
Remember that the first person comes before the second, and the second comes before the third. When Cardinal Wolsey said Ego et Rex (I and the King), he demonstrated that he was a good grammarian but a poor courtier.
AM COME—HAVE COME
"I am come" points to my being here, while "I have come" intimates that I have just arrived. When the subject is not a person, the verb to be should be used in preference to the verb to have; as, "The box is come" instead of "The box has come."
"I am here" indicates that I’m currently present, while "I have just arrived" suggests that I recently got here. When the subject is not a person, the verb to be should be used instead of the verb to have; for example, "The box is here" instead of "The box has arrived."
PAST TENSE—PAST PARTICIPLE
The interchange of these two parts of the irregular or so-called strong verbs is, perhaps, the breach oftenest committed by careless speakers and writers. To avoid mistakes it is requisite to know the principal parts of these verbs, and this knowledge is very easy of acquirement, as there are not more than a couple of hundred of such verbs, and of this number but a small part is in daily use. Here are some of the most common blunders: "I seen" for "I saw;" "I done it" for "I did it;" "I drunk" for "I drank;" "I begun" for "I began;" "I rung" for "I rang;" "I run" for "I ran;" "I sung" for "I sang;" "I have chose" for "I have chosen;" "I have drove" for "I have driven;" "I have wore" for "I have worn;" "I have trod" for "I have trodden;" "I have shook" for "I have shaken;" "I have fell" for "I have fallen;" "I have drank" for "I have drunk;" "I have began" for "I have begun;" "I have rang" for "I have rung;" "I have rose" for "I have risen;" "I have spoke" for "I have spoken;" "I have broke" for "I have broken." "It has froze" for "It has frozen." "It has blowed" for "It has blown." "It has flowed" (of a bird) for "It has flown."
The exchange of these two parts of irregular or so-called strong verbs is probably the mistake made most often by careless speakers and writers. To avoid errors, it’s essential to know the main forms of these verbs, and this knowledge is pretty easy to gain, as there are only a couple of hundred of these verbs, and a small fraction of them are used daily. Here are some of the most common mistakes: "I seen" for "I saw;" "I done it" for "I did it;" "I drunk" for "I drank;" "I begun" for "I began;" "I rung" for "I rang;" "I run" for "I ran;" "I sung" for "I sang;" "I have chose" for "I have chosen;" "I have drove" for "I have driven;" "I have wore" for "I have worn;" "I have trod" for "I have trodden;" "I have shook" for "I have shaken;" "I have fell" for "I have fallen;" "I have drank" for "I have drunk;" "I have began" for "I have begun;" "I have rang" for "I have rung;" "I have rose" for "I have risen;" "I have spoke" for "I have spoken;" "I have broke" for "I have broken." "It has froze" for "It has frozen." "It has blowed" for "It has blown." "It has flowed" (of a bird) for "It has flown."
N. B.—The past tense and past participle of To Hang is hanged or hung. When you are talking about a man meeting death on the gallows, say "He was hanged"; when you are talking about the carcass of an animal say, "It was hung," as "The beef was hung dry." Also say your coat "was hung on a hook."
N. B.—The past tense and past participle of To Hang is hanged or hung. When you refer to a man meeting death on the gallows, say, "He was hanged"; when you're talking about the body of an animal, say, "It was hung," as in "The beef was hung dry." You can also say your coat "was hung on a hook."
PREPOSITIONS AND THE OBJECTIVE CASE
Don't forget that prepositions always take the objective case. Don't say "Between you and I"; say "Between you and me"
Don't forget that prepositions always take the objective case. Don't say "Between you and I"; say "Between you and me"
Two prepositions should not govern one objective unless there is an immediate connection between them. "He was refused admission to and forcibly ejected from the school" should be "He was refused admission to the school and forcibly ejected from it."
Two prepositions shouldn’t govern one objective unless there’s a direct connection between them. "He was refused admission to and forcibly ejected from the school" should be "He was refused admission to the school and forcibly ejected from it."
SUMMON—SUMMONS
Don't say "I shall summons him," but "I shall summon him." Summon is a verb, summons, a noun.
Don't say "I shall summons him," but "I shall summon him." Summon is a verb, summons, a noun.
It is correct to say "I shall get a summons for him," not a summon.
It is correct to say "I will get a summons for him," not a summon.
UNDENIABLE—UNEXCEPTIONABLE
"My brother has an undeniable character" is wrong if I wish to convey the idea that he has a good character. The expression should be in that case "My brother has an unexceptionable character." An undeniable character is a character that cannot be denied, whether bad or good. An unexceptionable character is one to which no one can take exception.
"My brother has an undeniable character" is incorrect if I want to say that he has a good character. It should be "My brother has an unexceptionable character." An undeniable character means a character that can't be denied, whether it's bad or good. An unexceptionable character is one that no one can criticize.
THE PRONOUNS
Very many mistakes occur in the use of the pronouns. "Let you and I go" should be "Let you and me go." "Let them and we go" should be "Let them and us go." The verb let is transitive and therefore takes the objective case.
Very many mistakes happen in the use of pronouns. "Let you and I go" should be "Let you and me go." "Let them and we go" should be "Let them and us go." The verb let is transitive and therefore takes the objective case.
"Give me them flowers" should be "Give me those flowers"; "I mean them three" should be "I mean those three." Them is the objective case of the personal pronoun and cannot be used adjectively like the demonstrative adjective pronoun. "I am as strong as him" should be "I am as strong as he"; "I am younger than her" should be "I am younger than she;" "He can write better than me" should be "He can write better than I," for in these examples the objective cases him, her and me are used wrongfully for the nominatives. After each of the misapplied pronouns a verb is understood of which each pronoun is the subject. Thus, "I am as strong as he (is)." "I am younger than she (is)." "He can write better than I (can)."
"Give me those flowers" should be "Give me those flowers"; "I mean those three" should be "I mean those three." "Them" is the objective case of the personal pronoun and can't be used as an adjective like the demonstrative adjective pronoun. "I am as strong as he" should be "I am as strong as he"; "I am younger than she" should be "I am younger than she;" "He can write better than I" should be "He can write better than I," because in these examples, the objective cases him, her, and me are used incorrectly for the nominatives. After each of the misapplied pronouns, a verb is understood of which each pronoun is the subject. Thus, "I am as strong as he (is)." "I am younger than she (is)." "He can write better than I (can)."
Don't say "It is me;" say "It is I" The verb To Be of which is is a part takes the same case after it that it has before it. This holds good in all situations as well as with pronouns.
Don't say "It is me;" say "It is I." The verb To Be, of which "is" is a part, takes the same case after it that it has before it. This rule applies in all situations as well as with pronouns.
The verb To Be also requires the pronouns joined to it to be in the same case as a pronoun asking a question; The nominative I requires the nominative who and the objectives me, him, her, its, you, them, require the objective whom.
The verb To Be also needs the pronouns connected to it to be in the same case as the pronouns used in questions; the nominative I pairs with the nominative who, and the objective pronouns me, him, her, it, you, them pair with the objective whom.
"Whom do you think I am?" should be "Who do you think I am?" and "Who do they suppose me to be?" should be "Whom do they suppose me to be?" The objective form of the Relative should be always used, in connection with a preposition. "Who do you take me for?" should be "Whom do, etc." "Who did you give the apple to?" should be "Whom did you give the apple to," but as pointed out elsewhere the preposition should never end a sentence, therefore, it is better to say, "To whom did you give the apple?"
"Who do you think I am?" should be "Who do you think I am?" and "Who do they suppose me to be?" should be "Whom do they suppose me to be?" The objective form of the relative should always be used with a preposition. "Who do you take me for?" should be "Whom do, etc." "Who did you give the apple to?" should be "Whom did you give the apple to," but as pointed out elsewhere, the preposition should never end a sentence; therefore, it's better to say, "To whom did you give the apple?"
After transitive verbs always use the objective cases of the pronouns. For "He and they we have seen," say "Him and them we have seen."
After transitive verbs, always use the objective case of the pronouns. For "He and they we have seen," say "Him and them we have seen."
THAT FOR SO
"The hurt it was that painful it made him cry," say "so painful."
"The pain was so intense that it made him cry," say "so painful."
THESE—THOSE
Don't say, These kind; those sort. Kind and sort are each singular and require the singular pronouns this and that. In connection with these demonstrative adjective pronouns remember that this and these refer to what is near at hand, that and those to what is more distant; as, this book (near me), that book (over there), these boys (near), those boys (at a distance).
Don't say, These kind; those sort. Kind and sort are both singular and need the singular pronouns this and that. When it comes to these demonstrative adjectives, remember that this and these refer to things that are close by, while that and those refer to things that are farther away; for example, this book (near me), that book (over there), these boys (near), those boys (at a distance).
THIS MUCH—THUS MUCH
"This much is certain" should be "Thus much or so much is certain."
"This much is certain" should be "Thus much or so much is certain."
FLEE—FLY
These are two separate verbs and must not be interchanged. The principal parts of flee are flee, fled, fled; those of fly are fly, flew, flown. To flee is generally used in the meaning of getting out of danger. To fly means to soar as a bird. To say of a man "He has flown from the place" is wrong; it should be "He has fled from the place." We can say with propriety that "A bird has flown from the place."
These are two different verbs and should not be confused. The main forms of flee are flee, fled, fled; those of fly are fly, flew, flown. To flee usually means to escape from danger. To fly refers to soaring like a bird. Saying "He has flown from the place" is incorrect; it should be "He has fled from the place." We can correctly say that "A bird has flown from the place."
THROUGH—THROUGHOUT
Don't say "He is well known through the land," but "He is well known throughout the land."
Don't say "He is well known through the land," but "He is well known throughout the land."
VOCATION AND AVOCATION
Don't mistake these two words so nearly alike. Vocation is the employment, business or profession one follows for a living; avocation is some pursuit or occupation which diverts the person from such employment, business or profession. Thus
Don't confuse these two similar words. Vocation is the job, business, or profession one does for a living; avocation is a hobby or activity that distracts someone from that job, business, or profession. Thus
"His vocation was the law, his avocation, farming."
"His main job was in law, and on the side, he farmed."
WAS—WERE
In the subjunctive mood the plural form were should be used with a singular subject; as, "If I were," not was. Remember the plural form of the personal pronoun you always takes were, though it may denote but one. Thus, "You were," never "you was." "If I was him" is a very common expression. Note the two mistakes in it,—that of the verb implying a condition, and that of the objective case of the pronoun. It should read If I were he. This is another illustration of the rule regarding the verb To Be, taking the same case after it as before it; were is part of the verb To Be, therefore as the nominative (I) goes before it, the nominative (he) should come after it.
In the subjunctive mood, the plural form were should be used with a singular subject; for example, "If I were," not was. Keep in mind that the plural form of the personal pronoun you always takes were, even if it refers to just one person. So, "You were," never "you was." The phrase "If I was him" is a very common expression. There are two mistakes in it—one concerning the verb implying a condition, and the other concerning the objective case of the pronoun. It should say If I were he. This is another example of the rule regarding the verb To Be, which takes the same case after it as it does before; were is part of the verb To Be, so since the nominative (I) comes before it, the nominative (he) should come after it.
A OR AN
A becomes an before a vowel or before h mute for the sake of euphony or agreeable sound to the ear. An apple, an orange, an heir, an honor, etc.
A becomes an before a vowel or before h mute for a smoother sound. An apple, an orange, an heir, an honor, etc.
CHAPTER IX
STYLE
Diction—Purity—Propriety—Precision.
It is the object of every writer to put his thoughts into as effective form as possible so as to make a good impression on the reader. A person may have noble thoughts and ideas but be unable to express them in such a way as to appeal to others, consequently he cannot exert the full force of his intellectuality nor leave the imprint of his character upon his time, whereas many a man but indifferently gifted may wield such a facile pen as to attract attention and win for himself an envious place among his contemporaries.
Every writer aims to express their thoughts in the most impactful way possible to leave a strong impression on the reader. Someone might have brilliant ideas and insights but struggle to communicate them in a compelling manner, which means they can't fully showcase their intellect or make a lasting mark on their time. Meanwhile, many writers who may not be particularly gifted can effortlessly capture attention with their writing and earn a respected position among their peers.
In everyday life one sees illustrations of men of excellent mentality being cast aside and ones of mediocre or in some cases, little, if any, ability chosen to fill important places. The former are unable to impress their personality; they have great thoughts, great ideas, but these thoughts and ideas are locked up in their brains and are like prisoners behind the bars struggling to get free. The key of language which would open the door is wanting, hence they have to remain locked up.
In everyday life, we often see examples of highly intelligent people being overlooked while those with mediocre or even minimal skills are chosen for important positions. The former can't showcase their true personalities; they have great thoughts and ideas, but these are trapped in their minds like prisoners behind bars, desperate to break free. The key to expressing themselves—language—is missing, so they remain trapped.
Many a man has to pass through the world unheard of and of little benefit to it or himself, simply because he cannot bring out what is in him and make it subservient to his will. It is the duty of every one to develop his best, not only for the benefit of himself but for the good of his fellow men. It is not at all necessary to have great learning or acquirements, the laborer is as useful in his own place as the philosopher in his; nor is it necessary to have many talents. One talent rightly used is much better than ten wrongly used. Often a man can do more with one than his contemporary can do with ten, often a man can make one dollar go farther than twenty in the hands of his neighbor, often the poor man lives more comfortably than the millionaire. All depends upon the individual himself. If he make right use of what the Creator has given him and live according to the laws of God and nature he is fulfilling his allotted place in the universal scheme of creation, in other words, when he does his best, he is living up to the standard of a useful manhood.
Many people go through life unnoticed and without making an impact, simply because they can't express what’s inside them and use it to achieve their goals. Everyone has a responsibility to develop their potential, not just for their own benefit but for the benefit of others as well. You don’t need to have extensive education or accomplishments; a laborer is just as valuable in their role as a philosopher is in theirs. You also don’t need to possess many talents. One talent used well is far better than ten used poorly. Often, a person can achieve more with one skill than someone else can with ten, and sometimes a person can stretch one dollar further than a neighbor can with twenty. There are cases where a poor person lives more comfortably than a millionaire. It all depends on the individual. If a person makes good use of what they’ve been given by the Creator and lives according to the laws of God and nature, they are fulfilling their role in the grand design of creation. In other words, when they do their best, they are embodying the qualities of a truly useful person.
Now in order to do his best a man of ordinary intelligence and education should be able to express himself correctly both in speaking and writing, that is, he should be able to convey his thoughts in an intelligent manner which the simplest can understand. The manner in which a speaker or writer conveys his thoughts is known as his Style. In other words Style may be defined as the peculiar manner in which a man expresses his conceptions through the medium of language. It depends upon the choice of words and their arrangement to convey a meaning. Scarcely any two writers have exactly the same style, that is to say, express their ideas after the same peculiar form, just as no two mortals are fashioned by nature in the same mould, so that one is an exact counterpart of the other.
To do his best, an average person with some intelligence and education should be able to express himself clearly in both speaking and writing. This means he should communicate his thoughts in a way that anyone can understand. The way a speaker or writer shares their ideas is called their Style. In other words, Style is the unique way someone uses language to express their thoughts. It relies on the choice of words and how they are arranged to convey meaning. Hardly any two writers have the same style; that is, they don’t express their ideas in exactly the same way, just as no two people are created exactly alike, so one isn’t a perfect copy of another.
Just as men differ in the accent and tones of their voices, so do they differ in the construction of their language.
Just like men have different accents and tones in their voices, they also have different ways of constructing their language.
Two reporters sent out on the same mission, say to report a fire, will verbally differ in their accounts though materially both descriptions will be the same as far as the leading facts are concerned. One will express himself in a style different from the other.
Two reporters sent out on the same mission, like to cover a fire, will describe the event differently even though the key facts will be the same. One will express themselves in a style different from the other.
If you are asked to describe the dancing of a red-haired lady at the last charity ball you can either say—"The ruby Circe, with the Titian locks glowing like the oriflamme which surrounds the golden god of day as he sinks to rest amid the crimson glory of the burnished West, gave a divine exhibition of the Terpsichorean art which thrilled the souls of the multitude" or, you can simply say—"The red-haired lady danced very well and pleased the audience."
If you’re asked to describe the dancing of a red-haired lady at the last charity ball, you can either say—"The ruby-haired Circe, with her fiery locks shining like the banner that surrounds the golden sun as it sets in the vibrant colors of the West, gave a stunning performance of the dance that thrilled the crowd" or, you can simply say—"The red-haired lady danced very well and pleased the audience."
The former is a specimen of the ultra florid or bombastic style which may be said to depend upon the pomposity of verbosity for its effect, the latter is a specimen of simple natural Style. Needless to say it is to be preferred. The other should be avoided. It stamps the writer as a person of shallowness, ignorance and inexperience. It has been eliminated from the newspapers. Even the most flatulent of yellow sheets no longer tolerate it in their columns. Affectation and pedantry in style are now universally condemned.
The first is an example of the overly elaborate or showy style that relies on excessive wordiness for its impact, while the second is an example of simple natural style. It's clear that the latter is preferred. The former should be avoided. It marks the writer as someone shallow, ignorant, and inexperienced. It has been removed from newspapers. Even the most sensationalist tabloids no longer accept it in their articles. Pretentiousness and over-scholarliness in writing are now widely rejected.
It is the duty of every speaker and writer to labor after a pleasing style. It gains him an entrance where he would otherwise be debarred. Often the interest of a subject depends as much on the way it is presented as on the subject itself. One writer will make it attractive, another repulsive. For instance take a passage in history. Treated by one historian it is like a desiccated mummy, dry, dull, disgusting, while under the spell of another it is, as it were, galvanized into a virile living thing which not only pleases but captivates the reader.
It’s the responsibility of every speaker and writer to work towards an engaging style. It opens doors that might otherwise stay closed. Often, the appeal of a topic relies just as much on how it’s presented as it does on the topic itself. One writer can make it appealing, while another can make it off-putting. For example, consider a historical passage. When one historian handles it, it comes off like a dried-out mummy—dry, boring, and unpleasant—while another can breathe life into it, transforming it into something dynamic and engaging that not only interests but also fascinates the reader.
DICTION
The first requisite of style is choice of words, and this comes under the head of Diction, the property of style which has reference to the words and phrases used in speaking and writing. The secret of literary skill from any standpoint consists in putting the right word in the right place. In order to do this it is imperative to know the meaning of the words we use, their exact literal meaning. Many synonymous words are seemingly interchangeable and appear as if the same meaning were applicable to three or four of them at the same time, but when all such words are reduced to a final analysis it is clearly seen that there is a marked difference in their meaning. For instance grief and sorrow seem to be identical, but they are not. Grief is active, sorrow is more or less passive; grief is caused by troubles and misfortunes which come to us from the outside, while sorrow is often the consequence of our own acts. Grief is frequently loud and violent, sorrow is always quiet and retiring. Grief shouts, Sorrow remains calm.
The first requirement of style is choice of words, and this falls under the category of Diction, which refers to the words and phrases used in speaking and writing. The key to literary skill, from any perspective, is putting the right word in the right spot. To do this, it’s essential to understand the meanings of the words we use, their exact literal meanings. Many synonyms seem interchangeable and appear to have the same meaning, but when analyzed closely, it’s clear that they have distinct connotations. For example, grief and sorrow might seem the same, but they’re not. Grief is active, while sorrow is more passive; grief arises from troubles and misfortunes that come to us from outside, whereas sorrow often results from our own actions. Grief can be loud and intense, while sorrow is usually quiet and reserved. Grief expresses itself loudly, while sorrow stays calm.
If you are not sure of the exact meaning of a word look it up immediately in the dictionary. Sometimes some of our great scholars are puzzled over simple words in regard to meaning, spelling or pronunciation. Whenever you meet a strange word note it down until you discover its meaning and use. Read the best books you can get, books written by men and women who are acknowledged masters of language, and study how they use their words, where they place them in the sentences, and the meanings they convey to the readers.
If you're unsure about the exact meaning of a word, look it up right away in the dictionary. Sometimes even our greatest scholars struggle with simple words in terms of meaning, spelling, or pronunciation. Whenever you come across a unfamiliar word, write it down until you figure out its meaning and how to use it. Read the best books you can find, written by authors who are recognized masters of language, and study how they use their words, where they place them in sentences, and the meanings they convey to readers.
Mix in good society. Listen attentively to good talkers and try to imitate their manner of expression. If a word is used you do not understand, don't be ashamed to ask its meaning.
Mix with good company. Pay close attention to skilled speakers and try to mimic their way of expressing themselves. If there's a word you don't understand, don't hesitate to ask what it means.
True, a small vocabulary will carry you through, but it is an advantage to have a large one. When you live alone a little pot serves just as well as a large one to cook your victuals and it is handy and convenient, but when your friends or neighbors come to dine with you, you will need a much larger pot and it is better to have it in store, so that you will not be put to shame for your scantiness of furnishings.
Sure, having a small vocabulary can get you by, but it's definitely helpful to have a bigger one. When you're on your own, a small pot works just fine for cooking your meals—it's practical and convenient. But when you have friends or neighbors over for dinner, you'll need a much larger pot. It's better to have it ready so you won't feel embarrassed about not having enough to serve.
Get as many words as you possibly can—if you don't need them now, pack them away in the garrets of your brain so that you can call upon them if you require them.
Get as many words as you can—if you don’t need them right now, store them in the corners of your mind so you can access them when you need them.
Keep a note book, jot down the words you don't understand or clearly understand and consult the dictionary when you get time.
Keep a notebook, write down the words you don't understand or fully grasp, and look them up in the dictionary when you have time.
PURITY
Purity of style consists in using words which are reputable, national and present, which means that the words are in current use by the best authorities, that they are used throughout the nation and not confined to one particular part, and that they are words in constant use at the present time.
Purity of style means using words that are respected, commonly used across the country, and relevant today. This implies that the words are currently accepted by leading sources, are used all over the nation and not just in a specific area, and are consistently in use right now.
There are two guiding principles in the choice of words,—good use and good taste. Good use tells us whether a word is right or wrong; good taste, whether it is adapted to our purpose or not.
There are two main principles to consider when choosing words—good use and good taste. Good use indicates whether a word is appropriate or not; good taste determines if it fits our intention or not.
A word that is obsolete or too new to have gained a place in the language, or that is a provincialism, should not be used.
A word that is outdated or too new to have become accepted in the language, or that is a regional term, shouldn't be used.
Here are the Ten Commandments of English style:
Here are the Ten Commandments of English style:
-
Do not use foreign words.
Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.
-
Do not use a long word when a short one will serve your purpose. Fire is much better than conflagration.
Don't use a long word when a short one will do the job. Fire is way better than conflagration.
-
Do not use technical words, or those understood only by specialists in their respective lines, except when you are writing especially for such people.
Do not use technical terms or words that are only understood by specialists in their fields, unless you are writing specifically for those individuals.
-
Do not use slang.
Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.
-
Do not use provincialisms, as "I guess" for "I think"; "I reckon" for "I know," etc.
Do not use regional expressions like "I guess" for "I think" or "I reckon" for "I know," etc.
-
Do not in writing prose, use poetical or antiquated words: as "lore, e'er, morn, yea, nay, verily, peradventure."
Do not use poetic or old-fashioned words in your writing, like "lore," "e'er," "morn," "yea," "nay," "verily," or "peradventure."
-
Do not use trite and hackneyed words and expressions; as, "on the job," "up and in"; "down and out."
Do not use overused and cliché phrases like "on the job," "up and in," or "down and out."
-
Do not use newspaper words which have not established a place in the language as "to bugle"; "to suicide," etc.
Do not use newspaper terms that haven't established themselves in the language, like "to bugle" or "to suicide."
-
Do not use ungrammatical words and forms; as, "I ain't;" "he don't."
Do not use incorrect words and forms like "I ain't" or "he doesn't."
-
Do not use ambiguous words or phrases; as—"He showed me all about the house."
Do not use vague words or phrases, like "He showed me all about the house."
Trite words, similes and metaphors which have become hackneyed and worn out should be allowed to rest in the oblivion of past usage. Such expressions and phrases as "Sweet sixteen" "the Almighty dollar," "Uncle Sam," "On the fence," "The Glorious Fourth," "Young America," "The lords of creation," "The rising generation," "The weaker sex," "The weaker vessel," "Sweetness long drawn out" and "chief cook and bottle washer," should be put on the shelf as they are utterly worn out from too much usage.
Clichéd words, similes, and metaphors that have become overused and tired should be left to fade into the past. Expressions and phrases like "Sweet sixteen," "the Almighty dollar," "Uncle Sam," "On the fence," "The Glorious Fourth," "Young America," "the lords of creation," "the rising generation," "the weaker sex," "the weaker vessel," "Sweetness long drawn out," and "chief cook and bottle washer" should be retired because they are completely worn out from too much use.
Some of the old similes which have outlived their usefulness and should be pensioned off, are "Sweet as sugar," "Bold as a lion," "Strong as an ox," "Quick as a flash," "Cold as ice," "Stiff as a poker," "White as snow," "Busy as a bee," "Pale as a ghost," "Rich as Croesus," "Cross as a bear" and a great many more far too numerous to mention.
Some old similes that have outlived their usefulness and should be retired include "Sweet as sugar," "Bold as a lion," "Strong as an ox," "Quick as a flash," "Cold as ice," "Stiff as a poker," "White as snow," "Busy as a bee," "Pale as a ghost," "Rich as Croesus," "Cross as a bear," and many more that are too numerous to list.
Be as original as possible in the use of expression. Don't follow in the old rut but try and strike out for yourself. This does not mean that you should try to set the style, or do anything outlandish or out of the way, or be an innovator on the prevailing custom. In order to be original there is no necessity for you to introduce something novel or establish a precedent. The probability is you are not fit to do either, by education or talent. While following the style of those who are acknowledged leaders you can be original in your language. Try and clothe an idea different from what it has been clothed and better. If you are speaking or writing of dancing don't talk or write about "tripping the light fantastic toe." It is over two hundred years since Milton expressed it that way in "L'Allegro." You're not a Milton and besides over a million have stolen it from Milton until it is now no longer worth stealing.
Be as original as you can in how you express yourself. Don’t follow outdated paths, but aim to create your own way. This doesn’t mean you should try to define a new style, do anything outrageous, or challenge the current norms. To be original, you don’t have to introduce something completely new or set a precedent. The truth is, you probably aren’t equipped to do either, based on your education or natural ability. While you can follow the style of recognized leaders, you can still be original in your language. Try to frame an idea in a way that's different and better than before. If you’re talking or writing about dancing, don’t use phrases like "tripping the light fantastic toe." It's been over two hundred years since Milton used that in "L'Allegro." You aren’t Milton, and besides, over a million people have borrowed it from him, making it no longer original.
Don't resurrect obsolete words such as whilom, yclept, wis, etc., and be careful in regard to obsolescent words, that is, words that are at the present time gradually passing from use such as quoth, trow, betwixt, amongst, froward, etc.
Don't bring back outdated words like whilom, yclept, wis, etc., and be mindful of words that are falling out of use, such as quoth, trow, betwixt, amongst, froward, etc.
And beware of new words. Be original in the construction and arrangement of your language, but don't try to originate words. Leave that to the Masters of language, and don't be the first to try such words, wait until the chemists of speech have tested them and passed upon their merits.
And watch out for new words. Be original in how you put your language together, but don’t try to create new words yourself. Leave that to the experts, and don’t be the first to use those words—wait until the language specialists have tested them and evaluated their worth.
Quintilian said—"Prefer the oldest of the new and the newest of the old." Pope put this in rhyme and it still holds good:
Quintilian said—"Prefer the oldest of the new and the newest of the old." Pope put this in rhyme, and it still rings true:
In words, as fashions, the same rule will hold, Alike fantastic, if too new or old: Be not the first by whom the new are tried, Nor yet the last to lay the old aside.
In words, just like fashions, the same rule applies: they can seem ridiculous, whether they're too new or too old. Don’t be the first one to try something new, and don’t be the last to let go of the old.
PROPRIETY
Propriety of style consists in using words in their proper sense and as in the case of purity, good usage is the principal test. Many words have acquired in actual use a meaning very different from what they once possessed. "Prevent" formerly meant to go before, and that meaning is implied in its Latin derivation. Now it means to put a stop to, to hinder. To attain propriety of style it is necessary to avoid confounding words derived from the same root; as respectfully and respectively; it is necessary to use words in their accepted sense or the sense which everyday use sanctions.
Propriety of style means using words in their correct sense, and just like with purity, good usage is the main standard. Many words have taken on meanings that are very different from their original ones. For example, "prevent" used to mean to go before, which is what its Latin root implies. Now, it means to stop something or to hinder it. To achieve propriety of style, you need to avoid mixing up words that come from the same root, like respectfully and respectively; you should use words in their accepted meaning or the meaning that everyday usage supports.
SIMPLICITY
Simplicity of style has reference to the choice of simple words and their unaffected presentation. Simple words should always be used in preference to compound, and complicated ones when they express the same or almost the same meaning. The Anglo-Saxon element in our language comprises the simple words which express the relations of everyday life, strong, terse, vigorous, the language of the fireside, street, market and farm. It is this style which characterizes the Bible and many of the great English classics such as the "Pilgrim's Progress," "Robinson Crusoe," and "Gulliver's Travels."
Simplicity in style refers to the use of plain words and their straightforward presentation. Simple words should always be chosen over compound or complex ones when they convey the same or nearly the same meaning. The Anglo-Saxon part of our language contains the simple words that express everyday relationships, being strong, concise, and lively—the language of home, streets, markets, and farms. This style is what characterizes the Bible and many of the great English classics like "The Pilgrim's Progress," "Robinson Crusoe," and "Gulliver's Travels."
CLEARNESS
Clearness of style should be one of the leading considerations with the beginner in composition. He must avoid all obscurity and ambiguous phrases. If he write a sentence or phrase and see that a meaning might be inferred from it otherwise than intended, he should re-write it in such a way that there can be no possible doubt. Words, phrases or clauses that are closely related should be placed as near to each other as possible that their mutual relation may clearly appear, and no word should be omitted that is necessary to the complete expression of thought.
Clarity of style should be one of the main focuses for beginners in writing. They must steer clear of any confusion and vague phrases. If they write a sentence or phrase and notice that it could be understood in a way they didn’t intend, they should rewrite it so that there’s no chance of misunderstanding. Words, phrases, or clauses that are related should be placed as close together as possible so their connection is obvious, and no word should be left out if it’s essential for fully expressing their thoughts.
UNITY
Unity is that property of style which keeps all parts of a sentence in connection with the principal thought and logically subordinate to it. A sentence may be constructed as to suggest the idea of oneness to the mind, or it may be so loosely put together as to produce a confused and indefinite impression. Ideas that have but little connection should be expressed in separate sentences, and not crowded into one.
Unity is the quality of writing that keeps all parts of a sentence linked to the main idea and logically supportive of it. A sentence can be crafted to convey a sense of oneness, or it can be so loosely structured that it creates a confusing and unclear impression. Ideas that are only slightly related should be expressed in separate sentences rather than crammed into one.
Keep long parentheses out of the middle of your sentences and when you have apparently brought your sentences to a close don't try to continue the thought or idea by adding supplementary clauses.
Keep long parentheses out of the middle of your sentences, and when you think you've finished your sentences, don't try to keep going by adding extra clauses.
STRENGTH
Strength is that property of style which gives animation, energy and vivacity to language and sustains the interest of the reader. It is as necessary to language as good food is to the body. Without it the words are weak and feeble and create little or no impression on the mind. In order to have strength the language must be concise, that is, much expressed in little compass, you must hit the nail fairly on the head and drive it in straight. Go critically over what you write and strike out every word, phrase and clause the omission of which impairs neither the clearness nor force of the sentence and so avoid redundancy, tautology and circumlocution. Give the most important words the most prominent places, which, as has been pointed out elsewhere, are the beginning and end of the sentence.
Strength is a quality of style that adds energy, liveliness, and interest to language, keeping the reader engaged. It’s as essential to language as good food is to the body. Without it, words feel weak and ineffective, leaving little to no impression on the mind. To ensure strength, language should be concise, meaning it should convey a lot in a small space; you need to hit the nail on the head and drive it in straight. Review what you write critically and remove every word, phrase, and clause that doesn’t impact the clarity or force of the sentence, avoiding redundancy, repetition, and unnecessary elaboration. Place the most important words in the most prominent positions, which, as mentioned elsewhere, are the beginning and end of the sentence.
HARMONY
Harmony is that property of style which gives a smoothness to the sentence, so that when the words are sounded their connection becomes pleasing to the ear. It adapts sound to sense. Most people construct their sentences without giving thought to the way they will sound and as a consequence we have many jarring and discordant combinations such as "Thou strengthenedst thy position and actedst arbitrarily and derogatorily to my interests."
Harmony is a quality of style that adds smoothness to a sentence, making the words sound pleasing when spoken. It aligns sound with meaning. Most people form their sentences without considering how they will sound, resulting in many jarring and discordant combinations like "You strengthened your position and acted arbitrarily and derogatorily toward my interests."
Harsh, disagreeable verbs are liable to occur with the Quaker form Thou of the personal pronoun. This form is now nearly obsolete, the plural you being almost universally used. To obtain harmony in the sentence long words that are hard to pronounce and combinations of letters of one kind should be avoided.
Harsh, unpleasant verbs tend to appear with the Quaker form Thou of the personal pronoun. This form is now almost obsolete, with the plural you being used almost everywhere. To achieve harmony in the sentence, long words that are difficult to pronounce and combinations of similar letters should be avoided.
EXPRESSIVE OF WRITER
Style is expressive of the writer, as to who he is and what he is. As a matter of structure in composition it is the indication of what a man can do; as a matter of quality it is an indication of what he is.
Style reflects the writer's identity and essence. In terms of composition structure, it shows what a person is capable of; in terms of quality, it reveals who they truly are.
KINDS OF STYLE
Style has been classified in different ways, but it admits of so many designations that it is very hard to enumerate a table. In fact there are as many styles as there are writers, for no two authors write exactly after the same form. However, we may classify the styles of the various authors in broad divisions as (1) dry, (2) plain, (3) neat, (4) elegant, (5) florid, (6) bombastic.
Style has been categorized in various ways, but it has so many labels that it's really difficult to list them all. In reality, there are as many styles as there are writers, since no two authors write exactly the same way. However, we can group the styles of different authors into broad categories: (1) dry, (2) plain, (3) neat, (4) elegant, (5) florid, (6) bombastic.
The dry style excludes all ornament and makes no effort to appeal to any sense of beauty. Its object is simply to express the thoughts in a correct manner. This style is exemplified by Berkeley.
The dry style avoids all decoration and doesn’t try to appeal to any sense of beauty. Its goal is just to communicate thoughts clearly and accurately. This style is represented by Berkeley.
The plain style does not seek ornamentation either, but aims to make clear and concise statements without any elaboration or embellishment. Locke and Whately illustrate the plain style.
The plain style also doesn't look for decoration; instead, it focuses on making clear and straightforward statements without any extra detail or fancy touches. Locke and Whately exemplify the plain style.
The neat style only aspires after ornament sparingly. Its object is to have correct figures, pure diction and clear and harmonious sentences. Goldsmith and Gray are the acknowledged leaders in this kind of style.
The neat style aims for ornamentation in moderation. Its goal is to use accurate figures, clear language, and smooth, harmonious sentences. Goldsmith and Gray are the recognized leaders in this style.
The elegant style uses every ornament that can beautify and avoids every excess which would degrade. Macaulay and Addison have been enthroned as the kings of this style. To them all writers bend the knee in homage.
The elegant style makes use of every decoration that can enhance beauty and avoids any excess that would compromise quality. Macaulay and Addison are regarded as the leaders of this style, and all writers show their respect to them.
The florid style goes to excess in superfluous and superficial ornamentation and strains after a highly colored imagery. The poems of Ossian typify this style.
The florid style is overly elaborate, filled with unnecessary and flashy decorations, and pushes for vibrant imagery. The poems of Ossian are a perfect example of this style.
The bombastic is characterized by such an excess of words, figures and ornaments as to be ridiculous and disgusting. It is like a circus clown dressed up in gold tinsel Dickens gives a fine example of it in Sergeant Buzfuz' speech in the "Pickwick Papers." Among other varieties of style may be mentioned the colloquial, the laconic, the concise, the diffuse, the abrupt the flowing, the quaint, the epigrammatic, the flowery, the feeble, the nervous, the vehement, and the affected. The manner of these is sufficiently indicated by the adjective used to describe them.
The bombastic style is marked by an overwhelming amount of words, figures, and embellishments to the point of being silly and off-putting. It’s like a circus clown decked out in gold tinsel. Dickens provides a great example of this in Sergeant Buzfuz's speech in the "Pickwick Papers." Other styles worth mentioning include colloquial, laconic, concise, diffuse, abrupt, flowing, quaint, epigrammatic, flowery, feeble, nervous, vehement, and affected. The way these styles feel is clearly suggested by the adjectives used to describe them.
In fact style is as various as character and expresses the individuality of the writer, or in other words, as the French writer Buffon very aptly remarks, "the style is the man himself."
In fact, style is as diverse as character and reflects the individuality of the writer. In other words, as the French writer Buffon wisely noted, "style is the man himself."
CHAPTER X
SUGGESTIONS
How to Write—What to Write—Correct Speaking and Speakers
Rules of grammar and rhetoric are good in their own place; their laws must be observed in order to express thoughts and ideas in the right way so that they shall convey a determinate sense and meaning in a pleasing and acceptable manner. Hard and fast rules, however, can never make a writer or author. That is the business of old Mother Nature and nothing can take her place. If nature has not endowed a man with faculties to put his ideas into proper composition he cannot do so. He may have no ideas worthy the recording. If a person has not a thought to express, it cannot be expressed. Something cannot be manufactured out of nothing. The author must have thoughts and ideas before he can express them on paper. These come to him by nature and environment and are developed and strengthened by study. There is an old Latin quotation in regard to the poet which says "Poeta nascitur non fit" the translation of which is—the poet is born, not made. To a great degree the same applies to the author. Some men are great scholars as far as book learning is concerned, yet they cannot express themselves in passable composition. Their knowledge is like gold locked up in a chest where it is of no value to themselves or the rest of the world.
Rules of grammar and rhetoric have their place; we need to follow their guidelines to express thoughts and ideas correctly so they convey a clear sense and meaning in an appealing and acceptable way. However, strict rules alone can't make someone a writer or author. That's something only Mother Nature can do, and nothing can replace her. If nature hasn’t given someone the ability to organize their ideas properly, they won’t be able to do it. They might not have any ideas worth sharing. If a person doesn’t have a thought to express, it simply can’t be expressed. You can’t create something out of nothing. An author must have thoughts and ideas before they can write them down. These come from nature and their surroundings and are developed and strengthened through study. There’s an old Latin saying about poets: "Poeta nascitur non fit," which means the poet is born, not made. This idea largely applies to authors as well. Some people are great scholars in terms of academic knowledge, yet they can't express themselves in decent writing. Their knowledge is like gold locked away in a chest, providing no value to themselves or the world.
The best way to learn to write is to sit down and write, just as the best way how to learn to ride a bicycle is to mount the wheel and pedal away. Write first about common things, subjects that are familiar to you. Try for instance an essay on a cat. Say something original about her. Don't say "she is very playful when young but becomes grave as she grows old." That has been said more than fifty thousand times before. Tell what you have seen the family cat doing, how she caught a mouse in the garret and what she did after catching it. Familiar themes are always the best for the beginner. Don't attempt to describe a scene in Australia if you have never been there and know nothing of the country. Never hunt for subjects, there are thousands around you. Describe what you saw yesterday—a fire, a runaway horse, a dog-fight on the street and be original in your description. Imitate the best writers in their style, but not in their exact words. Get out of the beaten path, make a pathway of your own.
The best way to learn to write is to just sit down and write, just like the best way to learn to ride a bike is to hop on and start pedaling. Begin with common topics, things you know well. For example, try writing an essay about a cat. Share something original about her. Don't say, "She is very playful when she's young but becomes serious as she gets older." That’s been said over fifty thousand times. Describe what you’ve seen your family cat doing, like catching a mouse in the attic and what she did afterward. Familiar themes are always the best for beginners. Don’t try to describe a scene in Australia if you've never been there and don’t know anything about the country. You don’t need to search for topics; there are thousands around you. Describe something you saw yesterday—a fire, a runaway horse, a dog fight on the street—and be original in your description. Imitate the best writers in their style, but not in their exact words. Step off the beaten path and create your own unique way.
Know what you write about, write about what you know; this is a golden rule to which you must adhere. To know you must study. The world is an open book in which all who run may read. Nature is one great volume the pages of which are open to the peasant as well as to the peer. Study Nature's moods and tenses, for they are vastly more important than those of the grammar. Book learning is most desirable, but, after all, it is only theory and not practice. The grandest allegory in the English, in fact, in any language, was written by an ignorant, so-called ignorant, tinker named John Bunyan. Shakespeare was not a scholar in the sense we regard the term to-day, yet no man ever lived or probably ever will live that equalled or will equal him in the expression of thought. He simply read the book of nature and interpreted it from the standpoint of his own magnificent genius.
Know what you write about, and write about what you know; this is a golden rule you should follow. To understand, you need to study. The world is like an open book that anyone can read. Nature is one big volume with pages open to everyone, from the common person to the noble. Pay attention to Nature's moods and changes, as they matter much more than those of grammar. Knowing from books is important, but in the end, it’s just theory and not real-life experience. The greatest allegory in English, or any language, was written by a so-called ignorant tinker named John Bunyan. Shakespeare wasn't a scholar in the way we think of it today, yet no one has ever matched or likely will ever match his expression of thought. He simply read the book of nature and interpreted it with his incredible talent.
Don't imagine that a college education is necessary to success as a writer. Far from it. Some of our college men are dead-heads, drones, parasites on the body social, not alone useless to the world but to themselves. A person may be so ornamental that he is valueless from any other standpoint. As a general rule ornamental things serve but little purpose. A man may know so much of everything that he knows little of anything. This may sound paradoxical, but, nevertheless, experience proves its truth.
Don't think that getting a college education is essential for success as a writer. It's quite the opposite. Some college graduates are just dead weight, lazy, and leeches on society; they are not only useless to the world but to themselves as well. A person might be so focused on looking good that they become worthless from any practical perspective. Generally speaking, decorative things don't serve much purpose. A person might know a bit about everything but actually know very little about anything. This may seem contradictory, but experience shows that it's true.
If you are poor that is not a detriment but an advantage. Poverty is an incentive to endeavor, not a drawback. Better to be born with a good, working brain in your head than with a gold spoon in your mouth. If the world had been depending on the so-called pets of fortune it would have deteriorated long ago.
If you're poor, that's not a disadvantage but an advantage. Poverty pushes you to strive, not hold you back. It's better to be born with a sharp, capable mind than to have been born with a silver spoon in your mouth. If the world had relied on the so-called lucky ones, it would have fallen apart a long time ago.
From the pits of poverty, from the arenas of suffering, from the hovels of neglect, from the backwood cabins of obscurity, from the lanes and by-ways of oppression, from the dingy garrets and basements of unending toil and drudgery have come men and women who have made history, made the world brighter, better, higher, holier for their existence in it, made of it a place good to live in and worthy to die in,—men and women who have hallowed it by their footsteps and sanctified it with their presence and in many cases consecrated it with their blood. Poverty is a blessing, not an evil, a benison from the Father's hand if accepted in the right spirit. Instead of retarding, it has elevated literature in all ages. Homer was a blind beggarman singing his snatches of song for the dole of charity; grand old Socrates, oracle of wisdom, many a day went without his dinner because he had not the wherewithal to get it, while teaching the youth of Athens. The divine Dante was nothing better than a beggar, houseless, homeless, friendless, wandering through Italy while he composed his immortal cantos. Milton, who in his blindness "looked where angels fear to tread," was steeped in poverty while writing his sublime conception, "Paradise Lost." Shakespeare was glad to hold and water the horses of patrons outside the White Horse Theatre for a few pennies in order to buy bread. Burns burst forth in never-dying song while guiding the ploughshare. Poor Heinrich Heine, neglected and in poverty, from his "mattress grave" of suffering in Paris added literary laurels to the wreath of his German Fatherland. In America Elihu Burritt, while attending the anvil, made himself a master of a score of languages and became the literary lion of his age and country.
From the depths of poverty, from the places of suffering, from the rundown homes of neglect, from the hidden cabins of obscurity, from the side streets and alleyways of oppression, from the cramped attics and basements filled with endless hard work and struggle have come men and women who have made history, brightened the world, made it better, greater, and more sacred through their presence, turning it into a place worth living in and dying for—men and women who have blessed it with their footsteps and sanctified it with their existence, and in many cases, consecrated it with their blood. Poverty is a blessing, not a curse, a gift from a higher power if embraced in the right way. Instead of holding back, it has uplifted literature throughout the ages. Homer was a blind beggar, singing his verses for the kindness of others; the great Socrates, a fountain of wisdom, often went without a meal because he couldn't afford one while teaching the youth of Athens. The divine Dante was nothing more than a homeless wanderer, friendless as he roamed through Italy, writing his immortal poems. Milton, who in his blindness "looked where angels fear to tread," lived in poverty while creating his magnificent work, "Paradise Lost." Shakespeare was happy to hold and water the horses of patrons outside the White Horse Theatre for a few coins to buy food. Burns sprang forth in everlasting song while plowing the fields. Poor Heinrich Heine, overlooked and in hardship, from his "mattress grave" of suffering in Paris, added literary achievements to the legacy of his German homeland. In America, Elihu Burritt, while working at the anvil, taught himself many languages and became the literary figure of his time and country.
In other fields of endeavor poverty has been the spur to action. Napoleon was born in obscurity, the son of a hand-to-mouth scrivener in the backward island of Corsica. Abraham Lincoln, the boast and pride of America, the man who made this land too hot for the feet of slaves, came from a log cabin in the Ohio backwoods. So did James A. Garfield. Ulysses Grant came from a tanyard to become the world's greatest general. Thomas A. Edison commenced as a newsboy on a railway train.
In other areas of life, poverty has driven people to take action. Napoleon was born in obscurity as the son of a struggling writer in the remote island of Corsica. Abraham Lincoln, America's pride and a man who fought to end slavery, came from a log cabin in the Ohio wilderness. The same is true for James A. Garfield. Ulysses Grant rose from a leather tannery to become the world's greatest general. Thomas A. Edison started out as a newsboy on a train.
The examples of these men are incentives to action. Poverty thrust them forward instead of keeping them back. Therefore, if you are poor make your circumstances a means to an end. Have ambition, keep a goal in sight and bend every energy to reach that goal. A story is told of Thomas Carlyle the day he attained the highest honor the literary world could confer upon him when he was elected Lord Rector of Edinburgh University. After his installation speech, in going through the halls, he met a student seemingly deep in study. In his own peculiar, abrupt, crusty way the Sage of Chelsea interrogated the young man: "For what profession are you studying?" "I don't know," returned the youth. "You don't know," thundered Carlyle, "young man, you are a fool." Then he went on to qualify his vehement remark, "My boy when I was your age, I was stooped in grinding, gripping poverty in the little village of Ecclefechan, in the wilds of [Transcriber's note: First part of word illegible]-frieshire, where in all the place only the minister and myself could read the Bible, yet poor and obscure as I was, in my mind's eye I saw a chair awaiting for me in the Temple of Fame and day and night and night and day I studied until I sat in that chair to-day as Lord Rector of Edinburgh University."
The examples of these men motivate action. Poverty pushed them forward instead of holding them back. So, if you’re poor, turn your situation into a stepping stone. Have ambition, keep your goals in sight, and put all your energy into achieving them. There’s a story about Thomas Carlyle on the day he received the highest honor the literary world could give him when he was elected Lord Rector of Edinburgh University. After his speech during the ceremony, as he walked through the halls, he encountered a student who seemed deeply focused on his studies. In his typical, direct, and gruff manner, the Sage of Chelsea asked the young man, "What career are you studying for?" The student replied, "I don't know." Carlyle responded emphatically, "You don't know? Young man, you are a fool." Then, he explained his harsh comment, "When I was your age, I was weighed down by grinding, desperate poverty in the small village of Ecclefechan, in the wilds of [Transcriber's note: First part of word illegible]-shire, where only the minister and I could read the Bible. Yet, poor and unknown as I was, I envisioned a chair waiting for me in the Hall of Fame, and day and night, I studied until I finally sat in that chair today as Lord Rector of Edinburgh University."
Another Scotchman, Robert Buchanan, the famous novelist, set out for London from Glasgow with but half-a-crown in his pocket. "Here goes," said he, "for a grave in Westminster Abbey." He was not much of a scholar, but his ambition carried him on and he became one of the great literary lions of the world's metropolis.
Another Scotsman, Robert Buchanan, the famous novelist, left Glasgow for London with only a half-crown in his pocket. "Here goes," he said, "for a grave in Westminster Abbey." He wasn't much of a scholar, but his ambition drove him forward, and he became one of the great literary figures of the world's capital.
Henry M. Stanley was a poorhouse waif whose real name was John Rowlands. He was brought up in a Welsh workhouse, but he had ambition, so he rose to be a great explorer, a great writer, became a member of Parliament and was knighted by the British Sovereign.
Henry M. Stanley was a poorhouse orphan whose real name was John Rowlands. He grew up in a Welsh workhouse, but he was ambitious, so he became a great explorer, a notable writer, a member of Parliament, and was knighted by the British Sovereign.
Have ambition to succeed and you will succeed. Cut the word "failure" out of your lexicon. Don't acknowledge it. Remember
Have the ambition to succeed, and you will succeed. Eliminate the word "failure" from your vocabulary. Don't recognize it. Remember
"In life's earnest battle they only prevail Who daily march onward and never say fail."
"In life's serious struggles, only those succeed Who keep moving forward every day and never give up."
Let every obstacle you encounter be but a stepping stone in the path of onward progress to the goal of success.
Let every obstacle you face be just a stepping stone on the journey towards achieving success.
If untoward circumstances surround you, resolve to overcome them. Bunyan wrote the "Pilgrim's Progress" in Bedford jail on scraps of wrapping paper while he was half starved on a diet of bread and water. That unfortunate American genius, Edgar Allan Poe, wrote "The Raven," the most wonderful conception as well as the most highly artistic poem in all English literature, in a little cottage in the Fordham section of New York while he was in the direst straits of want. Throughout all his short and wonderfully brilliant career, poor Poe never had a dollar he could call his own. Such, however, was both his fault and his misfortune and he is a bad exemplar.
If difficult circumstances are around you, make up your mind to overcome them. Bunyan wrote "Pilgrim's Progress" in Bedford jail on scraps of wrapping paper while he was half-starved on a diet of bread and water. That unfortunate American genius, Edgar Allan Poe, wrote "The Raven," the most incredible idea and the most artistic poem in all of English literature, in a little cottage in the Fordham area of New York while he was in extreme poverty. Throughout his short and brilliantly creative career, poor Poe never had a dollar he could truly call his own. Yet, this was both his fault and his misfortune, and he is not a good example.
Don't think that the knowledge of a library of books is essential to success as a writer. Often a multiplicity of books is confusing. Master a few good books and master them well and you will have all that is necessary. A great authority has said: "Beware of the man of one book," which means that a man of one book is a master of the craft. It is claimed that a thorough knowledge of the Bible alone will make any person a master of literature. Certain it is that the Bible and Shakespeare constitute an epitome of the essentials of knowledge. Shakespeare gathered the fruitage of all who went before him, he has sown the seeds for all who shall ever come after him. He was the great intellectual ocean whose waves touch the continents of all thought.
Don't think that having a library full of books is essential for success as a writer. Often, too many books can be confusing. Instead, focus on a few good books and really understand them, and you’ll have everything you need. A well-known saying warns, "Beware of the man of one book," which means that someone who fully understands one book is likely a master of the craft. It's said that a deep knowledge of just the Bible can make anyone a master of literature. It's clear that the Bible and Shakespeare cover the essentials of knowledge. Shakespeare took the insights of those before him and planted the seeds for everyone who will come after. He was the vast intellectual ocean whose waves reach every aspect of thought.
Books are cheap now-a-days, the greatest works, thanks to the printing press, are within the reach of all, and the more you read, the better, provided they are worth reading. Sometimes a man takes poison into his system unconscious of the fact that it is poison, as in the case of certain foods, and it is very hard to throw off its effects. Therefore, be careful in your choice of reading matter. If you cannot afford a full library, and as has been said, such is not necessary, select a few of the great works of the master minds, assimilate and digest them, so that they will be of advantage to your literary system. Elsewhere in this volume is given a list of some of the world's masterpieces from which you can make a selection.
Books are cheap these days, and thanks to the printing press, the greatest works are accessible to everyone. The more you read, the better, as long as the books are worth your time. Sometimes, a person unknowingly takes in harmful material, like certain foods that can be toxic, making it difficult to shake off the effects. So, be careful about what you choose to read. If you can't afford a full library—and as mentioned, that's not necessary—pick a few great works by brilliant authors, absorb and internalize them so they benefit your literary growth. There's a list of some of the world's masterpieces elsewhere in this volume that you can choose from.
Your brain is a storehouse, don't put useless furniture into it to crowd it to the exclusion of what is useful. Lay up only the valuable and serviceable kind which you can call into requisition at any moment.
Your brain is like a storage space, so don’t fill it with useless junk that takes up room and keeps out what’s actually useful. Only keep the valuable and practical stuff that you can use whenever you need it.
As it is necessary to study the best authors in order to be a writer, so it is necessary to study the best speakers in order to talk with correctness and in good style. To talk rightly you must imitate the masters of oral speech. Listen to the best conversationalists and how they express themselves. Go to hear the leading lectures, speeches and sermons. No need to imitate the gestures of elocution, it is nature, not art, that makes the elocutionist and the orator. It is not how a speaker expresses himself but the language which he uses and the manner of its use which should interest you. Have you heard the present day masters of speech? There have been past time masters but their tongues are stilled in the dust of the grave, and you can only read their eloquence now. You can, however, listen to the charm of the living. To many of us voices still speak from the grave, voices to which we have listened when fired with the divine essence of speech. Perhaps you have hung with rapture on the words of Beecher and Talmage. Both thrilled the souls of men and won countless thousands over to a living gospel. Both were masters of words, they scattered the flowers of rhetoric on the shrine of eloquence and hurled veritable bouquets at their audiences which were eagerly seized by the latter and treasured in the storehouse of memory. Both were scholars and philosophers, yet they were far surpassed by Spurgeon, a plain man of the people with little or no claim to education in the modern sense of the word. Spurgeon by his speech attracted thousands to his Tabernacle. The Protestant and Catholic, Turk, Jew and Mohammedan rushed to hear him and listened, entranced, to his language. Such another was Dwight L. Moody, the greatest Evangelist the world has ever known. Moody was not a man of learning; he commenced life as a shoe salesman in Chicago, yet no man ever lived who drew such audiences and so fascinated them with the spell of his speech. "Oh, that was personal magnetism," you will say, but it was nothing of the kind. It was the burning words that fell from the lips of these men, and the way, the manner, the force with which they used those words that counted and attracted the crowds to listen unto them. Personal magnetism or personal appearance entered not as factors into their success. Indeed as far as physique were concerned, some of them were handicapped. Spurgeon was a short, podgy, fat little man, Moody was like a country farmer, Talmage in his big cloak was one of the most slovenly of men and only Beecher was passable in the way of refinement and gentlemanly bearing. Physical appearance, as so many think, is not the sesame to the interest of an audience. Daniel O'Connell, the Irish tribune, was a homely, ugly, awkward, ungainly man, yet his words attracted millions to his side and gained for him the hostile ear of the British Parliament, he was a master of verbiage and knew just what to say to captivate his audiences.
To become a writer, you need to study great authors, and to speak well, you have to learn from the best speakers. To communicate effectively, you should emulate the masters of spoken language. Pay attention to skilled conversationalists and how they express their thoughts. Attend prominent lectures, speeches, and sermons. You don’t need to copy their gestures; it’s natural talent, not performance art, that defines a skilled speaker and orator. What should matter to you is not how a speaker articulates their words, but the language they use and how they use it. Have you listened to today’s master speakers? There have been great speakers in the past, but their voices are now silent, and you can only read their eloquence. However, you can still enjoy the words of the living. Many of us recall with admiration the powerful speeches that once inspired us. Perhaps you were captivated by the words of Beecher and Talmage. Both of them deeply moved people and brought countless followers to a living faith. They were wordsmiths, adorning their speeches with beautiful rhetoric that resonated with audiences, who eagerly embraced their messages and stored them in memory. Both were also intellectuals, yet they were outshone by Spurgeon, a straightforward man with little formal education by today’s standards. Spurgeon filled his Tabernacle with thousands, attracting Protestants, Catholics, Turks, Jews, and Muslims who were spellbound by his words. Another extraordinary figure was Dwight L. Moody, the greatest evangelist ever. Moody wasn’t highly educated; he started as a shoe salesman in Chicago, yet he drew massive crowds and captivated them with his speech. You might say it was personal magnetism, but that’s not entirely true. It was the powerful words these men spoke, along with their delivery and passion, that drew people in. Personal charm or appearance didn’t play a role in their success. In fact, regarding physical attributes, many of them faced challenges. Spurgeon was short and stocky, Moody looked like a rural farmer, Talmage was often disheveled in his large cloak, and only Beecher had an appearance that was somewhat refined. Many believe that looks are the key to holding an audience’s interest, but that’s not the case. Daniel O'Connell, the Irish orator, was an awkwardly unattractive man, yet his words attracted millions and earned him the hostile attention of the British Parliament, as he knew how to captivate his audiences with his eloquence.
It is words and their placing that count on almost all occasions. No matter how refined in other respects the person may be, if he use words wrongly and express himself in language not in accordance with a proper construction, he will repel you, whereas the man who places his words correctly and employs language in harmony with the laws of good speech, let him be ever so humble, will attract and have an influence over you.
It's the choice of words and their arrangement that really matters most of the time. No matter how sophisticated someone is in other ways, if they misuse words and don't express themselves correctly, it will turn you off. On the other hand, someone who uses words properly and speaks in a way that aligns with good communication, no matter how humble they might be, will draw you in and have an impact on you.
The good speaker, the correct speaker, is always able to command attention and doors are thrown open to him which remain closed to others not equipped with a like facility of expression. The man who can talk well and to the point need never fear to go idle. He is required in nearly every walk of life and field of human endeavor, the world wants him at every turn. Employers are constantly on the lookout for good talkers, those who are able to attract the public and convince others by the force of their language. A man may be able, educated, refined, of unblemished character, nevertheless if he lack the power to express himself, put forth his views in good and appropriate speech he has to take a back seat, while some one with much less ability gets the opportunity to come to the front because he can clothe his ideas in ready words and talk effectively.
A good speaker knows how to grab attention, and doors open for them that stay shut for others who can’t express themselves as well. Someone who can speak clearly and directly will never find themselves without work. They’re needed in almost every profession and area of life; the world is always looking for them. Employers are constantly searching for great communicators, people who can engage the public and persuade others through their words. A person might be skilled, educated, refined, and have an impeccable character, but if they can’t express themselves or articulate their opinions effectively, they’ll be overlooked while someone with less talent moves up because they can express their ideas well and speak persuasively.
You may again say that nature, not art, makes a man a fluent speaker; to a great degree this is true, but it is art that makes him a correct speaker, and correctness leads to fluency. It is possible for everyone to become a correct speaker if he will but persevere and take a little pains and care.
You might say that it's nature, not art, that makes someone a smooth speaker; to some extent, that's true, but it's art that makes them a correct speaker, and being correct leads to fluency. Anyone can become a correct speaker if they are willing to put in some effort and care.
At the risk of repetition good advice may be here emphasized: Listen to the best speakers and note carefully the words which impress you most. Keep a notebook and jot down words, phrases, sentences that are in any way striking or out of the ordinary run. If you do not understand the exact meaning of a word you have heard, look it up in the dictionary. There are many words, called synonyms, which have almost a like signification, nevertheless, when examined they express different shades of meaning and in some cases, instead of being close related, are widely divergent. Beware of such words, find their exact meaning and learn to use them in their right places.
To avoid repetition, it's worth reiterating some good advice: Listen to great speakers and pay careful attention to the words that resonate with you. Keep a notebook to write down words, phrases, and sentences that stand out as striking or unique. If you come across a word you don’t fully understand, look it up in the dictionary. Many words, known as synonyms, have similar meanings; however, when you look closer, they can convey different nuances and sometimes, instead of being closely related, are quite different. Be cautious with such words, find their precise meanings, and learn to use them correctly.
Be open to criticism, don't resent it but rather invite it and look upon those as friends who point out your defects in order that you may remedy them.
Be open to criticism; don’t take it personally but instead welcome it, and see those who point out your flaws as friends helping you improve.
CHAPTER XI
SLANG
Origin—American Slang—Foreign Slang
Slang is more or less common in nearly all ranks of society and in every walk of life at the present day. Slang words and expressions have crept into our everyday language, and so insiduously, that they have not been detected by the great majority of speakers, and so have become part and parcel of their vocabulary on an equal footing with the legitimate words of speech. They are called upon to do similar service as the ordinary words used in everyday conversation—to express thoughts and desires and convey meaning from one to another. In fact, in some cases, slang has become so useful that it has far outstripped classic speech and made for itself such a position in the vernacular that it would be very hard in some cases to get along without it. Slang words have usurped the place of regular words of language in very many instances and reign supreme in their own strength and influence.
Slang is pretty common across all levels of society and in every aspect of life today. Slang words and phrases have made their way into our everyday language so subtly that most people don't even notice, and they've become a natural part of how we speak, standing alongside standard vocabulary. They serve the same purpose as regular words in daily conversations—helping to express thoughts and desires and convey meaning between people. In fact, in some cases, slang has become so effective that it has surpassed traditional speech and established such a strong presence in everyday language that it can be hard to imagine getting by without it. Slang words have taken over the role of regular words in many situations and hold a powerful influence in their own right.
Cant and slang are often confused in the popular mind, yet they are not synonymous, though very closely allied, and proceeding from a common Gypsy origin. Cant is the language of a certain class—the peculiar phraseology or dialect of a certain craft, trade or profession, and is not readily understood save by the initiated of such craft, trade or profession. It may be correct, according to the rules of grammar, but it is not universal; it is confined to certain parts and localities and is only intelligible to those for whom it is intended. In short, it is an esoteric language which only the initiated can understand. The jargon, or patter, of thieves is cant and it is only understood by thieves who have been let into its significance; the initiated language of professional gamblers is cant, and is only intelligible to gamblers.
Cant and slang are often mixed up in people's minds, but they aren't the same thing, even though they are closely related and share a common Gypsy origin. Cant is the language used by a specific group—it's the unique way of speaking or jargon of a particular trade, profession, or craft, and it’s not easily understood by those outside of that group. It can be grammatically correct, but it’s not universal; it’s limited to certain areas and is only clear to those it’s meant for. In simple terms, it’s a specialized language that only the insiders can grasp. The jargon or talk used by thieves is cant, and it can only be understood by thieves who know its meaning; the insider language of professional gamblers is also cant, and it’s only clear to gamblers.
On the other hand, slang, as it is nowadays, belongs to no particular class but is scattered all over and gets entre into every kind of society and is understood by all where it passes current in everyday expression. Of course, the nature of the slang, to a great extent, depends upon the locality, as it chiefly is concerned with colloquialisms or words and phrases common to a particular section. For instance, the slang of London is slightly different from that of New York, and some words in the one city may be unintelligible in the other, though well understood in that in which they are current. Nevertheless, slang may be said to be universally understood. "To kick the bucket," "to cross the Jordan," "to hop the twig" are just as expressive of the departing from life in the backwoods of America or the wilds of Australia as they are in London or Dublin.
On the other hand, slang, as it is today, doesn't belong to any specific class but is spread everywhere and gets into all kinds of social groups, being understood by everyone where it's commonly used in everyday conversation. Of course, the nature of slang largely depends on the region, as it mainly involves colloquialisms or words and phrases that are common to a particular area. For example, the slang in London is slightly different from that in New York, and some words used in one city might not make sense in the other, even though they are well understood where they are commonly used. Still, slang can be considered universally understood. Phrases like "to kick the bucket," "to cross the Jordan," and "to hop the twig" convey the same meaning of passing away, whether in the backwoods of America or the outback of Australia, just as they do in London or Dublin.
Slang simply consists of words and phrases which pass current but are not refined, nor elegant enough, to be admitted into polite speech or literature whenever they are recognized as such. But, as has been said, a great many use slang without their knowing it as slang and incorporate it into their everyday speech and conversation.
Slang is basically words and phrases that are popular right now but aren't considered polished or sophisticated enough for formal speech or writing when they’re identified as such. However, as has been pointed out, many people use slang without realizing it and mix it into their daily conversations.
Some authors purposely use slang to give emphasis and spice in familiar and humorous writing, but they should not be imitated by the tyro. A master, such as Dickens, is forgivable, but in the novice it is unpardonable.
Some authors intentionally use slang to add emphasis and flavor to their casual and funny writing, but beginners shouldn't try to copy them. A master like Dickens can be forgiven, but it's not acceptable for a novice.
There are several kinds of slang attached to different professions and classes of society. For instance, there is college slang, political slang, sporting slang, etc. It is the nature of slang to circulate freely among all classes, yet there are several kinds of this current form of language corresponding to the several classes of society. The two great divisions of slang are the vulgar of the uneducated and coarse-minded, and the high-toned slang of the so-called upper classes—the educated and the wealthy. The hoyden of the gutter does not use the same slang as my lady in her boudoir, but both use it, and so expressive is it that the one might readily understand the other if brought in contact. Therefore, there are what may be styled an ignorant slang and an educated slang—the one common to the purlieus and the alleys, the other to the parlor and the drawing-room.
There are different kinds of slang linked to various professions and social classes. For example, there’s college slang, political slang, sporty slang, and so on. Slang naturally spreads among all classes, yet there are distinct types of this informal language that reflect the different social levels. The two main categories of slang are the crude language of the uneducated and less refined, and the more sophisticated slang used by the so-called upper classes—the educated and wealthy. The person from the streets doesn’t use the same slang as a lady in her private sitting room, but both do use it, and it’s so expressive that each could easily understand the other if they interacted. Thus, we can identify what might be called ignorant slang and educated slang—the former is common in the backstreets and alleys, while the latter is found in parlors and drawing rooms.
In all cases the object of slang is to express an idea in a more vigorous, piquant and terse manner than standard usage ordinarily admits. A school girl, when she wants to praise a baby, exclaims: "Oh, isn't he awfully cute!" To say that he is very nice would be too weak a way to express her admiration. When a handsome girl appears on the street an enthusiastic masculine admirer, to express his appreciation of her beauty, tells you: "She is a peach, a bird, a cuckoo," any of which accentuates his estimation of the young lady and is much more emphatic than saying: "She is a beautiful girl," "a handsome maiden," or "lovely young woman."
In all cases, the point of slang is to convey an idea in a more lively, striking, and concise way than standard language typically allows. A schoolgirl, when she wants to compliment a baby, exclaims, "Oh, isn't he super cute!" Saying he is very nice would be too weak to express her admiration. When a handsome girl walks down the street, an enthusiastic admirer, wanting to show his appreciation for her beauty, might say, "She's a total catch, a knockout, a stunner," any of which emphasizes his view of the young lady and is way more impactful than saying, "She is a beautiful girl," "a lovely maiden," or "a pretty young woman."
When a politician defeats his rival he will tell you "it was a cinch," he had a "walk-over," to impress you how easy it was to gain the victory.
When a politician beats his opponent, he'll tell you it was a "piece of cake" or a "cakewalk" to impress you with how easy it was to win.
Some slang expressions are of the nature of metaphors and are highly figurative. Such are "to pass in your checks," "to hold up," "to pull the wool over your eyes," "to talk through your hat," "to fire out," "to go back on," "to make yourself solid with," "to have a jag on," "to be loaded," "to freeze on to," "to bark up the wrong tree," "don't monkey with the buzz-saw," and "in the soup." Most slang had a bad origin. The greater part originated in the cant of thieves' Latin, but it broke away from this cant of malefactors in time and gradually evolved itself from its unsavory past until it developed into a current form of expressive speech. Some slang, however, can trace its origin back to very respectable sources.
Some slang expressions are metaphorical and quite figurative. Examples include "to pass in your checks," "to hold up," "to pull the wool over your eyes," "to talk through your hat," "to fire out," "to go back on," "to make yourself solid with," "to have a jag on," "to be loaded," "to freeze on to," "to bark up the wrong tree," "don't monkey with the buzz-saw," and "in the soup." Most slang has a questionable origin. A lot of it comes from the jargon of thieves' Latin, but over time it separated from that criminal background and evolved into a more acceptable form of expressive language. However, some slang can trace its roots back to very respectable sources.
"Stolen fruits are sweet" may be traced to the Bible in sentiment. Proverbs, ix:17 has it: "Stolen waters are sweet." "What are you giving me," supposed to be a thorough Americanism, is based upon Genesis, xxxviii:16. The common slang, "a bad man," in referring to Western desperadoes, in almost the identical sense now used, is found in Spenser's Faerie Queen, Massinger's play "A New Way to Pay Old Debts," and in Shakespeare's "King Henry VIII." The expression "to blow on," meaning to inform, is in Shakespeare's "As You Like it." "It's all Greek to me" is traceable to the play of "Julius Caesar." "All cry and no wool" is in Butler's "Hudibras." "Pious frauds," meaning hypocrites, is from the same source. "Too thin," referring to an excuse, is from Smollett's "Peregrine Pickle." Shakespeare also used it.
"Stolen fruits are sweet" can be traced back to the Bible in sentiment. Proverbs, ix:17 states: "Stolen waters are sweet." "What are you giving me," which is thought to be a true American expression, is based on Genesis, xxxviii:16. The common slang "a bad man," referring to Western outlaws, has a similar meaning to how it’s used now and can be found in Spenser's Faerie Queen, Massinger's play "A New Way to Pay Old Debts," and in Shakespeare's "King Henry VIII." The phrase "to blow on," meaning to inform, is in Shakespeare's "As You Like It." "It's all Greek to me" can be traced back to the play "Julius Caesar." "All cry and no wool" appears in Butler's "Hudibras." "Pious frauds," meaning hypocrites, comes from the same source. "Too thin," referring to an excuse, originates from Smollett's Peregrine Pickle. Shakespeare also used it.
America has had a large share in contributing to modern slang. "The heathen Chinee," and "Ways that are dark, and tricks that are vain," are from Bret Harte's Truthful James. "Not for Joe," arose during the Civil War when one soldier refused to give a drink to another. "Not if I know myself" had its origin in Chicago. "What's the matter with——? He's all right," had its beginning in Chicago also and first was "What's the matter with Hannah." referring to a lazy domestic servant. "There's millions in it," and "By a large majority" come from Mark Twain's Gilded Age. "Pull down your vest," "jim-jams," "got 'em bad," "that's what's the matter," "go hire a hall," "take in your sign," "dry up," "hump yourself," "it's the man around the corner," "putting up a job," "put a head on him," "no back talk," "bottom dollar," "went off on his ear," "chalk it down," "staving him off," "making it warm," "dropping him gently," "dead gone," "busted," "counter jumper," "put up or shut up," "bang up," "smart Aleck," "too much jaw," "chin-music," "top heavy," "barefooted on the top of the head," "a little too fresh," "champion liar," "chief cook and bottle washer," "bag and baggage," "as fine as silk," "name your poison," "died with his boots on," "old hoss," "hunkey dorey," "hold your horses," "galoot" and many others in use at present are all Americanisms in slang.
America has played a big role in shaping modern slang. "The heathen Chinee" and "Ways that are dark, and tricks that are vain" come from Bret Harte's Truthful James. "Not for Joe" emerged during the Civil War when one soldier refused to share a drink with another. "Not if I know myself" originated in Chicago. "What's the matter with——? He's all right," also started in Chicago and was originally "What's the matter with Hannah," referring to a lazy housemaid. "There's millions in it" and "By a large majority" are from Mark Twain's Gilded Age. Phrases like "Pull down your vest," "jim-jams," "got 'em bad," "that's what's the matter," "go hire a hall," "take in your sign," "dry up," "hump yourself," "it's the man around the corner," "putting up a job," "put a head on him," "no back talk," "bottom dollar," "went off on his ear," "chalk it down," "staving him off," "making it warm," "dropping him gently," "dead gone," "busted," "counter jumper," "put up or shut up," "bang up," "smart Aleck," "too much jaw," "chin-music," "top heavy," "barefooted on the top of the head," "a little too fresh," "champion liar," "chief cook and bottle washer," "bag and baggage," "as fine as silk," "name your poison," "died with his boots on," "old hoss," "hunkey dorey," "hold your horses," "galoot," and many others commonly used today are all American slang.
California especially has been most fecund in this class of figurative language. To this State we owe "go off and die," "don't you forget it," "rough deal," "square deal," "flush times," "pool your issues," "go bury yourself," "go drown yourself," "give your tongue a vacation," "a bad egg," "go climb a tree," "plug hats," "Dolly Vardens," "well fixed," "down to bed rock," "hard pan," "pay dirt," "petered out," "it won't wash," "slug of whiskey," "it pans out well," and "I should smile." "Small potatoes, and few in the hill," "soft snap," "all fired," "gol durn it," "an up-hill job," "slick," "short cut," "guess not," "correct thing" are Bostonisms. The terms "innocent," "acknowledge the corn," "bark up the wrong tree," "great snakes," "I reckon," "playing 'possum," "dead shot," had their origin in the Southern States. "Doggone it," "that beats the Dutch," "you bet," "you bet your boots," sprang from New York. "Step down and out" originated in the Beecher trial, just as "brain-storm" originated in the Thaw trial.
California has been particularly rich in this type of figurative language. We owe this state phrases like "go off and die," "don't you forget it," "rough deal," "square deal," "flush times," "pool your issues," "go bury yourself," "go drown yourself," "give your tongue a break," "a bad egg," "go climb a tree," "plug hats," "Dolly Vardens," "well fixed," "down to bedrock," "hard pan," "pay dirt," "petered out," "it won't wash," "slug of whiskey," "it pans out well," and "I should smile." Phrases like "small potatoes, and few in the hill," "soft snap," "all fired," "gol durn it," "an uphill job," "slick," "shortcut," "guess not," and "correct thing" come from Boston. The terms "innocent," "acknowledge the corn," "bark up the wrong tree," "great snakes," "I reckon," and "playing 'possum" originated in the Southern states. "Doggone it," "that beats the Dutch," "you bet," and "you bet your boots" came from New York. "Step down and out" originated in the Beecher trial, just like "brain-storm" came from the Thaw trial.
Among the slang phrases that have come directly to us from England may be mentioned "throw up the sponge," "draw it mild," "give us a rest," "dead beat," "on the shelf," "up the spout," "stunning," "gift of the gab," etc.
Among the slang phrases that have come directly to us from England are "throw in the towel," "take it easy," "give us a break," "washed up," "on the sidelines," "out of luck," "amazing," "gift of gab," etc.
The newspapers are responsible for a large part of the slang. Reporters, staff writers, and even editors, put words and phrases into the mouths of individuals which they never utter. New York is supposed to be the headquarters of slang, particularly that portion of it known as the Bowery. All transgressions and corruptions of language are supposed to originate in that unclassic section, while the truth is that the laws of polite English are as much violated on Fifth Avenue. Of course, the foreign element mincing their "pidgin" English have given the Bowery an unenviable reputation, but there are just as good speakers of the vernacular on the Bowery as elsewhere in the greater city. Yet every inexperienced newspaper reporter thinks that it is incumbent on him to hold the Bowery up to ridicule and laughter, so he sits down, and out of his circumscribed brain, mutilates the English tongue (he can rarely coin a word), and blames the mutilation on the Bowery.
The newspapers play a big role in the slang we hear today. Reporters, staff writers, and even editors put words and phrases in people's mouths that they never actually say. New York is thought to be the home of slang, especially the kind from the Bowery. It's believed that all misuses and twists of language come from that area, but the truth is that the rules of proper English are just as often broken on Fifth Avenue. Sure, the foreign community struggling with their "pidgin" English has given the Bowery a bad reputation, but there are just as many good speakers of the vernacular on the Bowery as anywhere else in the city. Still, every inexperienced newspaper reporter feels it’s their job to make fun of the Bowery, so they sit down, mess up the English language with their limited skills (they can barely come up with new words), and blame the mistakes on the Bowery.
'Tis the same with newspapers and authors, too, detracting the Irish race. Men and women who have never seen the green hills of Ireland, paint Irish characters as boors and blunderers and make them say ludicrous things and use such language as is never heard within the four walls of Ireland. 'Tis very well known that Ireland is the most learned country on the face of the earth—is, and has been. The schoolmaster has been abroad there for hundreds, almost thousands, of years, and nowhere else in the world to-day is the king's English spoken so purely as in the cities and towns of the little Western Isle.
It’s the same with newspapers and authors, too, belittling the Irish people. Men and women who have never set foot on the green hills of Ireland portray Irish characters as clumsy and foolish, making them say ridiculous things and use language that you’d never hear within Ireland’s borders. It’s widely known that Ireland is the most educated country in the world—it is and always has been. The schoolmaster has been teaching there for hundreds, almost thousands, of years, and nowhere else today is the king's English spoken as clearly as in the cities and towns of the little Western Isle.
Current events, happenings of everyday life, often give rise to slang words, and these, after a time, come into such general use that they take their places in everyday speech like ordinary words and, as has been said, their users forget that they once were slang. For instance, the days of the Land League in Ireland originated the word boycott, which was the name of a very unpopular landlord, Captain Boycott. The people refused to work for him, and his crops rotted on the ground. From this time any one who came into disfavor and whom his neighbors refused to assist in any way was said to be boycotted. Therefore to boycott means to punish by abandoning or depriving a person of the assistance of others. At first it was a notoriously slang word, but now it is standard in the English dictionaries.
Current events and daily life often lead to the creation of slang words, which eventually become widely accepted and used in regular conversation, to the point where people forget they were once considered slang. For example, during the era of the Land League in Ireland, the word boycott originated from the name of an unpopular landlord, Captain Boycott. The people refused to work for him, and his crops rotted in the fields. From that time on, anyone who fell out of favor and was shunned by their neighbors was said to be boycotted. So, to boycott means to punish someone by withdrawing support or assistance from them. Initially, it was a well-known slang term, but now it is recognized as standard in English dictionaries.
Politics add to our slang words and phrases. From this source we get "dark horse," "the gray mare is the better horse," "barrel of money," "buncombe," "gerrymander," "scalawag," "henchman," "logrolling," "pulling the wires," "taking the stump," "machine," "slate," etc.
Politics contribute to our slang words and phrases. From this, we get "dark horse," "the gray mare is the better horse," "barrel of money," "buncombe," "gerrymander," "scalawag," "henchman," "logrolling," "pulling the wires," "taking the stump," "machine," "slate," etc.
The money market furnishes us with "corner," "bull," "bear," "lamb," "slump," and several others.
The money market gives us terms like "corner," "bull," "bear," "lamb," "slump," and a few more.
The custom of the times and the requirements of current expression require the best of us to use slang words and phrases on occasions. Often we do not know they are slang, just as a child often uses profane words without consciousness of their being so. We should avoid the use of slang as much as possible, even when it serves to convey our ideas in a forceful manner. And when it has not gained a firm foothold in current speech it should be used not at all. Remember that most all slang is of vulgar origin and bears upon its face the bend sinister of vulgarity. Of the slang that is of good birth, pass it by if you can, for it is like a broken-down gentleman, of little good to any one. Imitate the great masters as much as you will in classical literature, but when it comes to their slang, draw the line. Dean Swift, the great Irish satirist, coined the word "phiz" for face. Don't imitate him. If you are speaking or writing of the beauty of a lady's face don't call it her "phiz." The Dean, as an intellectual giant, had a license to do so—you haven't. Shakespeare used the word "flush" to indicate plenty of money. Well, just remember there was only one Shakespeare, and he was the only one that had a right to use that word in that sense. You'll never be a Shakespeare, there will never be such another—Nature exhausted herself in producing him. Bulwer used the word "stretch" for hang, as to stretch his neck. Don't follow his example in such use of the word. Above all, avoid the low, coarse, vulgar slang, which is made to pass for wit among the riff-raff of the street. If you are speaking or writing of a person having died last night don't say or write: "He hopped the twig," or "he kicked the bucket." If you are compelled to listen to a person discoursing on a subject of which he knows little or nothing, don't say "He is talking through his hat." If you are telling of having shaken hands with Mr. Roosevelt don't say "He tipped me his flipper." If you are speaking of a wealthy man don't say "He has plenty of spondulix," or "the long green." All such slang is low, coarse and vulgar and is to be frowned upon on any and every occasion.
The customs of our time and the demands of modern communication sometimes require us to use slang words and phrases. Often, we don't even realize they are slang, just like a child might use bad words without understanding their implications. We should try to avoid using slang as much as we can, even if it helps express our ideas more strongly. And if a slang term hasn't become widely accepted in everyday speech, it should not be used at all. Keep in mind that most slang has a vulgar origin and carries a stigma of vulgarity. Even slang of good origin should be avoided if possible, as it's like a fallen gentleman, not really of use to anyone. While you can emulate the great masters of classical literature, you should draw the line at their slang. For example, Dean Swift, the notable Irish satirist, coined the term "phiz" for face. Don't imitate him. If you're talking or writing about the beauty of a woman's face, don't call it her "phiz." The Dean was a genius and had the freedom to do that—you don't. Shakespeare used "flush" to mean having plenty of money; just remember there was only one Shakespeare, and he was the only one allowed to use that word that way. You'll never be a Shakespeare; there will never be another one—Nature exhausted herself creating him. Bulwer used "stretch" in the sense of hanging, as in stretching his neck. Don't mimic that usage. Above all, avoid the low, crude, vulgar slang that tries to pass as witty among the riff-raff on the streets. If you’re talking about someone who died last night, don’t say "He hopped the twig," or "he kicked the bucket." If you have to listen to someone discussing a subject they know little about, don’t say, "He is talking through his hat." If you mention shaking hands with Mr. Roosevelt, don’t say "He tipped me his flipper." If you’re discussing a wealthy man, don’t say "He has plenty of spondulix," or "the long green." All of that slang is low, crude, and vulgar, and it should be avoided at all times.
If you use slang use the refined kind and use it like a gentleman, that it will not hurt or give offense to any one. Cardinal Newman defined a gentleman as he who never inflicts pain. Be a gentleman in your slang—never inflict pain.
If you're going to use slang, make sure it's the classy kind and use it like a gentleman, so it doesn't hurt or offend anyone. Cardinal Newman defined a gentleman as someone who never causes pain. Be a gentleman with your slang—never cause pain.
CHAPTER XII
WRITING FOR NEWSPAPERS
Qualification—Appropriate Subjects—Directions
The newspaper nowadays goes into every home in the land; what was formerly regarded as a luxury is now looked upon as a necessity. No matter how poor the individual, he is not too poor to afford a penny to learn, not alone what is taking place around him in his own immediate vicinity, but also what is happening in every quarter of the globe. The laborer on the street can be as well posted on the news of the day as the banker in his office. Through the newspaper he can feel the pulse of the country and find whether its vitality is increasing or diminishing; he can read the signs of the times and scan the political horizon for what concerns his own interests. The doings of foreign countries are spread before him and he can see at a glance the occurrences in the remotest corners of earth. If a fire occurred in London last night he can read about it at his breakfast table in New York this morning, and probably get a better account than the Londoners themselves. If a duel takes place in Paris he can read all about it even before the contestants have left the field.
The newspaper today reaches every home in the country; what once was seen as a luxury is now considered a necessity. No matter how poor someone is, they can still spare a penny to stay informed not just about what's happening nearby, but also around the globe. A laborer on the street can be just as informed about the day's news as a banker in his office. Through the newspaper, he can feel the pulse of the nation and determine whether its energy is increasing or decreasing; he can read the signs of the times and look at the political landscape that affects his own interests. News from foreign countries is laid out for him, allowing him to see at a glance what’s happening in the most distant parts of the world. If there was a fire in London last night, he can read about it at breakfast in New York this morning, probably getting a better account than the locals. If a duel happens in Paris, he can read all about it before the fighters have even left the scene.
There are upwards of 3,000 daily newspapers in the United States, more than 2,000 of which are published in towns containing less than 100,000 inhabitants. In fact, many places of less than 10,000 population can boast the publishing of a daily newspaper. There are more than 15,000 weeklies published. Some of the so-called country papers wield quite an influence in their localities, and even outside, and are money-making agencies for their owners and those connected with them, both by way of circulation and advertisements.
There are over 3,000 daily newspapers in the United States, more than 2,000 of which are published in towns with fewer than 100,000 residents. In fact, many towns with less than 10,000 people can proudly claim to have a daily newspaper. There are more than 15,000 weekly papers published. Some of the so-called country papers have significant influence in their communities and even beyond, serving as lucrative businesses for their owners and those associated with them, both through circulation and advertising.
It is surprising the number of people in this country who make a living in the newspaper field. Apart from the regular toilers there are thousands of men and women who make newspaper work a side issue, who add tidy sums of "pin money" to their incomes by occasional contributions to the daily, weekly and monthly press. Most of these people are only persons of ordinary, everyday ability, having just enough education to express themselves intelligently in writing.
It's surprising how many people in this country earn a living in the newspaper industry. Besides the regular workers, there are thousands of men and women who do newspaper work on the side, adding nice little sums of "extra cash" to their incomes through occasional contributions to daily, weekly, and monthly publications. Most of these individuals are just everyday people, with enough education to express themselves clearly in writing.
It is a mistake to imagine, as so many do, that an extended education is necessary for newspaper work. Not at all! On the contrary, in some cases, a high-class education is a hindrance, not a help in this direction. The general newspaper does not want learned disquisitions nor philosophical theses; as its name implies, it wants news, current news, interesting news, something to appeal to its readers, to arouse them and rivet their attention. In this respect very often a boy can write a better article than a college professor. The professor would be apt to use words beyond the capacity of most of the readers, while the boy, not knowing such words, would probably simply tell what he saw, how great the damage was, who were killed or injured, etc., and use language which all would understand.
It's a mistake to think, as many do, that a lot of education is necessary for newspaper work. Not at all! In fact, in some cases, a high-level education can actually be a disadvantage. The typical newspaper doesn't want extensive analyses or philosophical arguments; as the name suggests, it wants news—current news, interesting news—something that will catch its readers' attention and engage them. In this regard, a young person can often write a better article than a college professor. The professor might use complicated words that most readers wouldn’t understand, while the young person, lacking that vocabulary, would likely just describe what they saw, how severe the damage was, who was killed or injured, and so on, using language that everyone can grasp.
Of course, there are some brilliant scholars, deeply-read men and women in the newspaper realm, but, on the whole, those who have made the greatest names commenced ignorant enough and most of them graduated by way of the country paper. Some of the leading writers of England and America at the present time started their literary careers by contributing to the rural press. They perfected and polished themselves as they went along until they were able to make names for themselves in universal literature.
Of course, there are some brilliant scholars and well-read men and women in the newspaper world, but overall, those who have made the biggest names often started out quite ignorant, and most of them worked their way up through local papers. Some of the top writers in England and America today began their literary careers by contributing to the rural press. They honed their skills and improved themselves as they went along until they were able to establish their names in global literature.
If you want to contribute to newspapers or enter the newspaper field as a means of livelihood, don't let lack of a college or university education stand in your way. As has been said elsewhere in this book, some of the greatest masters of English literature were men who had but little advantage in the way of book learning. Shakespeare, Bunyan, Burns, and scores of others, who have left their names indelibly inscribed on the tablets of fame, had little to boast of in the way of book education, but they had what is popularly known as "horse" sense and a good working knowledge of the world; in other words, they understood human nature, and were natural themselves. Shakespeare understood mankind because he was himself a man; hence he has portrayed the feelings, the emotions, the passions with a master's touch, delineating the king in his palace as true to nature as he has done the peasant in his hut. The monitor within his own breast gave him warning as to what was right and what was wrong, just as the daemon ever by the side of old Socrates whispered in his ear the course to pursue under any and all circumstances. Burns guiding the plough conceived thoughts and clothed them in a language which has never, nor probably never will be, surpassed by all the learning which art can confer. These men were natural, and it was the perfection of this naturality that wreathed their brows with the never-fading laurels of undying fame.
If you want to write for newspapers or get into the newspaper industry for a living, don’t let a lack of a college education hold you back. As mentioned elsewhere in this book, some of the greatest masters of English literature had very little formal education. Shakespeare, Bunyan, Burns, and many others who have left their mark on history had little to brag about regarding book learning, but they had what’s commonly referred to as “common sense” and a solid understanding of the world; in other words, they understood human nature and were genuine themselves. Shakespeare understood people because he was one; that’s why he portrayed feelings, emotions, and passions with a masterful touch, depicting the king in his palace just as truthfully as the peasant in his hut. The inner voice guided him about what was right and wrong, much like the daemon that accompanied Socrates, whispering the right path to follow in any situation. Burns, while guiding his plow, conceived thoughts and expressed them in a way that has never been surpassed—and likely never will be—by all the education art can offer. These men were authentic, and it was the excellence of this authenticity that crowned them with the timeless laurels of everlasting fame.
If you would essay to write for the newspaper you must be natural and express yourself in your accustomed way without putting on airs or frills; you must not ape ornaments and indulge in bombast or rhodomontade which stamp a writer as not only superficial but silly. There is no room for such in the everyday newspaper. It wants facts stated in plain, unvarnished, unadorned language. True, you should read the best authors and, as far as possible, imitate their style, but don't try to literally copy them. Be yourself on every occasion—no one else.
If you want to write for the newspaper, you need to be natural and express yourself in your usual way without trying to be fancy or showy; don’t mimic embellishments or use grandiose language that makes a writer seem not only shallow but also foolish. There’s no place for that in everyday journalism. It needs facts presented in straightforward, clear, and simple language. Sure, you should read great authors and try to adopt their style as much as you can, but don’t attempt to copy them exactly. Be yourself every time—don’t be anyone else.
Not like Homer would I write, Not like Dante if I might, Not like Shakespeare at his best, Not like Goethe or the rest, Like myself, however small, Like myself, or not at all.
Not like Homer would I write, Not like Dante if I could, Not like Shakespeare at his best, Not like Goethe or the others, Like myself, however small, Like myself, or not at all.
Put yourself in place of the reader and write what will interest yourself and in such a way that your language will appeal to your own ideas of the fitness of things. You belong to the great commonplace majority, therefore don't forget that in writing for the newspapers you are writing for that majority and not for the learned and aesthetic minority.
Put yourself in the reader's shoes and write what would interest you, using language that matches your own sense of what is appropriate. You are part of the great everyday majority, so remember that when writing for the newspapers, you are writing for that majority and not for the academic and artistic minority.
Remember you are writing for the man on the street and in the street car, you want to interest him, to compel him to read what you have to say. He does not want a display of learning; he wants news about something which concerns himself, and you must tell it to him in a plain, simple manner just as you would do if you were face to face with him.
Remember, you’re writing for the average person on the street and in the streetcar. You want to grab their attention and make them want to read what you have to say. They’re not looking for a show of knowledge; they want news that matters to them, and you need to convey it in a straightforward, simple way, just like you would if you were talking to them in person.
What can you write about? Why about anything that will constitute current news, some leading event of the day, anything that will appeal to the readers of the paper to which you wish to submit it. No matter in what locality you may live, however backward it may be, you can always find something of genuine human interest to others. If there is no news happening, write of something that appeals to yourself. We are all constituted alike, and the chances are that what will interest you will interest others. Descriptions of adventure are generally acceptable. Tell of a fox hunt, or a badger hunt, or a bear chase.
What can you write about? Well, you can write about anything that counts as current news, any major event of the day, anything that will grab the attention of the readers of the publication you want to submit to. No matter where you live, no matter how remote it might be, you can always find something of real human interest to share with others. If nothing newsworthy is happening, write about something that resonates with you. We're all pretty similar, and chances are that what interests you will also interest others. Stories about adventures are usually well-received. Share an experience from a fox hunt, a badger hunt, or a bear chase.
If there is any important manufacturing plant in your neighborhood describe it and, if possible, get photographs, for photography plays a very important part in the news items of to-day. If a "great" man lives near you, one whose name is on the tip of every tongue, go and get an interview with him, obtain his views on the public questions of the day, describe his home life and his surroundings and how he spends his time.
If there's an important manufacturing plant in your area, describe it and, if you can, take some photos, since photography is a crucial part of today’s news. If a "great" person lives nearby, someone whose name everyone knows, go interview him, get his thoughts on current public issues, describe his home life, his environment, and how he spends his time.
Try and strike something germane to the moment, something that stands out prominently in the limelight of the passing show. If a noted personage, some famous man or woman, is visiting the country, it is a good time to write up the place from which he or she comes and the record he or she has made there. For instance, it was opportune to write of Sulu and the little Pacific archipelago during the Sultan's trip through the country. If an attempt is made to blow up an American battleship, say, in the harbor of Appia, in Samoa, it affords a chance to write about Samoa and Robert Louis Stephenson. When Manuel was hurled from the throne of Portugal it was a ripe time to write of Portugal and Portuguese affairs. If any great occurrence is taking place in a foreign country such as the crowning of a king or the dethronement of a monarch, it is a good time to write up the history of the country and describe the events leading up to the main issue. When a particularly savage outbreak occurs amongst wild tribes in the dependencies, such as a rising of the Manobos in the Philippines, it is opportune to write of such tribes and their surroundings, and the causes leading up to the revolt.
Try to find something relevant to the moment, something that really stands out in the spotlight of current events. If a well-known figure, like a famous man or woman, is visiting the country, it's a great time to write about their home and the achievements they've made there. For example, it was a good opportunity to write about Sulu and the small Pacific archipelago during the Sultan's visit. If there's an attempt to blow up an American battleship, say, in the harbor of Appia in Samoa, that’s a chance to write about Samoa and Robert Louis Stevenson. When Manuel was ousted from the throne of Portugal, it was the perfect time to discuss Portugal and its affairs. If a significant event is happening in a foreign country, like the crowning of a king or the dethronement of a monarch, it’s a good time to write about the history of that country and describe the events leading up to the main event. When there’s a particularly violent uprising among wild tribes in the colonies, like a revolt by the Manobos in the Philippines, it’s a fitting time to write about those tribes and their environment, as well as the reasons behind the uprising.
Be constantly on the lookout for something that will suit the passing hour, read the daily papers and probably in some obscure corner you may find something that will serve you as a foundation for a good article—something, at least, that will give you a clue.
Always keep an eye out for something that fits the moment, read the daily news, and you might discover something in a lesser-known section that can serve as a basis for a solid article—at the very least, it will give you a hint.
Be circumspect in your selection of a paper to which to submit your copy. Know the tone and general import of the paper, its social leanings and political affiliations, also its religious sentiments, and, in fact, all the particulars you can regarding it. It would be injudicious for you to send an article on a prize fight to a religious paper or, vice versa, an account of a church meeting to the editor of a sporting sheet.
Be careful when choosing a publication to submit your work. Understand the tone and overall purpose of the publication, its social views and political stances, as well as its religious beliefs, and gather as many details as you can about it. It wouldn't make sense to send an article about a boxing match to a religious publication or, vice versa, a report on a church meeting to the editor of a sports magazine.
If you get your copy back don't be disappointed nor yet disheartened. Perseverance counts more in the newspaper field than anywhere else, and only perseverance wins in the long run. You must become resilient; if you are pressed down, spring up again. No matter how many rebuffs you may receive, be not discouraged but call fresh energy to your assistance and make another stand. If the right stuff is in you it is sure to be discovered; your light will not remain long hidden under a bushel in the newspaper domain. If you can deliver the goods editors will soon be begging you instead of your begging them. Those men are constantly on the lookout for persons who can make good.
If you get your copy back, don’t be discouraged or downhearted. Sticking with it matters more in the newspaper world than anywhere else, and only those who keep trying will succeed in the end. You need to become tough; if you get pushed down, bounce back up. No matter how many times you face rejection, don’t lose hope; instead, find new energy and make another effort. If you have what it takes, it will definitely be noticed; your talent won’t stay hidden for long in the newspaper industry. If you can deliver results, editors will soon be seeking you out rather than the other way around. They're always on the lookout for people who can deliver.
Once you get into print the battle is won, for it will be an incentive to you to persevere and improve yourself at every turn. Go over everything you write, cut and slash and prune until you get it into as perfect form as possible. Eliminate every superfluous word and be careful to strike out all ambiguous expressions and references.
Once your work is published, the fight is over, because it will motivate you to keep pushing yourself and getting better all the time. Review everything you write, trim it down and refine it until it’s in the best shape possible. Remove every unnecessary word and make sure to delete all vague phrases and references.
If you are writing for a weekly paper remember it differs from a daily one. Weeklies want what will not alone interest the man on the street, but the woman at the fireside; they want out-of-the-way facts, curious scraps of lore, personal notes of famous or eccentric people, reminiscences of exciting experiences, interesting gleanings in life's numberless by-ways, in short, anything that will entertain, amuse, instruct the home circle. There is always something occurring in your immediate surroundings, some curious event or thrilling episode that will furnish you with data for an article. You must know the nature of the weekly to which you submit your copy the same as you must know the daily. For instance, the Christian Herald, while avowedly a religious weekly, treats such secular matter as makes the paper appeal to all. On its religious side it is non-sectarian, covering the broad field of Christianity throughout the world; on its secular side it deals with human events in such an impartial way that every one, no matter to what class they may belong or to what creed they may subscribe, can take a living, personal interest.
If you’re writing for a weekly paper, remember it’s different from a daily one. Weeklies want content that will not only interest the man on the street but also the woman at home; they look for unique facts, interesting bits of trivia, personal stories about famous or quirky people, memories of exciting experiences, and intriguing insights from the many paths of life—basically, anything that will entertain, amuse, and educate the home audience. There’s always something happening around you, some unusual event or exciting moment that can provide material for an article. You need to understand the nature of the weekly you’re submitting to just like you would with a daily. For instance, the Christian Herald, while clearly a religious weekly, also includes secular topics that appeal to everyone. On its religious side, it is non-sectarian, covering a wide range of Christianity around the globe; on its secular side, it addresses human events in a way that everyone, regardless of their background or beliefs, can find engaging and relatable.
The monthlies offer another attractive field for the literary aspirant. Here, again, don't think you must be an university professor to write for a monthly magazine. Many, indeed most, of the foremost magazine contributors are men and women who have never passed through a college except by going in at the front door and emerging from the back one. However, for the most part, they are individuals of wide experience who know the practical side of life as distinguished from the theoretical.
The monthly magazines present another appealing opportunity for anyone looking to write. Don't assume you need to be a college professor to contribute to a monthly magazine. In fact, many of the leading contributors are people who have never set foot in a college beyond walking in the front door and out the back. However, most of them have a wealth of experience and understand the practical side of life, as opposed to just the theoretical.
The ordinary monthly magazine treats of the leading questions and issues which are engaging the attention of the world for the moment, great inventions, great discoveries, whatever is engrossing the popular mind for the time being, such as flying machines, battleships, sky-scrapers, the opening of mines, the development of new lands, the political issues, views of party leaders, character sketches of distinguished personages, etc. However, before trying your skill for a monthly magazine it would be well for you to have a good apprenticeship in writing for the daily press.
The regular monthly magazine covers the major questions and issues that are capturing the world's attention right now, including significant inventions, groundbreaking discoveries, and anything that's currently on people's minds, like airplanes, battleships, skyscrapers, new mining operations, the exploration of new territories, political issues, opinions from party leaders, and profiles of notable individuals, among other topics. However, before you attempt to write for a monthly magazine, it would be wise to gain some experience writing for daily newspapers.
Above all things, remember that perseverance is the key that opens the door of success. Persevere! If you are turned down don't get disheartened; on the contrary, let the rebuff act as a stimulant to further effort. Many of the most successful writers of our time have been turned down again and again. For days and months, and even years, some of them have hawked their wares from one literary door to another until they found a purchaser. You may be a great writer in embryo, but you will never develop into a fetus, not to speak of full maturity, unless you bring out what is in you. Give yourself a chance to grow and seize upon everything that will enlarge the scope of your horizon. Keep your eyes wide open and there is not a moment of the day in which you will not see something to interest you and in which you may be able to interest others. Learn, too, how to read Nature's book. There's a lesson in everything—in the stones, the grass, the trees, the babbling brooks and the singing birds. Interpret the lesson for yourself, then teach it to others. Always be in earnest in your writing; go about it in a determined kind of way, don't be faint-hearted or backward, be brave, be brave, and evermore be brave.
Above all, remember that perseverance is the key that unlocks the door to success. Keep going! If you get rejected, don’t let it discourage you; instead, use the setback as motivation to try harder. Many of today’s most successful writers faced countless rejections. For days, months, and even years, some of them have gone from one publisher to another until they found someone to buy their work. You might be a great writer in the making, but you'll never fully develop unless you express what’s inside you. Give yourself the chance to grow and grab every opportunity that will broaden your perspective. Keep your eyes wide open, and you’ll find something interesting every moment of the day that could captivate others. Also, learn to read nature's book. There’s a lesson in everything—in the stones, the grass, the trees, the flowing streams, and the singing birds. Understand the lesson for yourself, and then share it with others. Always write with sincerity; approach it with determination, don’t be timid or hesitant, be brave, be brave, and always be brave.
On the wide, tented field in the battle of life, With an army of millions before you; Like a hero of old gird your soul for the strife And let not the foeman tramp o'er you; Act, act like a soldier and proudly rush on The most valiant in Bravery's van, With keen, flashing sword cut your way to the front And show to the world you're a Man.
On the broad, open field in the struggle of life, With millions standing before you; Like a hero from the past, prepare your spirit for the fight And don’t let the enemy walk all over you; Act, act like a soldier and charge forward with pride, The bravest at the forefront of courage, With your sharp, gleaming sword carve a path ahead And prove to the world that you’re a Man.
If you are of the masculine gender be a man in all things in the highest and best acceptation of the word. That is the noblest title you can boast, higher far than that of earl or duke, emperor or king. In the same way womanhood is the grandest crown the feminine head can wear. When the world frowns on you and everything seems to go wrong, possess your soul in patience and hope for the dawn of a brighter day. It will come. The sun is always shining behind the darkest clouds. When you get your manuscripts back again and again, don't despair, nor think the editor cruel and unkind. He, too, has troubles of his own. Keep up your spirits until you have made the final test and put your talents to a last analysis, then if you find you cannot get into print be sure that newspaper writing or literary work is not your forte, and turn to something else. If nothing better presents itself, try shoemaking or digging ditches. Remember honest labor, no matter how humble, is ever dignified. If you are a woman throw aside the pen, sit down and darn your brother's, your father's, or your husband's socks, or put on a calico apron, take soap and water and scrub the floor. No matter who you are do something useful. That old sophistry about the world owing you a living has been exploded long ago. The world does not owe you a living, but you owe it servitude, and if you do not pay the debt you are not serving the purpose of an all-wise Providence and filling the place for which you were created. It is for you to serve the world, to make it better, brighter, higher, holier, grander, nobler, richer, for your having lived in it. This you can do in no matter what position fortune has cast you, whether it be that of street laborer or president. Fight the good fight and gain the victory.
If you're a man, be a man in every way that matters. That's the most honorable title you can have, far more significant than being an earl, duke, emperor, or king. Similarly, being a woman is the greatest honor for a feminine identity. When the world turns against you and everything feels like a mess, remain patient and hope for a brighter day ahead. It will come. The sun is always shining behind the darkest clouds. When your manuscripts keep getting rejected, don’t lose hope or think the editor is cruel. They have their own challenges too. Stay positive until you’ve truly tested your talents. If you realize you can't get published, then maybe writing or literary work isn't your strength, and it's time to explore something else. If nothing better comes along, consider shoemaking or digging ditches. Remember, honest work, no matter how simple, is always respectable. If you're a woman, set the pen aside, and take care of your brother's, father's, or husband's socks, or put on an apron, grab some soap and water, and clean the floor. No matter who you are, do something productive. That old belief that the world owes you a living has been debunked long ago. The world doesn't owe you anything, but you owe it your effort, and if you fail to give it, you’re not fulfilling your purpose. It’s up to you to serve the world and make it better, brighter, higher, holier, and nobler because you lived in it. You can do this no matter your situation, whether you’re a street worker or a president. Fight the good fight and achieve victory.
"Above all, to thine own self be true, And 'twill follow as the night the day, Thou canst not then be false to any man."
"Above all, be true to yourself, And it will follow just like night follows day, You cannot then be false to anyone."
CHAPTER XIII
CHOICE OF WORDS
Small Words—Their Importance—The Anglo-Saxon Element
In another place in this book advice has been given to never use a long word when a short one will serve the same purpose. This advice is to be emphasized. Words of "learned length and thundering sound" should be avoided on all possible occasions. They proclaim shallowness of intellect and vanity of mind. The great purists, the masters of diction, the exemplars of style, used short, simple words that all could understand; words about which there could be no ambiguity as to meaning. It must be remembered that by our words we teach others; therefore, a very great responsibility rests upon us in regard to the use of a right language. We must take care that we think and speak in a way so clear that there may be no misapprehension or danger of conveying wrong impressions by vague and misty ideas enunciated in terms which are liable to be misunderstood by those whom we address. Words give a body or form to our ideas, without which they are apt to be so foggy that we do not see where they are weak or false. We must make the endeavor to employ such words as will put the idea we have in our own mind into the mind of another. This is the greatest art in the world—to clothe our ideas in words clear and comprehensive to the intelligence of others. It is the art which the teacher, the minister, the lawyer, the orator, the business man, must master if they would command success in their various fields of endeavor. It is very hard to convey an idea to, and impress it on, another when he has but a faint conception of the language in which the idea is expressed; but it is impossible to convey it at all when the words in which it is clothed are unintelligible to the listener.
In another part of this book, there's advice that says you should never use a long word when a short one can do the job just as well. This advice is important. Words that are overly complicated and sound impressive should be avoided whenever possible. They show a lack of depth and arrogance. The greatest purists, the masters of language, and the models of style used short, simple words that everyone could understand; words that had no ambiguity in their meaning. It's important to remember that our words teach others; therefore, we carry a significant responsibility regarding our language. We must ensure that we think and communicate clearly so there's no misunderstanding or chance of giving the wrong impression with vague and unclear ideas expressed in ways that could be misinterpreted by our audience. Words give shape to our thoughts; without them, our ideas can be so unclear that we can't see their weaknesses or flaws. We must strive to use words that effectively convey the ideas we have in our minds to others. This is the greatest skill in the world—to express our ideas in words that are clear and understandable to others. This is the skill that teachers, ministers, lawyers, speakers, and businesspeople must master if they want to succeed in their fields. It's very challenging to share an idea with someone who has only a vague understanding of the language used to express it; but it's impossible to share it at all if the words used are not clear to the listener.
If we address an audience of ordinary men and women in the English language, but use such words as they cannot comprehend, we might as well speak to them in Coptic or Chinese, for they will derive no benefit from our address, inasmuch as the ideas we wish to convey are expressed in words which communicate no intelligent meaning to their minds.
If we speak to everyday people in English but use words they can’t understand, we might as well be speaking in Coptic or Chinese, because they won’t gain anything from what we’re saying since the ideas we want to share are expressed in words that don’t make any sense to them.
Long words, learned words, words directly derived from other languages are only understood by those who have had the advantages of an extended education. All have not had such advantages. The great majority in this grand and glorious country of ours have to hustle for a living from an early age. Though education is free, and compulsory also, very many never get further than the "Three R's." These are the men with whom we have to deal most in the arena of life, the men with the horny palms and the iron muscles, the men who build our houses, construct our railroads, drive our street cars and trains, till our fields, harvest our crops—in a word, the men who form the foundation of all society, the men on whom the world depends to make its wheels go round. The language of the colleges and universities is not for them and they can get along very well without it; they have no need for it at all in their respective callings. The plain, simple words of everyday life, to which the common people have been used around their own firesides from childhood, are the words we must use in our dealings with them.
Long words, fancy words, and terms borrowed from other languages are only understood by those who have had the privilege of a higher education. Not everyone has had that opportunity. The majority in our great country have to work hard for a living from a young age. Although education is free and mandatory, many never go beyond the basics. These are the people we deal with most in everyday life—the hard-working individuals with calloused hands and strong muscles, the ones who build our homes, lay our railroads, drive our streetcars and trains, farm our fields, and harvest our crops—in short, the people who are the backbone of society, the ones on whom the world relies to keep things running smoothly. The language of colleges and universities isn't meant for them, and they get along just fine without it; they don't need it at all in their jobs. The straightforward, simple words of daily life, which common people have known since childhood around their own homes, are the words we should use when interacting with them.
Such words are understood by them and understood by the learned as well; why then not use them universally and all the time? Why make a one-sided affair of language by using words which only one class of the people, the so-called learned class, can understand? Would it not be better to use, on all occasions, language which the both classes can understand? If we take the trouble to investigate we shall find that the men who exerted the greatest sway over the masses and the multitude as orators, lawyers, preachers and in other public capacities, were men who used very simple language. Daniel Webster was among the greatest orators this country has produced. He touched the hearts of senates and assemblages, of men and women with the burning eloquence of his words. He never used a long word when he could convey the same, or nearly the same, meaning with a short one. When he made a speech he always told those who put it in form for the press to strike out every long word. Study his speeches, go over all he ever said or wrote, and you will find that his language was always made up of short, clear, strong terms, although at times, for the sake of sound and oratorical effect, he was compelled to use a rather long word, but it was always against his inclination to do so, and where was the man who could paint, with words, as Webster painted! He could picture things in a way so clear that those who heard him felt that they had seen that of which he spoke.
They understand such words, and so do the educated; so why not use them all the time and for everyone? Why make language a one-sided thing by choosing words that only a specific group, the so-called educated class, can grasp? Wouldn't it be better to use language that everyone can understand on every occasion? If we take the time to look into it, we’ll see that the people who had the most influence over the masses—like orators, lawyers, preachers, and others in public roles—were those who used very simple language. Daniel Webster was one of the greatest orators this country has seen. He moved the hearts of senators and crowds, both men and women, with the powerful eloquence of his words. He never used a long word when he could express the same or nearly the same idea with a shorter one. When giving a speech, he always instructed those who transcribed it for publication to remove every long word. If you study his speeches, going over everything he ever said or wrote, you'll find that his language was always made up of short, clear, strong terms. Although sometimes, for the sake of rhythm and impact, he had to use a longer word, it was always against his preference. And who could express ideas with words as vividly as Webster did! He could describe things in such a clear way that those who listened felt as if they had witnessed what he was talking about.
Abraham Lincoln was another who stirred the souls of men, yet he was not an orator, not a scholar; he did not write M.A. or Ph.D. after his name, or any other college degree, for he had none. He graduated from the University of Hard Knocks, and he never forgot this severe Alma Mater when he became President of the United States. He was just as plain, I just as humble, as in the days when he split rails or plied a boat on the Sangamon. He did not use big words, but he used the words of the people, and in such a way as to make them beautiful. His Gettysburg address is an English classic, one of the great masterpieces of the language.
Abraham Lincoln was another person who inspired others, yet he wasn’t a great speaker or a scholar; he didn’t have an M.A. or Ph.D. after his name, or any other college degree, because he had none. He graduated from the University of Hard Knocks, and he never forgot this tough Alma Mater when he became President of the United States. He was just as down-to-earth, just as humble, as he was in the days when he split rails or rowed a boat on the Sangamon. He didn’t use fancy words, but he spoke the language of the people in a way that made them beautiful. His Gettysburg address is an English classic, one of the great masterpieces of the language.
From the mere fact that a word is short it does not follow that it is always clear, but it is true that nearly all clear words are short, and that most of the long words, especially those which we get from other languages, are misunderstood to a great extent by the ordinary rank and file of the people. Indeed, it is to be doubted if some of the "scholars" using them, fully understand their import on occasions. A great many such words admit of several interpretations. A word has to be in use a great deal before people get thoroughly familiar with its meaning. Long words, not alone obscure thought and make the ideas hazy, but at times they tend to mix up things in such a way that positively harmful results follow from their use.
Just because a word is short doesn't mean it's always clear, but it's true that almost all clear words are short, and most long words, especially those borrowed from other languages, are often misunderstood by the average person. In fact, it's questionable whether some "scholars" using these words fully grasp their meaning at times. Many of these words can have multiple interpretations. A word needs to be used a lot before people really get familiar with what it means. Long words not only confuse thoughts and make ideas unclear, but sometimes they also muddle things in a way that can lead to negative consequences from their use.
For instance, crime can be so covered with the folds of long words as to give it a different appearance. Even the hideousness of sin can be cloaked with such words until its outlines look like a thing of beauty. When a bank cashier makes off with a hundred thousand dollars we politely term his crime defalcation instead of plain theft, and instead of calling himself a thief we grandiosely allude to him as a defaulter. When we see a wealthy man staggering along a fashionable thoroughfare under the influence of alcohol, waving his arms in the air and shouting boisterously, we smile and say, poor gentleman, he is somewhat exhilarated; or at worst we say, he is slightly inebriated; but when we see a poor man who has fallen from grace by putting an "enemy into his mouth to steal away his brain" we express our indignation in the simple language of the words: "Look at the wretch; he is dead drunk."
For example, crime can be so dressed up with fancy words that it looks different. Even the ugliness of sin can be hidden behind these words until it seems beautiful. When a bank cashier steals a hundred thousand dollars, we politely call his crime defalcation instead of just saying theft, and instead of calling him a thief, we grandly refer to him as a defaulter. When we see a rich man stumbling down a trendy street, drunk and waving his arms while shouting loudly, we smile and say, poor guy, he is a bit exhilarated; or at worst we say, he is slightly inebriated; but when we see a poor man who has fallen from grace for putting a "drink in his mouth to steal away his brain," we show our outrage using simple words: "Look at the wretch; he is dead drunk."
When we find a person in downright lying we cover the falsehood with the finely-spun cloak of the word prevarication. Shakespeare says, "a rose by any other name would smell as sweet," and by a similar sequence, a lie, no matter by what name you may call it, is always a lie and should be condemned; then why not simply call it a lie? Mean what you say and say what you mean; call a spade a spade, it is the best term you can apply to the implement.
When we catch someone in a blatant lie, we disguise the falsehood with the fancy term prevarication. Shakespeare said, "a rose by any other name would smell as sweet," and in the same way, a lie, no matter what you call it, is still a lie and should be called out; so why not just call it a lie? Be straightforward and direct; call a spade a spade, it's the most accurate name for the tool.
When you try to use short words and shun long ones in a little while you will find that you can do so with ease. A farmer was showing a horse to a city-bred gentleman. The animal was led into a paddock in which an old sow-pig was rooting. "What a fine quadruped!" exclaimed the city man.
When you try to use short words and avoid long ones for a while, you'll see that it becomes easy. A farmer was showing a horse to a city gentleman. The horse was brought into a paddock where an old pig was foraging. "What a beautiful creature!" exclaimed the city man.
"Which of the two do you mean, the pig or the horse?" queried the farmer, "for, in my opinion, both of them are fine quadrupeds."
"Which one are you talking about, the pig or the horse?" asked the farmer. "Because, in my opinion, they're both great animals."
Of course the visitor meant the horse, so it would have been much better had he called the animal by its simple; ordinary name—, there would have been no room for ambiguity in his remark. He profited, however, by the incident, and never called a horse a quadruped again.
Of course, the visitor was referring to the horse, so it would have been much better if he had just called the animal by its simple, everyday name—there wouldn’t have been any confusion in his statement. He did benefit from the situation, though, and never referred to a horse as a quadruped again.
Most of the small words, the simple words, the beautiful words which express so much within small bounds belong to the pure Anglo-Saxon element of our language. This element has given names to the heavenly bodies, the sun, moon and stars; to three out of the four elements, earth, fire and water; three out of the four seasons, spring, summer and winter. Its simple words are applied to all the natural divisions of time, except one, as day, night, morning, evening, twilight, noon, mid-day, midnight, sunrise and sunset. The names of light, heat, cold, frost, rain, snow, hail, sleet, thunder, lightning, as well as almost all those objects which form the component parts of the beautiful, as expressed in external scenery, such as sea and land, hill and dale, wood and stream, etc., are Anglo-Saxon. To this same language we are indebted for those words which express the earliest and dearest connections, and the strongest and most powerful feelings of Nature, and which, as a consequence, are interwoven with the fondest and most hallowed associations. Of such words are father, mother, husband, wife, brother, sister, son, daughter, child, home, kindred, friend, hearth, roof and fireside.
Most of the small words, the simple words, the beautiful words that express so much in such a compact way come from the pure Anglo-Saxon part of our language. This part has given names to the celestial bodies, like the sun, moon, and stars; to three out of the four elements: earth, fire, and water; and three out of the four seasons: spring, summer, and winter. Its simple words are used for all the natural divisions of time, except one, like day, night, morning, evening, twilight, noon, mid-day, midnight, sunrise, and sunset. The names for light, heat, cold, frost, rain, snow, hail, sleet, thunder, and lightning, as well as almost all the words for the components of beauty seen in nature, like sea, land, hill, valley, wood, and stream, are Anglo-Saxon. We also owe to this language the words that express our earliest and deepest connections and the strongest and most intense feelings of nature, which are naturally tied to our most cherished and sacred associations. These words include father, mother, husband, wife, brother, sister, son, daughter, child, home, family, friend, hearth, roof, and fireside.
The chief emotions of which we are susceptible are expressed in the same language—love, hope, fear, sorrow, shame, and also the outward signs by which these emotions are indicated, as tear, smile, laugh, blush, weep, sigh, groan. Nearly all our national proverbs are Anglo-Saxon. Almost all the terms and phrases by which we most energetically express anger, contempt and indignation are of the same origin.
The main emotions we feel are expressed in the same way—love, hope, fear, sorrow, shame—and also through physical signs that show these feelings, like tears, smiles, laughter, blushing, weeping, sighing, and groaning. Almost all of our national proverbs come from Anglo-Saxon roots. Most of the words and phrases we use to express anger, contempt, and indignation also come from the same origin.
What are known as the Smart Set and so-called polite society, are relegating a great many of our old Anglo-Saxon words into the shade, faithful friends who served their ancestors well. These self-appointed arbiters of diction regard some of the Anglo-Saxon words as too coarse, too plebeian for their aesthetic tastes and refined ears, so they are eliminating them from their vocabulary and replacing them with mongrels of foreign birth and hybrids of unknown origin. For the ordinary people, however, the man in the street or in the field, the woman in the kitchen or in the factory, they are still tried and true and, like old friends, should be cherished and preferred to all strangers, no matter from what source the latter may spring.
The Smart Set and what they call polite society are pushing a lot of our old Anglo-Saxon words into the background, words that served their ancestors well. These self-appointed language judges consider some Anglo-Saxon words too crude and common for their refined tastes, so they’re getting rid of them and replacing them with foreign words and hybrids of unknown origin. For regular people—the man on the street or in the field, the woman in the kitchen or at work—these words are still reliable and, like old friends, should be valued and preferred over any strangers, regardless of where they come from.
CHAPTER XIV
ENGLISH LANGUAGE
Beginning—Different Sources—The Present
The English language is the tongue now current in England and her colonies throughout the world and also throughout the greater part of the United States of America. It sprang from the German tongue spoken by the Teutons, who came over to Britain after the conquest of that country by the Romans. These Teutons comprised Angles, Saxons, Jutes and several other tribes from the northern part of Germany. They spoke different dialects, but these became blended in the new country, and the composite tongue came to be known as the Anglo-Saxon which has been the main basis for the language as at present constituted and is still the prevailing element. Therefore those who are trying to do away with some of the purely Anglo-Saxon words, on the ground that they are not refined enough to express their aesthetic ideas, are undermining main props which are necessary for the support of some important parts in the edifice of the language.
The English language is the language currently spoken in England and its colonies around the world, as well as in most of the United States of America. It originated from the German language spoken by the Teutons, who arrived in Britain after the Romans conquered the area. These Teutons included the Angles, Saxons, Jutes, and several other tribes from northern Germany. They spoke different dialects, but these mixed together in the new country, creating a language known as Anglo-Saxon, which forms the main foundation of the language as we know it today and remains a dominant element. Therefore, those trying to eliminate some purely Anglo-Saxon words because they consider them not refined enough to convey their aesthetic ideas are weakening essential supports that are necessary for maintaining vital aspects of the language.
The Anglo-Saxon element supplies the essential parts of speech, the article, pronoun of all kinds, the preposition, the auxiliary verbs, the conjunctions, and the little particles which bind words into sentences and form the joints, sinews and ligaments of the language. It furnishes the most indispensable words of the vocabulary. (See Chap. XIII.) Nowhere is the beauty of Anglo-Saxon better illustrated than in the Lord's Prayer. Fifty-four words are pure Saxon and the remaining ones could easily be replaced by Saxon words. The gospel of St. John is another illustration of the almost exclusive use of Anglo-Saxon words. Shakespeare, at his best, is Anglo-Saxon. Here is a quotation from the Merchant of Venice, and of the fifty-five words fifty-two are Anglo-Saxon, the remaining three French:
The Anglo-Saxon element provides the essential parts of speech: the article, pronouns of all types, prepositions, auxiliary verbs, conjunctions, and the small particles that connect words into sentences, forming the connections and structure of the language. It supplies the most necessary words in the vocabulary. (See Chap. XIII.) Nowhere is the beauty of Anglo-Saxon better shown than in the Lord's Prayer. Fifty-four words are pure Saxon, and the others could easily be swapped out for Saxon words. The gospel of St. John is another example of the nearly exclusive use of Anglo-Saxon words. Shakespeare, at his best, is Anglo-Saxon. Here is a quote from the Merchant of Venice: of the fifty-five words, fifty-two are Anglo-Saxon, and the other three are French:
All that glitters is not gold— Often have you heard that told; Many a man his life hath sold, But my outside to behold. Guilded tombs do worms infold. Had you been as wise as bold, Young in limbs, in judgment old, Your answer had not been inscrolled— Fare you well, your suit is cold.
Not everything that shines is gold— You've often heard that said; Many a man has sold his life, Just to be seen on the outside. Gilded tombs are filled with worms. If you had been as wise as brave, Young in body, but old in judgment, Your answer wouldn’t be written down— Farewell, your suit is cold.
The lines put into the mouth of Hamlet's father in fierce intenseness, second only to Dante's inscription on the gate of hell, have one hundred and eight Anglo-Saxon and but fifteen Latin words.
The lines spoken by Hamlet's father, in a fierce intensity that is only surpassed by Dante's inscription on the gate of hell, contain one hundred and eight Anglo-Saxon words and only fifteen Latin words.
The second constituent element of present English is Latin which comprises those words derived directly from the old Roman and those which came indirectly through the French. The former were introduced by the Roman Christians, who came to England at the close of the sixth century under Augustine, and relate chiefly to ecclesiastical affairs, such as saint from sanctus, religion from religio, chalice from calix, mass from missa, etc. Some of them had origin in Greek, as priest from presbyter, which in turn was a direct derivative from the Greek presbuteros, also deacon from the Greek diakonos.
The second main element of modern English is Latin, which includes words that come directly from the old Roman language and those that were borrowed indirectly through French. The direct borrowings were introduced by Roman Christians who arrived in England at the end of the sixth century with Augustine, and they mainly relate to church matters, such as saint from sanctus, religion from religio, chalice from calix, mass from missa, and so on. Some of these words have Greek origins, like priest from presbyter, which is a direct derivative of the Greek presbuteros, and deacon from the Greek diakonos.
The largest class of Latin words are those which came through the Norman-French, or Romance. The Normans had adopted, with the Christian religion, the language, laws and arts of the Romanized Gauls and Romanized Franks, and after a residence of more than a century in France they successfully invaded England in 1066 under William the Conqueror and a new era began. The French Latinisms can be distinguished by the spelling. Thus Saviour comes from the Latin Salvator through the French Sauveur; judgment from the Latin judiclum through the French jugement; people, from the Latin populus, through the French peuple, etc.
The largest group of Latin words comes from Norman-French, or Romance. The Normans adopted, along with Christianity, the language, laws, and arts of the Romanized Gauls and Franks. After living in France for over a century, they successfully invaded England in 1066 under William the Conqueror, marking the beginning of a new era. The French Latin words can be recognized by their spelling. For example, Saviour comes from the Latin Salvator through the French Sauveur; judgment from the Latin judiclum through the French jugement; and people, from the Latin populus, through the French peuple, and so on.
For a long time the Saxon and Norman tongues refused to coalesce and were like two distinct currents flowing in different directions. Norman was spoken by the lords and barons in their feudal castles, in parliament and in the courts of justice. Saxon by the people in their rural homes, fields and workshops. For more than three hundred years the streams flowed apart, but finally they blended, taking in the Celtic and Danish elements, and as a result came the present English language with its simple system of grammatical inflection and its rich vocabulary.
For a long time, the Saxon and Norman languages wouldn’t mix and were like two separate rivers flowing in different directions. Normans spoke their language in feudal castles, in parliament, and in courts. Saxon was used by people in their homes, fields, and workshops. For over three hundred years, these streams ran separately, but eventually they merged, incorporating elements from Celtic and Danish. This led to the English language we have today, which features a straightforward system of grammatical inflection and a rich vocabulary.
The father of English prose is generally regarded as Wycliffe, who translated the Bible in 1380, while the paternal laurels in the secular poetical field are twined around the brows of Chaucer.
The father of English prose is usually considered to be Wycliffe, who translated the Bible in 1380, while the father of secular poetry is widely recognized as Chaucer.
Besides the Germanic and Romanic, which constitute the greater part of the English language, many other tongues have furnished their quota. Of these the Celtic is perhaps the oldest. The Britons at Caesar's invasion, were a part of the Celtic family. The Celtic idiom is still spoken in two dialects, the Welsh in Wales, and the Gaelic in Ireland and the Highlands of Scotland. The Celtic words in English, are comparatively few; cart, dock, wire, rail, rug, cradle, babe, grown, griddle, lad, lass, are some in most common use.
Besides the Germanic and Romance languages, which make up the majority of English, many other languages have contributed their share. Of these, Celtic is probably the oldest. The Britons at the time of Caesar's invasion were part of the Celtic family. The Celtic language is still spoken in two dialects: Welsh in Wales, and Gaelic in Ireland and the Highlands of Scotland. The Celtic words in English are relatively few; common examples include cart, dock, wire, rail, rug, cradle, babe, grown, griddle, lad, and lass.
The Danish element dates from the piratical invasions of the ninth and tenth centuries. It includes anger, awe, baffle, bang, bark, bawl, blunder, boulder, box, club, crash, dairy, dazzle, fellow, gable, gain, ill, jam, kidnap, kill, kidney, kneel, limber, litter, log, lull, lump, mast, mistake, nag, nasty, niggard, horse, plough, rug, rump, sale, scald, shriek, skin, skull, sledge, sleigh, tackle, tangle, tipple, trust, viking, window, wing, etc.
The Danish influence comes from the pirate invasions of the ninth and tenth centuries. It includes words like anger, awe, baffle, bang, bark, bawl, blunder, boulder, box, club, crash, dairy, dazzle, fellow, gable, gain, ill, jam, kidnap, kill, kidney, kneel, limber, litter, log, lull, lump, mast, mistake, nag, nasty, niggard, horse, plow, rug, rump, sale, scald, shriek, skin, skull, sledge, sleigh, tackle, tangle, tipple, trust, viking, window, wing, etc.
From the Hebrew we have a large number of proper names from Adam and Eve down to John and Mary and such words as Messiah, rabbi, hallelujah, cherub, seraph, hosanna, manna, satan, Sabbath, etc.
From Hebrew, we have many proper names starting from Adam and Eve all the way to John and Mary, along with words like Messiah, rabbi, hallelujah, cherub, seraph, hosanna, manna, satan, Sabbath, etc.
Many technical terms and names of branches of learning come from the Greek. In fact, nearly all the terms of learning and art, from the alphabet to the highest peaks of metaphysics and theology, come directly from the Greek—philosophy, logic, anthropology, psychology, aesthetics, grammar, rhetoric, history, philology, mathematics, arithmetic, astronomy, anatomy, geography, stenography, physiology, architecture, and hundreds more in similar domains; the subdivisions and ramifications of theology as exegesis, hermeneutics, apologetics, polemics, dogmatics, ethics, homiletics, etc., are all Greek.
Many technical terms and fields of study come from Greek. In fact, almost all the terms related to learning and art, from the alphabet to the highest levels of metaphysics and theology, originate from Greek—philosophy, logic, anthropology, psychology, aesthetics, grammar, rhetoric, history, philology, mathematics, arithmetic, astronomy, anatomy, geography, stenography, physiology, architecture, and hundreds more in related areas; the subdivisions and branches of theology such as exegesis, hermeneutics, apologetics, polemics, dogmatics, ethics, homiletics, etc., are all Greek.
The Dutch have given us some modern sea terms, as sloop, schooner, yacht and also a number of others as boom, bush, boor, brandy, duck, reef, skate, wagon. The Dutch of Manhattan island gave us boss, the name for employer or overseer, also cold slaa (cut cabbage and vinegar), and a number of geographical terms.
The Dutch have given us some modern maritime terms, like sloop, schooner, and yacht, as well as several others such as boom, bush, boor, brandy, duck, reef, skate, and wagon. The Dutch of Manhattan Island also contributed the term boss, which means employer or overseer, along with cold slaa (cut cabbage and vinegar), and various geographical terms.
Many of our most pleasing euphonic words, especially in the realm of music, have been given to us directly from the Italian. Of these are piano, violin, orchestra, canto, allegro, piazza, gazette, umbrella, gondola, bandit, etc.
Many of our most beautiful-sounding words, especially in music, come directly from Italian. These include piano, violin, orchestra, canto, allegro, piazza, gazette, umbrella, gondola, bandit, and so on.
Spanish has furnished us with alligator, alpaca, bigot, cannibal, cargo, filibuster, freebooter, guano, hurricane, mosquito, negro, stampede, potato, tobacco, tomato, tariff, etc.
Spanish has given us alligator, alpaca, mustache, cannibal, cargo, filibuster, freebooter, guano, hurricane, mosquito, black, stampede, potato, tobacco, tomato, tariff, and more.
From Arabic we have several mathematical, astronomical, medical and chemical terms as alcohol, alcove, alembic, algebra, alkali, almanac, assassin, azure, cipher, elixir, harem, hegira, sofa, talisman, zenith and zero.
From Arabic, we have various terms in math, astronomy, medicine, and chemistry, including alcohol, alcove, alembic, algebra, alkali, almanac, assassin, azure, cipher, elixir, harem, hegira, sofa, talisman, zenith, and zero.
Bazaar, dervish, lilac, pagoda, caravan, scarlet, shawl, tartar, tiara and peach have come to us from the Persian.
Bazaar, dervish, lilac, pagoda, caravan, scarlet, shawl, tartar, tiara, and peach have all come to us from Persian.
Turban, tulip, divan and firman are Turkish.
Turban, tulip, couch, and decree are all Turkish.
Drosky, knout, rouble, steppe, ukase are Russian.
Drosky, knout, ruble, steppe, ukase are all Russian terms.
The Indians have helped us considerably and the words they have given us are extremely euphonic as exemplified in the names of many of our rivers and States, as Mississippi, Missouri, Minnehaha, Susquehanna, Monongahela, Niagara, Ohio, Massachusetts, Connecticut, Iowa, Nebraska, Dakota, etc. In addition to these proper names we have from the Indians wigwam, squaw, hammock, tomahawk, canoe, mocassin, hominy, etc.
The Native Americans have greatly assisted us, and the words they've given us sound beautiful, as shown in the names of many of our rivers and states, like Mississippi, Missouri, Minnehaha, Susquehanna, Monongahela, Niagara, Ohio, Massachusetts, Connecticut, Iowa, Nebraska, Dakota, and others. Besides these proper names, we've also borrowed words from the Native Americans, such as wigwam, squaw, hammock, tomahawk, canoe, moccasin, hominy, and so on.
There are many hybrid words in English, that is, words, springing from two or more different languages. In fact, English has drawn from all sources, and it is daily adding to its already large family, and not alone is it adding to itself, but it is spreading all over the world and promises to take in the entire human family beneath its folds ere long. It is the opinion of many that English, in a short time, will become the universal language. It is now being taught as a branch of the higher education in the best colleges and universities of Europe and in all commercial cities in every land throughout the world. In Asia it follows the British sway and the highways of commerce through the vast empire of East India with its two hundred and fifty millions of heathen and Mohammedan inhabitants. It is largely used in the seaports of Japan and China, and the number of natives of these countries who are learning it is increasing every day. It is firmly established in South Africa, Liberia, Sierra Leone, and in many of the islands of the Indian and South Seas. It is the language of Australia, New Zealand, Tasmania, and Christian missionaries are introducing it into all the islands of Polynesia. It may be said to be the living commercial language of the North American continent, from Baffin's Bay to the Gulf of Mexico, and from the Atlantic to the Pacific, and it is spoken largely in many of the republics of South America. It is not limited by parallels of latitude, or meridians of longitude. The two great English-speaking countries, England and the United States, are disseminating it north, south, east and west over the entire world.
There are many hybrid words in English, which means words that come from two or more different languages. In fact, English has taken influences from all sources and is constantly expanding its already large vocabulary. Not only is it growing, but it is also spreading globally, promising to embrace the entire human population in the near future. Many believe that English will soon become the universal language. It is now taught as part of higher education in the top colleges and universities in Europe and in commercial centers around the world. In Asia, it follows British influence and commercial routes through the vast East India empire, which has around two hundred and fifty million non-Christian and Muslim residents. It is widely used in the seaports of Japan and China, with the number of locals learning it increasing every day. It is firmly established in South Africa, Liberia, Sierra Leone, and many islands in the Indian and South Pacific Oceans. It is the language of Australia, New Zealand, and Tasmania, and Christian missionaries are introducing it to all the islands of Polynesia. It can be described as the main commercial language of North America, from Baffin's Bay to the Gulf of Mexico, and from the Atlantic to the Pacific, and it is widely spoken in many South American republics as well. It knows no boundaries defined by latitude or longitude. The two major English-speaking countries, England and the United States, are spreading it in all directions across the globe.
CHAPTER XV
MASTERS AND MASTERPIECES OF LITERATURE
Great Authors—Classification—The World's Best Books.
The Bible is the world's greatest book. Apart from its character as a work of divine revelation, it is the most perfect literature extant.
The Bible is the world's greatest book. Besides being a work of divine revelation, it is the most flawless piece of literature that exists.
Leaving out the Bible the three greatest works are those of Homer, Dante and Shakespeare. These are closely followed by the works of Virgil and Milton.
Leaving aside the Bible, the three greatest works are those of Homer, Dante, and Shakespeare. These are closely followed by the works of Virgil and Milton.
INDISPENSABLE BOOKS
Homer, Dante, Cervantes, Shakespeare and Goethe.
Homer, Dante, Cervantes, Shakespeare, and Goethe.
(The best translation of Homer for the ordinary reader is by Chapman. Norton's translation of Dante and Taylor's translation of Goethe's Faust are recommended.)
(The best translation of Homer for the average reader is by Chapman. Norton's translation of Dante and Taylor's translation of Goethe's Faust are suggested.)
A GOOD LIBRARY
Besides the works mentioned everyone should endeavor to have the following:
Besides the mentioned works, everyone should try to have the following:
Plutarch's Lives, Meditations of Marcus Aurelius, Chaucer, Imitation of Christ (Thomas a Kempis), Holy Living and Holy Dying (Jeremy Taylor), Pilgrim's Progress, Macaulay's Essays, Bacon's Essays, Addison's Essays, Essays of Elia (Charles Lamb), Les Miserables (Hugo), Heroes and Hero Worship (Carlyle), Palgrave's Golden Treasury, Wordsworth, Vicar of Wakefield, Adam Bede (George Eliot), Vanity Fair (Thackeray), Ivanhoe (Scott), On the Heights (Auerbach), Eugenie Grandet (Balzac), Scarlet Letter (Hawthorne), Emerson's Essays, Boswell's Life of Johnson, History of the English People (Green), Outlines of Universal History, Origin of Species, Montaigne's Essays, Longfellow, Tennyson, Browning, Whittier, Ruskin, Herbert Spencer.
Plutarch's Lives, Meditations of Marcus Aurelius, Chaucer, Imitation of Christ (Thomas a Kempis), Holy Living and Holy Dying (Jeremy Taylor), Pilgrim's Progress, Macaulay's Essays, Bacon's Essays, Addison's Essays, Essays of Elia (Charles Lamb), Les Miserables (Hugo), Heroes and Hero Worship (Carlyle), Palgrave's Golden Treasury, Wordsworth, Vicar of Wakefield, Adam Bede (George Eliot), Vanity Fair (Thackeray), Ivanhoe (Scott), On the Heights (Auerbach), Eugenie Grandet (Balzac), Scarlet Letter (Hawthorne), Emerson's Essays, Boswell's Life of Johnson, History of the English People (Green), Outlines of Universal History, Origin of Species, Montaigne's Essays, Longfellow, Tennyson, Browning, Whittier, Ruskin, Herbert Spencer.
A good encyclopoedia is very desirable and a reliable dictionary indispensable.
A good encyclopedia is really desirable, and a reliable dictionary is essential.
MASTERPIECES OF AMERICAN LITERATURE
Scarlet Letter, Parkman's Histories, Motley's Dutch Republic, Grant's Memoirs, Franklin's Autobiography, Webster's Speeches, Lowell's Bigelow Papers, also his Critical Essays, Thoreau's Walden, Leaves of Grass (Whitman), Leather-stocking Tales (Cooper), Autocrat of the Breakfast Table, Ben Hur and Uncle Tom's Cabin.
The Scarlet Letter, Parkman's Histories, Motley's Dutch Republic, Grant's Memoirs, Franklin's Autobiography, Webster's Speeches, Lowell's Bigelow Papers, along with his Critical Essays, Thoreau's Walden, Leaves of Grass (Whitman), Leather-stocking Tales (Cooper), Autocrat of the Breakfast Table, Ben Hur and Uncle Tom's Cabin.
TEN GREATEST AMERICAN POETS
Bryant, Poe, Whittier, Longfellow, Lowell, Emerson, Whitman, Lanier, Aldrich and Stoddard.
Bryant, Poe, Whittier, Longfellow, Lowell, Emerson, Whitman, Lanier, Aldrich, and Stoddard.
TEN GREATEST ENGLISH POETS
Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton, Burns, Wordsworth, Keats, Shelley, Tennyson, Browning.
Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton, Burns, Wordsworth, Keats, Shelley, Tennyson, Browning.
TEN GREATEST ENGLISH ESSAYISTS
Bacon, Addison, Steele, Macaulay, Lamb, Jeffrey, De Quincey, Carlyle, Thackeray and Matthew Arnold.
Bacon, Addison, Steele, Macaulay, Lamb, Jeffrey, De Quincey, Carlyle, Thackeray, and Matthew Arnold.
BEST PLAYS OF SHAKESPEARE
In order of merit are: Hamlet, King Lear, Othello, Antony and Cleopatra, Macbeth, Merchant of Venice, Henry IV, As You Like It, Winter's Tale, Romeo and Juliet, Midsummer Night's Dream, Twelfth Night, Tempest.
In order of merit are: Hamlet, King Lear, Othello, Antony and Cleopatra, Macbeth, Merchant of Venice, Henry IV, As You Like It, Winter's Tale, Romeo and Juliet, Midsummer Night's Dream, Twelfth Night, Tempest.
ONLY THE GOOD
If you are not able to procure a library of the great masterpieces, get at least a few. Read them carefully, intelligently and with a view to enlarging your own literary horizon. Remember a good book cannot be read too often, one of a deteriorating influence should not be read at all. In literature, as in all things else, the good alone should prevail.
If you can't get a whole library of great masterpieces, at least pick up a few. Read them thoughtfully and with the goal of broadening your literary perspective. Keep in mind that a good book can be read many times, while one that has a negative influence shouldn't be read at all. In literature, just like in everything else, only the good should thrive.
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!